JP6310669B2 - Game equipment - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus. More particularly, to a viable gaming device playable process for enabling Yu technique using a negotiable value of the player owns.

  Conventionally, there has been a pedestal machine capable of receiving a member IC card that can specify the frequency corresponding to the number of stored balls and the amount of money (for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, there is a counting device installed corresponding to each pachinko machine or slot machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, there is a gaming machine that notifies that it is close to stopping when the estimated number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2007-229111 A JP 2003-79855 A

  However, in the devices of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, a large number of game media such as pachinko balls and medals illegally brought in by a malicious person are counted by the game device and processed so as to be identifiable on the recording media. There is a problem that it is not possible to prevent the game device from being illegally operated and to prevent a large number of game media from being processed in a recordable manner.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming apparatus capable of preventing the use of a recording medium in which the number of large numbers of gaming media can be specified illegally. Is to provide.

(1) A game medium (for example, a medal or a pachinko ball) in a gaming machine (for example, a slot machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 701) using a valuable value owned by a player (for example, a prepaid balance, a possession ball, a storage ball). A gaming device (for example, medal lending machine 100, card unit 750) capable of executing a game enabling process (for example, the lending process and the replay process in FIG. 30) for enabling the used game,
Receiving means (for example, a card reader / writer 187, which may hold a portable terminal) capable of receiving a plurality of types of recording media;
The number of game media that can be used for a game is the number of game media possessed (for example, the number of possessed medals (the number of possessed balls). A gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined game point and generating a game using the game point when a winning occurs. Counting processing means for executing counting processing (for example, counting processing in FIG. 30) for counting as
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (for example, a card return operation) is detected (for example, when YES is determined in step Sb5 in FIG. 30), the number of possessed game media obtained by the counting process is calculated. A recording medium processing means (for example, the return processing of FIG. 30; the holding ball may be specified by holding the portable terminal) that can be specified in correspondence with the recording medium;
Defined number determination means for determining whether or not the number of possessed game media obtained by the counting process has reached a specified number (for example, 6000 medals, 30000 pachinko balls) (for example, step Sb14 in FIG. 31). When,
Impossibility of disabling the processing of the recording medium processing means based on the predetermined recording medium processing operation when the specified number determining means determines that the number of possessed game media has reached the specified number Activating means (for example, as a result of turning on the excess ball flag in step Sb15 in FIG. 31 and disabling the return of the card in steps Sm31 to Sm33 in FIG. 34),
Notification means for performing a predetermined notification when it is determined by the specified number determination means that the number of possessed game media has reached the specified number;
The disabling means is
Depending on the type of recording medium that has been accepted in the previous SL reception means, said recording medium whether to execute deactivation processing of the processing means Ri Do different,
Even if the number of possessed game media falls below the prescribed number after it is once determined that the number of possessed game media has reached the prescribed number by the prescribed number judging means, the processing of the recording medium processing means is performed. Deactivate .

Injustice includes counting balls brought in from the outside, irradiating radio waves etc. to a counting device that counts gaming devices or gaming media, and causing abnormal operations, as well as gaming machines, gaming devices or counting devices. It may be possible to load an illegal board. Further, once the recording medium reaches the player's hand, it becomes difficult to detect fraud. According to such a configuration, even when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected, it is accepted when it is determined that the number of possessed game media counted in the counting process has reached the specified number. The process of making it possible to specify the number of possessed game media on the recorded media is disabled. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming device that can prevent the use of a recording medium that can illegally specify the number of large numbers of gaming media.
(2) In the gaming device of (1) above,
When a second recording medium different from the first recording medium is received after the first recording medium is received, the value of the value corresponding to the first recording medium and the possessed game medium Summing processing means for performing summing processing for enabling at least one of the numbers to be specified corresponding to the second recording medium;
Setting means for performing a setting process for performing settings relating to execution of a specific process different from the summing process in association with the first recording medium when a specific operation is received after the first recording medium is received; With
When the first recording medium is received and the second recording medium is received after receiving the specific operation, the setting unit associates the setting related to the execution of the specific processing with the second recording medium. Perform processing.

( 3 ) In the gaming device of (1) or (2 ) above,
Special operation detecting means (for example, step Sm33 in FIG. 34) for detecting a special operation (for example, confirmation operation with a remote controller) for releasing the disabled state where the processing of the recording medium processing means has been disabled. ,
Release means for releasing the disabled state when the special operation is detected by the special operation detection means (for example, if it is determined in step Sm33 in FIG. The process proceeds to the process of returning the

  According to such a configuration, when there is a possibility of fraud such as the process of enabling the number of game media to be specified on the recording medium to be disabled, a special for releasing the disabled state When the operation is detected, the immobilization can be canceled. As a result, by making it possible for special operations to be performed only by the game shop clerk, in situations where there is a possibility of fraud, it is possible to disable it after confirming whether or not it is actually fraudulent. The situation can be resolved.

( 4 ) In the gaming apparatus (1) to (3 ) above,
The accepting means accepts the recording medium by holding it inside,
The recording medium processing means, when detecting the predetermined recording medium processing operation, discharges the recording medium that enables the number of the possessed game media obtained by the counting process to be specified;
Discriminating means for discriminating whether the recording medium received by the accepting means is a member recording medium processed so as to be able to identify a player or a general recording medium different from the member recording medium (for example, FIG. 31). Step Sb12),
When the recording medium determined by the determining means is the member recording medium (for example, when YES is determined in step Sb12 in FIG. 31), the processing of the recording medium processing means by the disabling means is performed. (For example, as a result of not turning on the excess ball flag in step Sb15 in FIG. 31), NO is determined in step Sm31 in FIG. 34, and the disabling in step Sm33 is not executed. ).

  Since the member recording medium processed so that the player can be specified can specify the player, it is considered that fraud using such a member recording medium is difficult to be performed. According to such a configuration, when a member recording medium is used, it is possible to restrict the immobilization of the process of enabling the number of possessed game media to be specified by the member recording medium. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convenience of the player who has the member recording medium from being impaired.

( 5 ) In the gaming device ( 4 ) above,
It further comprises setting means for setting whether or not the restriction means is restricted (for example, a member card return division prohibition permission setting described in step Sb13 in FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, the game hall can select whether or not to restrict the disabling of the process of enabling the number of possessed game media to be specified by the member recording medium. As a result, it is possible to select at the game hall which priority should be given to the severity of fraud check and the convenience of the player.

( 6 ) In the gaming apparatus (1) to ( 5 ) above,
When the number of possessed game media obtained by the counting process reaches the specified number, a special notification (for example, urging to call a game shop clerk for card return shown in step Sm32 in FIG. 34) Notification means (for example, step Sm32 in FIG. 34. The store clerk may be notified via the hall computer 540 and the intercom 9 of the wireless broadcasting system 20).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the number of possessed game media has reached a specified number. As a result, even if a predetermined recording medium processing operation is performed, it is possible for the player to know that processing for making it possible to specify the number of possessed game media on the recording medium cannot be executed.

( 7 ) In the gaming apparatus of (1) to ( 6 ) above,
When it is determined by the specified number determination means that the number of possessed game media obtained by the counting process has reached the specified number, the determination result is disabled by the disable setting means. Determination result storage means (for example, an excess ball flag that is turned on in step Sb15 in FIG. 31 and turned off in step Sm34 in FIG. 34),
When the determination result is stored in the determination result storage unit, the disable operation unit disables the processing of the recording medium processing unit based on the predetermined recording medium processing operation (for example, FIG. 31). As a result of turning on the excess ball flag in step Sb15 of FIG. 34, the return of the card is interrupted in steps Sm31 to Sm33 in FIG.

  In spite of the possibility that the number of possessed game media can be specified on the recording medium due to the possibility of fraud, the possessed game is deliberately held so that the number of possessed game media falls below the specified number. If the immobilization can be avoided by reducing the number of media, the effectiveness of fraud prevention cannot be increased. According to such a configuration, once the number of possessed game media reaches the specified number, the process for enabling the number of possessed game media to be specified by the recording medium is disabled. As a result, the effectiveness of fraud prevention can be improved.

( 8 ) In the gaming apparatus of (1) to ( 7 ) above,
Information indicating that the number of possessed game media obtained by the counting process has reached the prescribed number (for example, information indicating that the number of possessed balls indicated in step Sb16 in FIG. 31 exceeds the prescribed number). It further includes an output means (for example, step Sb16 in FIG. 31. The gaming apparatus may directly notify by voice or lamp).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside (for example, a game shop clerk) that the number of possessed game media has reached the specified number and may be fraudulent.

( 9 ) A recording medium processing apparatus capable of executing a game enabling process for enabling a game using a game medium in a gaming machine using a valuable value owned by a player,
Lending request signal (for example, LOW level of BRDY signal, game ball addition) indicating that a lending operation (for example, operation of medal lending button 116 of medal lending machine 100, operation of ball lending button 751 of pachinko gaming machine 701) has been accepted. A transmission means for transmitting a request for status information indicating that the request is ON and including an additional number of balls) to the gaming machine;
Lending of game media (for example, actual paying out of pachinko balls, addition of the number of game balls) is executed in the gaming machine, and a lending completion signal (for example, an EXS signal) transmitted when completed and indicating the completion of lending of the game media Receiving means for receiving a high level of the game ball and indicating that the game ball addition result is OK, and a response of a state information response including the number of game balls;
Receiving means for receiving a recording medium;
Counting processing means for executing a counting process for counting the number of game media usable for a game as the number of possessed game media;
A recording medium processing means for processing the number of the possessed game media obtained by the counting process so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the receiving means when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected;
A prescribed number determining means for determining whether or not the number of possessed game media obtained by the counting process has reached a prescribed number;
Impossibility of disabling the processing of the recording medium processing means based on the predetermined recording medium processing operation when the specified number determining means determines that the number of possessed game media has reached the specified number Activating means.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a recording medium processing apparatus that can prevent the use of a recording medium in which a large number of gaming media can be specified illegally.

( 10 ) A management device (for example, a card management computer) that manages a gaming device capable of executing a game enabling process for enabling a game using a game medium in a gaming machine using the valuable value owned by the player 500, hall computer 540, medal management computer 550, or a combination of any two or three thereof)
In order to count the number of game media that can be used in the game as the number of possessed game media, the number of possessed game media obtained by the counting process executed by the game device is recorded in a predetermined manner by the game device. When a medium processing operation is detected, management means for managing the recording medium received by the gaming device so as to be identifiable,
When it is determined that the number of possessed game media obtained by the counting process has reached a predetermined number, the process of enabling the number of possessed game media to be specified by the recording medium is disabled.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a management device capable of preventing the use of a recording medium in which a large number of game media can be specified illegally.

It is a system configuration figure showing the whole picture of a game system in an embodiment. It is a front view showing a slot machine and a medal lending machine. It is a left view which shows the internal mechanism of a medal lending machine. It is a perspective view which shows the principal part of a slot machine and a medal lending machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the front plate of the medal lending machine. It is a partially broken left view which shows the structure of the principal part of a medal lending machine. It is a principal part front view which shows a medal lending machine. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is a perspective view which shows the receiving part of an open state, (b) is a perspective view which shows the receiving part of a closed state. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a counting device. (A) is a vertical side view showing the receiving part in the open state, (b) is a vertical side view showing the receiving part in the closed state. (A) is the side view which shows the receiving part of an open state, and aa sectional drawing of a receiving part, (b) is the side view which shows the receiving part of a closed state, and bb sectional drawing of a receiving part. It is a vertical side view which shows the bottom part of an introduction path | route cover. It is a top view which shows the arrangement | positioning state of a slot machine and a medal lending machine. It is a principal part front view which shows the medal lending machine as a modification. It is a partial longitudinal cross-sectional view of the medal lending machine of FIG. It is a vertical side view which shows the maintenance means as a modification. It is a vertical front view which shows the maintenance means as a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a medal lending machine. (A) is a figure which shows the card table of a medal lending machine, (b) is a figure which shows the game information during card reception of a medal lending machine, (c) shows the medal information of a medal lending machine. It is a figure and (d) is a figure which shows the counter information of a medal lending machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a card management computer. (A) is a figure which shows the membership card table of a card management computer, (b) is a figure which shows the visitor card table of a card management computer. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a medal management computer. (A) is a figure which shows the member saving management table of a medal management computer, (b) is a figure which shows the visitor saving management table of a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the unit management table of a medal management computer. (A) is a figure which shows the member information table of a medal management computer, (b) is a figure which shows the game history table classified by member of a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the unauthorized medal relation setting screen in a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the business end process screen in a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the unauthorized medal user face image screen in a medal management computer. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the overbearing setting process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the card | curd acceptance process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the issue / payment process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the return process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the card lock collation process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the replay process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the counting process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the illegal medal process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the medal storage process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the tightening related process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of the menu screen displayed on the display of a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the touch panel operation processing performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the remaining amount extraction process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the post card insertion process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the card lock process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of the coin splitting process performed in a medal lending machine. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine and card unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the pachinko game machine and card unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the signal transmitted / received between the pachinko machines in the ball loan command process which the card unit in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a figure showing an example of the setting screen displayed on the display of the card management computer in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of the alerting display process which the card unit in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart showing an example of the return process which the card unit in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a figure showing an example of the predetermined amount table which the card unit in a 4th embodiment has memorized. It is a figure showing an example of the display reference amount corresponding goods table which the card unit in a 4th embodiment has memorized. It is a figure showing an example of card DB which the card management computer in 4th Embodiment has memorize | stored. It is a figure showing an example of player DB which the hall computer in 4th Embodiment has memorize | stored. It is a flowchart showing an example of the process which the card unit in 4th Embodiment performs. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the authentication of the enclosure type game machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows a mode before the game board is attached to a front frame, and after being attached. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the process at the time of insertion which a card unit performs when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out and carrying out the coins. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process performed automatically when a game hall closes. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the count request | requirement from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power failure and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P platform and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P stand and CU regarding a count serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 3rd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating the encryption key used for communication between a key management server and communication control IC. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between a CU control part and a security chip (SC). It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between a CU control part and a security chip (SC). It is a figure for demonstrating the starting process at the time of power activation of a CU control part, and hall installation. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of power activation and normal start-up of a CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process at the time of the power activation and factory shipment of a CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial stage key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board | substrate information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence of gaming machine chip information. It is a figure explaining the process of the business message sequence between SC and communication control IC. It is a figure explaining the process of the authentication sequence of communication control IC. It is a figure explaining the process of a 1st authentication sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of a gaming machine chip information authentication sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the authentication abnormality sequence of communication control IC. It is a figure for demonstrating the starting process at the time of power activation of CU control part 323F, and hall installation. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of power activation and normal start-up of CU control part 323F. It is a figure for demonstrating the process at the time of power activation and factory shipment of CU control part 323F. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial stage key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board | substrate information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence of gaming machine chip information. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process of board | substrate authentication key authentication. It is an example of the flowchart for demonstrating the switching process of communication mode, (a) is a communication mode switching process between CU control part-SC, (b) is a communication mode switching process between SC-communication control IC. It is another example of the flowchart for demonstrating the switching process of communication mode, (a) is the communication mode switching process between CU control part-SC, (b) is the communication mode switching process between SC-communication control IC. is there. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the authentication operation | movement of the check of a unified store code. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the authentication operation | movement of a board maker code. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a reception interval monitoring process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating an abnormal message | telegram monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining gaming machine chip inquiry processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the process which cancels | releases a time limit operation function in the game system which concerns on this Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the process which validates a time limit operation function in the game system which concerns on this Embodiment. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main control part, the payout control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a recovery completion confirmation process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between the main control part and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main control part and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the game state notification from the main control part to the payout control part is unreached. It is a block diagram for demonstrating opening detection and connection detection of the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of a count counter. It is a block diagram for demonstrating opening detection and connection detection of the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage state of the data memorize | stored in RAM, and the state from which a data signal is output according to the input of CS signal and CLK signal. It is a flowchart which shows the control operation of CPU of a count counter. It is a flowchart which shows the specific control content of the count display process by a payout control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the fraud detection alarm of P units at the time of a power supply ON / OFF. It is a figure for demonstrating the fraud detection alarm of P units at the time of a disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a total process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed procedure of the correction | amendment process of discharge intensity. It is the figure which illustrated the relationship between the change of the firing intensity T, and a total interruption period. It is the figure (the 1) which illustrated the contents of total data obtained by the result of total processing. It is the figure (the 2) which illustrated the contents of the total data obtained as a result of total processing. It is the figure (the 3) which illustrated the content of the total data obtained by the result of a total process. It is the figure (the 4) which illustrated the content of the total data obtained by the result of a total process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a firing abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a driving | running | working area specific process. It is the figure which illustrated correspondence with a driving field and a firing intensity threshold range. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed procedure of threshold range setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a measurement process. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the system containing a hall control and a central management apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a summary tabulation process. It is the figure which illustrated the contents of summary tabulation data. It is the figure which illustrated the data memorize | stored in the internal memory of Hallcon by threshold range memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a classification display process. It is the figure which illustrated model type data typically. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

[First Embodiment]
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. An embodiment of the gaming system of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram showing an overall image of the gaming system of the embodiment of the present invention. The gaming system mainly includes a slot machine 1, a medal lending machine 100, a card management computer 500, a medal management computer 550, a hall computer 540, a call lamp 200, a gift exchange POS 570, and a checkout device 580. It is configured.

  The slot machine 1 is a gaming machine that is arranged in parallel on each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. The medal lending machine 100 is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the slot machine 1 at a predetermined side position of the slot machine 1 and is issued mainly for general players who are not registered as members. Accepts visitor cards (counting recording media) with a prepaid function, which are game recording media, and membership cards (counting recording media), which are game recording media issued to member players registered as members of the gaming machine In addition, the medal acquired as a result of the process for renting out a medal, which is a game medium used for gaming in the gaming machine, and the game in the corresponding slot machine 1 is counted, and within the range of the counted medal number It is a gaming apparatus of the present invention for paying out (returning) medals. The card management computer 500 manages a visitor card and a membership card used in the medal lending machine 100, the medal lending machine 100, and the like. The medal management computer 550 records the number of medals counted in each medal lending machine 100, the number of saved medals owned by the member player possessing the membership card, and the visitor card that can be used for replaying. This is a management apparatus of the present invention for managing the number of held medals. The hall computer 540 manages game information such as table data of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall.

  The call lamp 200 receives an operation button for calling a store clerk of the game hall, and information on the game from the gaming machine, and the game situation such as the number of jackpots and big bonuses, the number of rotations from the previous jackpot and big bonuses, etc. And a display unit for displaying a game history and the like. The prize exchange POS 570 is installed at a counter where a game shop clerk is present, and is operated by the shop clerk to exchange the game value corresponding to the number of medals and the number of stored medals associated with a membership card or a visitor card with a prize. To execute the process. The payment apparatus 580 receives a membership card or a visitor card, and executes a process for adjusting the remaining amount of the prepaid associated with these cards to cash.

  And each apparatus which comprises these gaming systems of this embodiment is connected so that bidirectional | two-way data communication is possible via the hub (HUB) 70 and the communication cable 80, as shown in FIG. Each connected device is assigned a local IP address to form a local area network (LAN), and each of these devices connected to the local area network (LAN) can be individually identified. Each device has an IP address table in which each device (unit) ID is associated with a local IP address, a unit management table (see FIG. 25) described later, and the like. (Unit) By assigning each local IP address specified by the ID to the transmission data and transmitting / receiving it, each other It has to be able to perform the transmission and reception of data.

  The card management computer 500 according to the present embodiment manages the prepaid balance (game value) remaining in each member card and each visitor card as described above, and these are also transmitted via the communication line 81. It is connected to a management server 82 installed in a card management company outside the amusement hall that manages membership cards and visitor cards so that bidirectional data communication can be performed. From the card management computer 500 to these management servers 82, By transmitting various kinds of management information, the card management company can grasp the sales by the membership card and the visitor card of each game hall by the management server 82.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a monitoring camera system 21 for monitoring the inside of the game hall is connected to the hall computer 540 of the present embodiment, and the inside of the gaming hall imaged by the monitoring camera system 21 is connected. The monitoring image is stored and managed together with the base data of each slot machine 1 and the like. Furthermore, the hall computer 540 of the present embodiment is connected to a wireless broadcast system 20 that controls the income 9 used by the store clerk of the game hall. The hall computer 540 is connected to the store employee's income via the radio broadcast system 20. 9 can send an automatic voice message.

  Next, a slot machine that is an example of a gaming machine and a medal lending machine that is an example of a gaming device will be described. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 1 and the medal lending machine. FIG. 3 is a left side view showing the internal mechanism of the medal lending machine. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing main parts of the slot machine and the medal lending machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state where the front plate of the medal lending machine is opened. FIG. 6 is a partially broken left side view showing the structure of the main part of the medal lending machine. FIG. 7 is a main part front view showing the medal lending machine. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 9A is a perspective view showing the receiving part in the open state, and FIG. 9B is a perspective view showing the receiving part in the closed state. 11A is a longitudinal side view showing the receiving part in the open state, and FIG. 11B is a vertical side view showing the receiving part in the closed state. 12A is a side view showing the receiving part in the open state and aa sectional view of the receiving part, and FIG. 12B is a side view showing the receiving part in the closed state and bb sectional view of the receiving part. is there. FIG. 13 is a longitudinal side view showing the bottom of the introduction path cover. FIG. 14 is a plan view showing an arrangement state of the slot machine and the medal lending machine.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of slot machines 1 are juxtaposed on a plurality of game islands (not shown) arranged in the amusement hall, and a housing 1a having an open front surface and a left side of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported by the front door 1b. The reels 2L, 2C and 2R having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction at the upper position inside the housing 1a. Of the symbols arranged on these reels 2L, 2C and 2R, Three consecutive symbols are arranged so that they can be seen from the perspective window 3.

  When a game (game) is performed in the slot machine 1, first, a medal M, which is an example of a disk-shaped game medium, is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 are valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of bets is set to three regardless of the gaming state and the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 become valid. In addition, when the medal M is inserted exceeding the maximum number among the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the see-through window 3 of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is a winning symbol combination. Here, only the winning line L set across the symbols arranged in the lower stage of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is defined as the winning line. In the present embodiment, one winning line is used, but a plurality of winning lines may be defined.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and a predetermined symbol combination (also called a combination) in one of the pay lines L1 to L5 is used for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. When the display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals M are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (for example, 50), the medal M is paid directly to the lower plate 5 provided so as to protrude forward from the medal payout opening 9 to the lower part of the front door 1b. It is like that. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the winning lines L1 to L5, a gaming state (for example, according to the combination of symbols (for example, Regular bonuses and big bonus bonuses).

  Next, the medal lending machine 100 will be described. The medal lending machine 100 is provided in the slot machine 1 so as to correspond one-to-one. In the present embodiment, a medal lending machine 100 corresponding to one slot machine 1 is arranged on the right side of the slot machine 1. In this embodiment, the medal lending machine 100 is provided so as to correspond to the slot machine 1 on a one-to-one basis. For example, the medal lending machine 100 is provided between the two slot machines 1 and 1. A single medal lending machine 100 may be provided so as to correspond to the pair 1 and shared by the two left and right slot machines 1 and 1.

  The medal lending machine 100 is installed corresponding to a side position on a predetermined side of the slot machine 1 (right side toward the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment), and is used for bills or general players who are not registered as members. In a gaming machine, a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a game card, and a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a member player registered as a member in the game hall, are received. A process for lending medal M, which is a disk-shaped game medium used for a game, and for receiving a medal M acquired by a game in a slot machine 1 and counting the received medal M A process and a process for making it possible to specify the counted number of acquired medals from a visitor card or a membership card are performed.

  The medal lending machine 100 is a card management computer 500 that manages the visitor card and the membership card used in the medal lending machine 100, the medal lending machine 100, and the medal that manages the number of stored medals and the number of medals. Various computers, such as a management computer 550 and a hall computer 540 for managing game information such as table data of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall, are connected, and bidirectional data is transmitted between these computers. Communication is possible.

  The visitor card and membership card used in the present embodiment have a non-volatile memory for storing various data, rewrite and read out of the recorded information, and non-contact with an external reader / writer device. An IC card having an IC chip having a control unit that performs communication is used. The visitor card and the membership card include a card ID that can identify each card, specifically, a visitor card. The card ID that starts with VC is stored in advance in the member card, and the member card ID that starts with KC is stored in a non-rewritable manner, the type of which can be identified from the card ID, and the prepaid that can specify the prepaid balance Various data such as remaining amount data is stored.

  The member card is issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the amusement hall, and a member ID assigned to the member is stored in a non-rewritable manner. In addition, the member player can use the member card to make a medal M that has been once acquired and counted, and a stored medal that can be used again in the game after the next day. The number of saving medals, which is data of the saving medal, is not directly recorded, and these saving medals are associated with the card ID and the member ID in the medal management computer 550 that manages the information of the saving medals. By being stored, the card ID and the member ID are specified.

  Similarly to the saving medal, the medal management computer 550 also stores the card ID, the member ID, and the medal information in association with each other, so that the card ID and the member ID are stored. The number of medals can be specified from. In addition to these membership medals, not only the membership card but also the visitor card, the medal management computer 550 stores information on the possession medal in association with the card ID. This information is not recorded. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to store information on medals in a visitor card so that it can be compared with information on medals in the medal management computer 550.

  The visitor card is purchased and issued by a card issuing / depositing machine (not shown) installed in the amusement hall and also issued by the medal lending machine 100.

  Next, the medal lending machine 100 of this Embodiment is demonstrated based on FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment can open and close a housing 101 that has a vertically long rectangular front view and a front lower opening of the housing 101. And an opening / closing plate 102, and various devices to be described later are incorporated therein.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a bill insertion slot 110 for inserting bills is provided at the upper front of the opening / closing plate 102, and a liquid crystal display 123 with a touch panel 124 is provided at a lower position thereof. In the liquid crystal display 123 with the touch panel 124, various operations on the medal lending machine 100 are accepted, and information associated with these operations and information such as the prepaid balance, the number of medals, and the number of stored medals are displayed. Is done. At a lower position of the liquid crystal display 123 with the touch panel 124, a state notification lamp 111 configured by a full color LED and lit in a plurality of colors so that the state of the medal lending machine 100 can be notified, a membership card, A card insertion slot 112 for inserting a visitor card is provided.

  Below the status notification lamp 111, a deposit enabling lamp 113 for notifying that the deposit is available, a return button 114 for discharging the inserted membership card or visitor card, and a card for displaying a card balance, an error code, and the like. Status of balance display section 115, medal lending button 116 for paying out medals M, medal lending lamp 117 for displaying that medals M can be lent, and a lending medal storage section 183 (see FIG. 3) described later When the member card is accepted, the savings specified by the member card ID and the member ID recorded on the member card when the member card is received. A replay button 121 for executing a replay game using the number of medals and a replay game A personal identification number display unit 119 for displaying a personal identification number to be input to the player, and a face image photographing camera 188 (player imaging means) capable of photographing a facial image of a player playing a game in the corresponding slot machine 1. It is arranged.

  Below these various operation units, a medal replenishment door 130 for opening a part of the opening / closing plate 102 when replenishing the medal M to the lending medal storage unit 183 is provided so as to be openable and closable with the lower side as a rotation axis. It has been. The medal supply door 130 cannot be opened unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by a shop clerk or the like is inserted into the medal supply door key 131.

  A receiving unit 140 for receiving and counting the medals M acquired by the player through the game is provided at a position below the medal supply door 130, and a receiving unit 140 is provided from the lower part of the receiving unit 140. An introduction path cover 141 that constitutes an introduction path for guiding the received medal M downward and introducing it into the introduction port 142 of the counting device 190 described later is extended downward.

  Further, a nozzle 150 that is an example of a guide member that guides the medal M paid out from the payout device 182 to the lower plate 5 of the slot machine 1 slightly below the center position in the vertical direction of the introduction path cover 141. The insertion path cover 141 is inserted in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, at the upper position in the medal lending machine 100, the banknote insertion slot 110 is connected to the banknote insertion slot 110. And a banknote recognition unit 180 for outputting the identification result to the control unit 181 is provided. In the banknote identification unit 180, various banknotes (10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 2,000 yen, 1,000 yen each) are provided. (Banknotes) can be accepted.

  At the lower position of the bill recognition unit 180, an internal card reader / writer (not shown) built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 112 and the medal lending machine so that it can be easily connected to each part constituting the medal lending machine 100. A control unit 181 for controlling the operation of 100, a control unit 181 in which a card stock section (not shown) for storing the collected visitor cards and the like are integrally assembled are arranged. The control unit 181 is provided so that it can be pulled forward by opening the medal replenishment door 130 and can be pulled out from the housing 101 to perform maintenance and the like.

  The internal card reader / writer 187 reads out recorded information such as a (member) card ID, a member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, and the like recorded in the member card and visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 112. Has a card stock part (not shown) that stores visitor cards (including recovered cards) used for issuance and can issue cards stored in the card stock part (not shown) It is said that.

  At a position below the control unit 181, that is, at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the housing 101, a rental medal storage unit 183 that stores the payout medal M is provided. The lending medal storage unit 183 is formed above the medal hopper 183a and a medal hopper 183a that opens upward and is provided above the payout device 182 that pays out the medal M stored in the lending medal storage unit 183. The medal M stored in the lending medal storage unit 183 is aligned and guided toward the payout device 182 by the medal hopper 183a, and then a rotating disk (not illustrated) provided therein is illustrated. The medals are discharged from the medal discharge port 182a formed on the front surface and are discharged to the lower plate 5 through the nozzle 150.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a medal replenishment door 130 is disposed above the medal hopper 183 a, and the medal M can be replenished to the lending medal storage unit 183 by opening the medal replenishment door 130. ing. In the present embodiment, the medal replenishment door 130 is opened so that the medal M can be replenished to the lending medal storage unit 183. However, a medal replenishment device (not shown) provided on a gaming machine installation island (not shown). ), The medal M may be automatically replenished.

  A counting device 190 for counting the number of introduced medals M is disposed below the payout device 182. As shown in FIG. 10, the counting device 190 is formed with a counting port 191 that opens on the upper surface, and the medal M received from the counting port 191 slides along the introduction inclined portion 191a. M is put into the rotating disk 190g, and the medals M discharged one by one from the rotating disk 190g are aligned and flow down along the counting inclined portion 191b. A photo sensor 190e for detecting the presence of the medal M is provided in the middle of the flow path of the medal M, and a medal for capturing an image of the medal M at the moment when the end of the medal M is detected by the photo sensor 190e. A photographing camera 190c (game medium imaging means) is provided.

  Then, the controller 190a (appropriate determination means) of the counting device 190 instantaneously determines the authenticity of the medal M (whether it is a regular medal or an illegal medal) based on the medal image photographed by the medal photographing camera 190c, and based on the result of the judgment. A certain medal determination information is transmitted to the control unit 181 and the flow path of the medal M is switched by the flow path switching unit 190d, and the regular medal M is counted as the regular medal M and flows toward the discharge port 192. M is counted as an illegal medal and flows toward the medal storage box 194 set in the counting device 190. As described above, the illegal medals are not discharged from the discharge port 192 after being counted, but are stored in the medal storage box 194, thereby preventing unauthorized medals from being recycled and reused. Has been. Thus, the medal M introduced into the counting device 190 is determined for authenticity and counted. Further, the medal M discharged from the discharge port 192 is discharged into a gaming machine installation island (not shown) through an opening formed in the lower surface of the housing 101, and a collecting device (not shown) provided in the gaming machine installation island. ) To be collected.

  As will be described later, when a predetermined number (for example, 100) of illegal medals are stored in the medal storage box 194, a predetermined error signal is output to the island controller on the gaming machine installation island, the hall computer 540, or the like. Thus, error notification is performed, and illegal medals can be collected as needed without the need for periodic check by a game clerk or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a predetermined amount of illegal medals M are stored in the medal storage box 194 at the end of business, it is possible to notify the store clerk to that effect. ing.

  In addition, the illegal medals (inappropriate game media) in the present embodiment are not only medals brought from outside such as other stores (fake medals (second improper game media)) but also a predetermined area in the own store. The medals used in other areas are also included in the illegal medals.

  For example, a game is performed using a first area where a slot machine for playing using a first medal worth 5 yen per piece is installed and a second medal worth 20 yen per piece. For example, when a first medal is brought in and used in the second area, the second area where the slot machine is installed is borrowed in the first area where the lending rate is low. By using the first medal in the second area where the lending rate is high, the player can gain profits illegally. In such a case, the first medal becomes an illegal medal in the second area.

  Further, when registering the identification information of medals that are normally used in the counting device 190, about 100 regular medals are inserted into the counting device 190 in the predetermined medal registration mode, and the medal photographing camera 190c is loaded. The image information of the regular medal is registered in the memory 190b (see FIG. 19). The counting device 190 determines authenticity by comparing the image of the regular medal stored in the memory 190b with the image of the medal to be determined. Similarly, when registering the amusement island medal (own store medal) in the other area of the own store, about 100 pieces of own store medals are put in the counting device 190 in advance, and the image of the own store medal is displayed. It is registered in the memory 190b.

  In addition, by registering medals corresponding to each of the plurality of game areas in the own store in this way, for example, in the game hall, the medals corresponding to the first game area and the second game area in accordance with the model change or the like. Each time you change the model, you do not need to register a medal that corresponds to the game area every time you exchange a corresponding medal. Has no trouble registering medals.

  The transition to the predetermined medal registration mode is impossible from the outside of the medal lending machine 100, and the counting device 190 housed in the medal lending machine 100 is taken out and a predetermined operation is performed. The player or the like illegally shifts to the medal registration mode and cannot change the registration.

  In addition, the image information of the regular medal or the own store medal registered in the counting device 190 of one medal lending machine 100 is transmitted to the medal management computer 550, and the image information is sent to the other plurals via the medal management computer 550. By transmitting to the medal lending machine 100, the counting device 190 of each medal lending machine 100 may register the image information of the regular medal or the own store medal. In this way, particularly when a large number of medal lending machines 100 are installed, it is possible to easily register image information of regular medals or own store medals. Furthermore, in the medal management computer 550, the setting of the regular medal and the own store medal can be changed as appropriate (game medium type setting means).

  It should be noted that the controller 190a of the counting device 190 is based on decorations, characters, and the like applied to the surface of the medal when comparing the image of the regular medal stored in the memory 190b with the image of the medal to be determined. Various features are extracted, and the similarity is calculated based on the matching status of the extracted various feature amounts. Based on these various facial feature quantities, a difference sum, an average ratio, or a ratio sum is obtained as the similarity. If the similarity value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, it is determined as a regular medal.

  In addition, the controller 190a (game medium type setting means) of the counting device 190 compares the medal image determined as an illegal medal with the image of the own store medal stored in the memory 190b. . Also in the determination of whether or not it is the own store medal, similar to the determination of the regular medal, the similarity is calculated based on the coincidence state of various feature amounts, and the comparison is performed. The various features described above also include information such as the diameter of the medal, so that medals of different sizes (for example, φ25 medal and φ30 medal) can be compared and identified.

  The front side of the counting port 191 is provided with an introduction member 193 having an upward U-shape when viewed from the front. The medal M received and dropped by the receiving unit 140 is introduced into the counting port 191 as will be described later.

  A power supply unit 198 for supplying power to various devices provided in the housing 101 is provided on the back surface of the control unit 181 in the housing 101 so as to protrude from the back surface of the housing 101. .

  As shown in FIG. 2, when a player plays a game in the slot machine 1, 1000 yen medals M (for example, 50) are ejected from the payout device 182 by inserting the banknote into the banknote insertion slot 110. Since it is paid out to the lower tray 5 of the slot machine 1 through the nozzle 150, a game can be played using this. Also, if a high-value bill (2000 yen, 5000 yen, 10000 yen) is inserted, if there is no visitor card being accepted, a medal M worth 1000 yen will be paid out, and the remaining amount will be a newly issued visitor card If there is a visitor card or membership card being recorded, the acceptance amount is added to the remaining amount of the visitor card or membership card being accepted and updated. Also, if the visitor card or membership card being accepted has a card balance of 1000 yen or more, 1000 yen medals M (for example, 50) are paid out from the payout device 182 by pressing the lending button 116. The remaining amount is subtracted and updated. Also, if there are more than a predetermined number of medals or saving medals on the member card or visitor card being accepted, 1000 yen can be obtained by pressing the replay button 121 on the condition that the authentication with the password is OK. Minute medals M (for example, 50) are paid out from the payout device 182, and the number of medals or the number of stored medals is subtracted and updated.

  Further, when the player has won the medal M in the game, the received medal M that has been paid out to the lower plate 5 is manually inserted into the receiving unit 140, and the received medal M has dropped in the introduction path cover 141. After that, it is introduced into a counting port 191 which is an introduction part of the counting device 190. The medal M introduced into the counting device 190 is detected by a medal detection sensor (not shown) provided in the counting device 190, and the rotating disk is detected based on the detection of the medal M by the medal detection sensor. The number of medals introduced by driving (not shown) is counted, and the counted number of medals is updated by adding to the number of medals specified from the member card or visitor card being accepted. M is discharged from the discharge port 192 into the gaming machine installation island (not shown).

  In the present embodiment, counting is started based on the detection of a medal M by a medal detection sensor (not shown) provided in the counting device 190. A counting button or the like that can be operated by the player may be provided, and counting may be started when the counting button is operated.

  When the player finishes the game, the player operates the return button 114 to return the member card or the visitor card that is being accepted (including the visitor card issued by inserting the cash). If there is a medal number (the number of medals) that has been obtained and counted in the game, a medal management computer 550 sends a medal count update request including the card ID and the number of medals to be returned to the member card or visitor card. The number of medals included in the medal count update request is updated by adding to the number of medals corresponding to the card ID of the member card or visitor card. It is possible to specify the number of medals from, and exchange it for a prize corresponding to the number of medals, or use it for another game. Further, when there is a prepaid balance, the prepaid balance can be settled by the settlement device 580 or the like installed in the game hall.

  As described above, in the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment, not only the medal M is lent when the game is started in the corresponding slot machine 1, but also the settlement is executed at the end of the game. Therefore, the player can start and settle the game without moving from the slot machine 1.

  Next, based on FIGS. 4-14, the detailed structure of the various members provided in the opening-and-closing board 102 is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the opening / closing plate 102 is formed in a backward U shape in plan view from a front plate 102 a and bent pieces 102 b bent from the left and right sides of the front plate 102 a to the rear side. When the opening formed in the lower front portion of the housing 101 is closed, the left and right bent pieces 102b are fitted inside the front ends of the left and right side plates of the housing 101. Further, in the present embodiment, the locking grooves 103 provided at the top and bottom of the bent piece 102b are locked to the locking pins 104 provided on the inner surface of the side plate of the housing 101 so as to be attached to the closed position. .

  An opening / closing plate key 106 is provided at the upper end of the opening / closing plate 102, and the opening / closing plate 102 is detachably attached to the front side of the medal lending machine 100 by being locked by the opening / closing plate key 106. The opening / closing plate 102 cannot be removed unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by a store clerk or the like of the game hall is inserted into the opening / closing plate key 106.

  The opening / closing plate 102 is configured to be able to cover the front side of the lending medal storage unit 183 and the counting device 190, that is, the lower side of the medal supply door 130 in the front opening of the housing 101, and the upper side thereof is a banknote identification. A part of the front surface of the medal lending machine 100 is constituted by the front surfaces of the unit 180 and the control unit 181.

  At the height position corresponding to the introduction member 193 on the opening / closing plate 102, a horizontally long introduction port 142 is formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. Further, a rear insertion hole 143b having a horizontally long rectangular shape and a size through which the nozzle 150 can be inserted is formed above the introduction port 142. In addition, a long hole 105a is formed at the vertical position on the left and right side of the back surface, and a locking tube 105 having a vertically long rectangular shape is projected from the back surface of the long hole 105a.

  The introduction path cover 141 is inclined to the rear side downward from the lower end of the front plate 141a, the front plate 141a having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the side plate 141b bent from the left and right sides of the front plate 141a to the back side. An inclined plate 141c (second bottom surface portion) and an inclined plate 141d inclined downward from the lower ends of the left and right side plates 141b downward are formed in a vertically long box shape whose back and upper surfaces are open, and from the inlet 142 It is extended upwards. The lower part is formed so as to be gradually inclined toward the center of the back surface toward the introduction port 142. In the present embodiment, the inner surfaces of the left and right side plates 141b constitute two opposing side wall surfaces among the wall surfaces forming the inside of the introduction path.

  In addition, an inclined plate 141c '(first bottom surface portion) is provided above the inclined plate 141c so as to overlap with the inclined plate 141c with a predetermined distance. The bottom of the introduction path cover 141 is formed by these two inclined plates 141c and 141c '. The upper inclined plate 141c 'extends toward the counting device 190 from the lower inclined plate 141c. As will be described later, a plurality of small-diameter punching holes 148, 148 '(through holes) penetrated by punching are formed in the inclined plates 141c, 141c'. Each punching hole 148, 148 'has a diameter smaller than the diameter 2R of the medal M.

  Outward locking claws 144 project from a position corresponding to the long hole 105a at the rear end of the side plate 141b. By inserting these locking claws 144 from the front side of the long hole 105a, a locking cylinder is formed. The introduction path cover 141 is attached to the front surface of the opening / closing plate 102. In the mounted state, the rear end of the inclined plate 141 c ′ is inserted through the introduction port 142 and protrudes to the back side, and is arranged so that the rear end overlaps above the introduction member 193. Since the locking claw 144 is locked on the back surface of the opening / closing plate 102 in this way, the introduction path cover 141 cannot be removed from the opening / closing plate 102 unless the opening / closing plate 102 is opened. Thus, unauthorized access to the counting device 190 from the introduction port 142 is prevented.

  In this way, the introduction path cover 141 is attached to the front surface of the opening / closing plate 102, whereby the rear opening of the introduction path cover 141 is closed by the opening / closing plate 102, and the medal M received by the receiving unit 140 is introduced into the counting device 190. An introduction path K for the medal M extending in the vertical direction to be introduced into the mouth 142 is configured.

  Further, a front insertion hole 143a having substantially the same shape as the rear insertion hole 143b is formed at a position slightly below the position corresponding to the rear insertion hole 143b in the front plate 141a, and the nozzle 150 can be inserted therethrough. The front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b for inserting the nozzle 150 are formed on one end side (for example, the right side) of the introduction path K in the left-right width direction, and only on the other end (left end) side of the nozzle 150. A narrow path K1 is formed.

  On the upper left and right sides of the protective member 145, columnar rod members 146a and 146b are provided in the front-rear direction, that is, substantially parallel to the side plate 141b, and at an upper position between the rod members 146a and 146b, The rod-shaped member 146c is provided in the front-rear direction, that is, substantially parallel to the side plate 141b. These rod-shaped members 146a to 146c are arranged at positions farther from the side plate 141b than the diameter 2R of the medal M, so that the medal M is not clogged between the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c and the side plate 141b. And by sticking such rod-shaped members 146a to 146c in the front-rear direction, the posture of the dropped medal M is aligned to the lateral posture in which the front and back surfaces face the side plate 141b.

  The nozzle 150 extends from the front surface of the payout device 182 through the rear insertion hole 143b and the front insertion hole 143a, and is connected to the base 151 so as to protrude from the front insertion hole 143a toward the player side. The base 151 is formed so as not to be deformable, and the protrusion 152 is formed so as to be deformable at least toward the slot machine 1 with respect to the base 151.

  Specifically, the base 151 is formed in a rectangular tube shape, and is fixed to the back surface of the opening / closing plate 102 with screws (not shown) or the like so as to be inclined downward from the medal discharge port 182a. . In the attached state, the rear end opening is disposed so as to cover the medal discharge port 182a, and the front end protrudes forward through the rear insertion hole 143b and the front insertion hole 143a.

  The projecting portion 152 is formed by connecting a plurality of eaves members 152 a having an upward U-shape so as to be pivotable in the vertical and horizontal directions by universal joints (universal joints), and the rear eave member 152 a is connected to the front end of the base portion 151. It is connected by a universal joint (universal joint) so as to be rotatable in the vertical and horizontal directions. That is, the base 151 is fixed in a state of extending in the longitudinal direction of the introduction path cover 141, that is, in the front-rear direction intersecting with the movement (falling) direction of the medal M, whereas the base 151 The projecting portion 152 connected to the tip of 151 can be rotated (deformed) in the left-right direction (see FIG. 2) and the up-down direction (see FIG. 3).

  As described above, the base 151 inserted through the introduction path cover 141 is not deformable, so that the fall of the medal M is not hindered, and the protrusion 152 can be deformed to the slot machine 1 side. Since the issued medal M can be directly guided to the slot machine 1, the usability is improved.

  As shown in FIG. The medal M inserted into the opening 140a of the receiving unit 140 is guided into the introduction path cover 141 by the receiving unit 140, and falls downward in the introduction path K including the introduction path cover 141 and the opening / closing plate 102. . In the middle of dropping, the medal M collides with the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c facing in the front-rear direction, so that the posture of the medal M is changed to a lateral posture in which the front and back surfaces face the left and right side plates 141b.

  As shown in FIG. 8, a protective member 145 that guides the medal M falling from above to the left side of the nozzle 150 so as not to collide with the nozzle 150 at a position above the front insertion hole 143 a. Is provided. The protection member 145 has a guide inclined surface 145 b that is inclined downward from the right side to the left side, and is formed so as to surround the nozzle 150. Thus, the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b for inserting the nozzle 150 in the front-rear direction are formed so as to be biased toward one end side in the left-right width direction (right side in the present embodiment). The narrow path K1 formed so as to avoid the nozzle 150 may be formed on the right side instead of the left side.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the base 151 of the nozzle 150 protruded ahead rather than the front insertion hole 143a, the protrusion part 152 was rotatably connected in the front position rather than this front insertion hole 143a. In the introduction path K, the base 151 may be rotatably connected. In this case, it is necessary to enlarge the front insertion hole 143a so that the movement of the protrusion 152A can be allowed. However, since the medal M may flow out from the gap, the protection member 145 surrounds the nozzle 150. Good.

  In addition, by surrounding the periphery of the nozzle 150 in a cylindrical shape with the protection member 145 in this way, the medal M does not enter the protection member 145, so that the protrusion 152 A of the nozzle 150 is connected to the base 151. Even if it is provided so as to be rotatable, the drop of the medal M is not adversely affected.

  Next, the receiving unit 140 that receives the medal M inserted by the player will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 4, the receiving portion 140 is provided at the upper end of the introduction path cover 141 so as to open upward. As shown in FIG. 9A, the receiving unit 140 includes a front plate 141a that constitutes the introduction path cover 141 described above, a side plate 141b provided on the side of the front plate 141a, and an introduction path cover 141. And an opening / closing plate 102 to be attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 9A, the height positions of the upper end edges of the left and right side plates 141b are different from each other, and the left and right side plates 141b are provided with a height difference of the vertical dimension V. Further, of the left and right side plates 141b, the left side plate 141b, that is, one side plate 141b provided on the slot machine 1 side corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 is formed higher than the other side plate 141b provided on the right side. ing. The upper end edge of the left side plate 141b is curved and formed so as to bulge upward, and the upper end edge of the right side plate 141b is formed so as to be recessed downward.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the receiving unit 140 can be opened and closed in an open state in which the medal M can be received and in a closed state in which the medal M cannot be received. A lid member 160 (lid body) is provided. The lid member 160 includes a lid plate 160a (main lid portion) having a substantially plate shape that closes the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140, and lid member side plates 160b (lid portions) provided on the left and right sides of the lid plate 160a. Side wall). Note that the left and right lid member side plates 160b of the lid member 160 are disposed so as to overlap and contact the inner sides of the left and right side plates 141b of the receiving portion 140 (see the sectional view of FIG. 12). In the present embodiment, the opening formed at the upper end of the introduction path cover 141 is the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140.

  The left and right lid member side plates 160b of the lid member 160 have pivots 161 pivotally supported by pivot shaft holes 149 provided on the front side of the left and right side plates 141b in the introduction path cover 141. A lid member 160 is attached to be pivotable in the front-rear direction with the pivot 161 as an axis. The lid member 160 is rotated about the pivot 161 as an axis, thereby opening the receiving portion 140 (see FIGS. 9A, 11A, and 12A). It can be displaced at the closed position for closing the receiving portion 140 (see FIGS. 9B, 11B, and 12B). The lid member 160 is maintained at a predetermined opening angle when the front side of the lid plate 160a is brought into contact with the upper end edge of the front plate 141a of the introduction path cover 141 in the open position. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, the height positions of the upper edge of the left and right lid member side plates 160b of the lid member 160 in the opened state are different from each other, and the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141 are different from each other. Similarly to the above, a vertical difference in height is provided. Further, like the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141 described above, of the left and right lid member side plates 160b, the left lid member side plate 160b, that is, one lid member side plate 160b provided on the slot machine 1 side is It is formed higher than the other lid member side plate 160b provided on the lid. The upper end edge of the left lid member side plate 160b is curved and formed so as to bulge upward, and the upper end edge of the right lid member side plate 160b is curved and formed so as to be recessed downward. Yes. As will be described later, the lower end edge of the right lid member side plate 160b is curved and formed so as to be recessed.

  The curved shape of the upper edge of the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 and the curved shape of the upper edge of the right side lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160 are substantially the same, and the lid member 160 is open. In the right side plates 141b and 160b of the receiving part 140, a large dent is formed. This dent is the position of the joint between the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 and the right side lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160 (the position where the side plate 141b and the lid member side plate 160b overlap in FIG. 9A). In the curved shape in which the upper end edge of the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 and the upper end edge of the right side lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160 are continuous in a state where the lid member 160 is open. It is formed. That is, in the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141, the distance from the pivot hole 149 to the upper end edge of the joint position of the side plate 141b, and in the right lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160, from the pivot 161 to the lid member side plate 160b. The distance to the upper edge of the position of the seam is substantially the same distance.

  For example, when the player places the medal M paid out to the lower plate 5 of the slot machine 1 into the receiving unit 140 on the right side, the player performs an operation of grasping and inserting the medal M with the right hand. . At that time, in the opened state of the lid member 160, a curved large dent is formed on the right side of the receiving unit 140, that is, on the side plates 141b and 160b on the opposite side of the slot machine 1, so that the player can receive the medal M. When holding and inserting the medal M from the receiving unit 140, the little finger side of the hand holding the medal M is not easily obstructed by the right side plates 141b and 160b, so that the medal M can be inserted smoothly. Further, since the left side of the receiving unit 140, that is, the side plates 141b and 160b on the slot machine 1 side are formed higher, the inserted medal M hits the left side plates 141b and 160b formed higher and receives the receiving unit 140. The medal M is prevented from being scattered.

  That is, when the player grabs and inserts the medal M with his right hand, the right hand moves from the right side to the left side of the receiving portion 140 around the player's shoulders and elbows. By forming a large curved dent in the right side plates 141b and 160b of the receiving part 140, the medal M is prevented from being caught on the side plates 141b and 160b and spilling to the right side of the receiving part 140, and the receiving part 140 is received. Even if the medal M separated from the right hand moving from the right side to the left side is about to spill down to the left side of the receiving part 140, the inside of the receiving part 140 is blocked by the left side plates 141b and 160b formed high. Therefore, the medals M are prevented from being scattered.

  In the present embodiment, the left side plates 141b and 160b are formed high, and the right side plates 141b and 160b are formed with large curved dents. Of the upper edges of the left side plates 141b and 160b, The height difference from the highest part to the lowest part of the upper edge of the right side plates 141b and 160b is about 4 cm. This is because if the average left-right width dimension of the palm of the player's person is about 8 cm, the thumb side rises when the medal M is inserted into the receiving unit 140 with the medal M held in the palm. Is assumed to be slightly inclined (inclination angle of about 30 °), the difference in height between the thumb side and the little finger side in the hand is about 4 cm. Therefore, by setting the height difference from the highest part of the upper edge of the left side plates 141b and 160b to the lowest part of the upper edge of the right side plates 141b and 160b, the medal M becomes the thumb of the hand. It will not spill from the side.

  In the present embodiment, when the lid member 160 is in the open state, a large curved dent is formed in the right side plates 141b and 160b of the receiving portion 140. The shape of this dent is a curved shape. Not limited to this, the right side plates 141b and 160b of the receiving portion 140 may be formed as large recesses cut out in a substantially V shape, or may be formed as rectangular recesses.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 11 (b), in the right lid member side plate 160b, when the lid member 160 is in a closed state, a portion (upper edge) of the right lid member side plate 160b ( The lower end edge of the right lid member side plate 160b in the opened state is formed so as to be recessed. The curved shape of the upper edge of the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 and the curved shape of the upper edge of the right side lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160 are substantially the same, and when closed The both side plates 141b and 160b overlap each other so that the upper end edge of the lid member side plate 160b and the upper end edge of the right side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 are substantially flush with each other. That is, the lid member side plate 160 b on the right side of the lid member 160 is overlapped with and covered with the side plate 141 b on the right side of the introduction path cover 141.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the lid member 160 is closed, the lid member side plate 160b on the left side of the lid member 160 is overlapped with and covered with the side plate 141b on the left side of the introduction path cover 141. It is like that. Therefore, when the lid member 160 is in the closed state, the left and right lid member side plates 160b cannot be touched from the outside by the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141, so that a player or the like can remove the lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160. It becomes impossible to pick and it is possible to prevent the lid member 160 from being opened by the unauthorized operation of the lid member side plate 160b without using a screw 107 as a maintenance means described later. In the present embodiment, it may not be possible to completely prevent the lid member 160 from being opened, and at least it is difficult to open the lid member 160, or it takes time to open the lid member 160. It may be difficult to open.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12, female screw holes 162 into which screws 107 are screwed are provided in two front and rear sides on the side surface of the left lid member side plate 160b of the lid member 160. Further, the left side plate 141b of the receiving portion 140 is formed with two screw insertion holes 108a and 108b through which the screw 107 is inserted. The respective screw insertion holes 108a and 108b are used in the open state and the closed state of the lid member 160. When the lid member 160 is in the open state, the female screw hole 162 of the lid member side plate 160b is disposed corresponding to one screw insertion hole 108a provided at the front position, and the screw 107 causes the lid member side plate 160b to be connected to the side plate 141b. By fixing the cover member 160, the open state of the lid member 160 is maintained (see FIG. 12A). The screw 107, the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b through which the screw 107 is inserted, and the female screw hole 162 into which the screw 107 is screwed together constitute the maintaining means in the present embodiment.

  When the lid member 160 is in the closed state, the female screw hole 162 of the lid member side plate 160b is disposed corresponding to the other screw insertion hole 108b provided at the rear position, and the screw 107 is used to connect the lid member side plate 160b to the side plate. By fixing with respect to 141b, the closed state of the lid member 160 is maintained (see FIG. 12B). That is, the male screw portion of the screw 107 and the female screw hole 162 of the lid member side plate 160b constitute the fixing means in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 6, in a state where the lid member 160 of the receiving portion 140 is opened, a front opening 140 a that can receive the medal M is formed in a dish shape that opens upward, and the inside of the introduction path cover 141 Communication is made toward the introduction route K. The front opening 140a, which is the upper surface opening, is formed in a substantially square shape in plan view, and is formed to expand forward from the introduction path cover 141. That is, the front opening 140a is longer in the front-rear width dimension L12 including the lid member 160 and the receiving portion 140 than in the front-rear width dimension L10 of the introduction path cover 141 (see FIG. 6, L10 <L12). The frontage 140a is closer to the player side with respect to the upper surface opening of the introduction path cover 141, so that the medal M can be easily inserted. The vertical width L13 including the lid member 160 and the receiving portion 140 is shorter than the front-rear width L10 of the introduction path cover 141 (see FIG. 6, L10> L13).

  As shown in FIG. 14, when installing in a game arcade, the slot machine 1 and the medal lending machine 100 are alternately arranged in the left-right direction. As described above, the medal lending machine 100 is provided on the right side of the corresponding slot machine 1, and the medal lending machine 100 and the slot machine 1 disposed on the other right side are separated by a predetermined distance. A predetermined spacer member 10 is provided.

  Further, as described above, by closing the lid member 160, the lid member 160 does not protrude forward from the introduction path cover 141, so that the slot machine 1 disposed on the right side of the medal lending machine 100 When the front door 1b is opened to the left, the front door 1b comes into contact with the protruding end of the lid member 160, and the lid member 160 is prevented from being damaged or obstructing the opening of the front door 1b. The front door 1b of the slot machine 1 cannot be opened unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by an operator such as a game shop clerk is inserted into the front door key 1c (see FIG. 2). .

  In the medal lending machine 100 corresponding to the slot machine 1 with the front door 1b closed, the gap S between the left side plate 141b and the front door 1b in the receiving part 140 is narrow, and the above-described lid member An operator cannot access a tool such as the driver D with respect to the screw head (operation unit) of the screw 107 as a maintenance unit and a fixing unit that maintain the open or closed state of 160. Further, in the medal lending machine 100 corresponding to the slot machine 1 with the front door 1b opened, a tool such as the driver D can be accessed with respect to the screw head of the screw 107 of the left side plate 141b in the receiving part 140. .

  Thus, in the medal lending machine 100 corresponding to the slot machine 1 with the front door 1b closed, even if the player attempts to open and close the lid member 160 using a tool such as the driver D, the left side plate 141b Since the gap S with the front door 1b is narrow, unauthorized opening and closing operations are prevented. Also, an operator such as a game shop clerk who can open the front door 1b of the slot machine 1 opens a front door 1b to allow a tool such as a driver D to access the left side plate 141b. The screw 107 that fixes the lid member side plate 160b to the side plate 141b can be operated, and the lid member 160 can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the screw 107 as a maintaining means for maintaining the lid member 160 in an open state or a closed state is provided by a tool such as a driver D from the left side of the receiving portion 140, that is, the side where the slot machine 1 is disposed. It is possible to operate, and it is difficult to release the maintenance state of the lid member 160 by the screw 107 from the front side (player side) of the receiving unit 140. Therefore, it can be difficult for the player or the like to intentionally release the closed state of the lid member 160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 9A, there are other parts in the opening / closing plate 102 in the vicinity of the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 and the inner surface side (upper side in the open state) of the lid member 160. In the introduction path cover 141, which is a part of the receiving path 140, the outer peripheral surface (peripheral part) in the vicinity of the opening 140 ′ and the color of the opening / closing plate 102 in the vicinity of the receiving part 140 (peripheral part) are colored higher in color. Further, high brightness portions 109 and 109 'are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the outer peripheral surface (peripheral portion) near the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 in the introduction path cover 141 and the vicinity portion (peripheral portion) of the receiving portion 140 in the opening / closing plate 102 are colored in black. In addition, the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ are colored in a color with high brightness such as white or gray. By providing the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ in this way, even if the lighting in the game shop where the slot machine 1 is installed is dark, the player can receive the medal M by relying on the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′. Can be put in.

  In the present embodiment, the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ are colored white or gray. However, the color of the high brightness portions is not limited to white or gray, and the other in the introduction path cover 141 and the opening / closing plate 102. Other colors may be used as long as the brightness is higher than the color of the part, or a fluorescent color that is easy to visually recognize may be used even when the illumination is dark.

  A light emitting unit 165 that emits light when the counting device 190 counts the medal M is located at a position corresponding to the opening 140 a of the receiving unit 140 in the opening / closing plate 102, that is, the entrance side of the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140. Is provided. The light emitting unit 165 is exposed to the front side from a horizontally long rectangular opening provided in the opening / closing plate 102. As shown in FIG. 5, an LED unit 166 that emits light when the medal M is counted is provided at the front of the counting device 190, and the LED unit 166 of the counting device 190 is on the back side of the opening / closing plate 102. A light receiving unit 168 that receives light emission is provided. The light receiving unit 168 is connected to a decorative optical fiber 167 that guides the introduced light to the light emitting unit 165, and the optical fiber 167 extends upward along the back surface of the opening / closing plate 102 to emit the light emitting unit. 165.

  By providing the light emitting unit 165 in this manner, it is possible to notify the player that the medal M is counted by the counting device 190. In addition, it is possible to notify surrounding players by light emission that the medal M has been paid out in the corresponding slot machine 1, so that it is possible to enhance the production effect and collect the gaze of the surrounding players. Thus, it is possible to prevent an illegal medal (a rooster medal) or the like from being inserted into the receiving unit 140.

  Further, by providing the LED unit 166 in the counting device 190 and guiding the light emission of the LED unit 166 to the light emitting unit 165 by the optical fiber 167, wiring between the counting device 190 and the opening / closing plate 102 is unnecessary. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the attaching / detaching operation of the opening / closing plate 102 is facilitated as compared with the case where an LED lamp is directly provided in the light emitting portion 165.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the lid member 160 is in a closed state, the light emitting unit 165 is concealed by the lid member 160. The high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ described above are also hidden by the lid member 160. In this way, when the receiving unit 140 is not used, that is, when the counting device 190 is not used, the light emitting unit 165 and the high brightness units 109 and 109 ′ can be protected by the lid member 160, and the light emitting unit 165 and It is possible to prevent the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ from becoming dirty or attaching dust. Further, the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ are concealed so that the receiving portion 140 is not conspicuous. In addition, for example, when the lid member 160 is closed when the medal lending machine 100 is moved or installed, other members may hit the light emitting unit 165 during the work and be damaged or pinched. Further, it is possible to prevent the paint or the like constituting the high brightness portions 109 and 109 ′ from being wrinkled or soiled and deteriorating in appearance.

  As shown in FIG. 13, on the bottom portion of the introduction path cover 141, as described above, the lower inclined plate 141c (second bottom surface portion) and the upper portion that is overlapped with a predetermined dimension away from the inclined plate 141c. Side inclined plate 141c ′ (first bottom surface portion). As described above, a plurality of small-diameter punching holes 148 and 148 ′ (through holes) are formed in the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′, so that a liquid such as a beverage possessed by the player from the receiving unit 140, etc. Is introduced, the liquid that has reached the bottom of the introduction path cover 141 flows out of the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ to prevent the liquid from entering the counting device 190. it can.

  The upper inclined plate 141c 'is provided with a punching hole 148' in the front region, and the lower inclined plate 141c is provided with a punching hole 148 in the rear region. The regions where the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ are formed in these inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ do not overlap vertically so that the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ It is arranged so that it does not overlap vertically (vertical direction). By doing so, even if the player tries to insert a linear member such as a rod-shaped member or a wire from the punching hole 148 of the inclined plate 141c toward the counting device 190, the insertion of these members can be prevented. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the regions where the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ are formed are provided shifted in the front-rear direction, but the punching holes 148 of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ are provided. 148 'may be provided by being shifted in the left-right direction, or regions where punching holes 148, 148' of the inclined plates 141c, 141c 'are formed alternately in the front-rear or left-right direction. By doing so, the insertion of the rod-like member or the linear member may be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the punching holes 148 and 148 ′ of the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ are formed. However, the through holes in the first and second bottom surface portions in the present invention are punching holes 148 and 148 ′. It is not limited to this, and may be a slit-like through-hole, or as a substantially plate member in which each inclined plate 141c, 141c ′ is formed in a net-like or grid-like shape, these are through-holes formed in a net-like or grid-like shape. Also good.

  As described above, in the medal lending machine 100 (game device) as the embodiment of the present invention, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140 is closed by closing the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously inserting the medal M (game medium) or deliberately inserting trash. In addition, when changing from an operation mode using the counting device 190 to an operation mode not using the counting device 190 in the game store, the medal lending machine 100 is replaced only by closing the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140. It is possible to prevent the medal M from being inserted and to prevent the lid member 160 from being easily opened. In the present invention, it may not be possible to completely prevent the lid member 160 from being opened, and at least the lid member 160 is difficult to open, or it takes time to open the lid member 160. What should I do?

  Note that the case of changing from an operation mode using the counting device 190 to an operation mode not using the counting device 190 in a game store means, for example, a business using a medal storage box (so-called dollar box) after the medal lending machine 100 is installed. The case where it changes to a form, the case where a specific medal lending machine 100 breaks down, and use is temporarily stopped are considered.

  In the present embodiment, in the lid member 160 that closes the receiving portion 140, the lid plate 160a that closes the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 has a substantially plate shape, but the lid plate 160a of the lid member 160 is The present invention is not limited to a substantially plate shape, and any mode may be used as long as it makes the passage of the medal M impossible or difficult. For example, the lid plate 160a may be a member formed in a net shape or a lattice shape.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the lid member 160 is folded so as to be folded into the receiving portion 140, the lid member 160 does not protrude forward from the receiving portion 140 in the open state. In addition, the opening 140a having a substantially funnel shape in the open state can be eliminated in the closed state, and a player may inadvertently insert a medal M (game medium) into the opening 140a, Etc. can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, the receiving portion 140 is a medal slot opening upward formed by the front plate 141a and the side plate 141b provided so as to protrude to the front side of the opening / closing plate 102. The shape of the receiving portion 140 is not limited to this. For example, like the medal supply door 130 that can be opened and closed with the lower side as the center, the shape of the receiving portion 140 is a funnel shape that is flush with the opening and closing plate 102 in the closed state. The opening / closing lid member is provided so that it can be opened and closed in the front-rear direction with the lower piece of the opening / closing lid member as a center. Good. In this case, the opening formed in the opening / closing plate 102 forms the opening of the receiving portion in the present invention, and the medal passage formed from the opening of the opening / closing plate 102 to the inside of the medal lending machine 100 is in the present invention. Make an introduction route.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lid member 160 is attached to the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141 so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction around a rotation axis that faces the left-right direction. It may be attached so that it can turn in the left-right direction around a turning shaft that faces. Furthermore, the movement mode of the lid member 160 may be not only a rotation operation but also a sliding movement of the lid member 160.

  In the embodiment, the lid member 160 is attached to the left and right side plates 141b of the introduction path cover 141 so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction around the pivot 161, and the lid member 160 is pivoted forward. The opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 is opened and rotated rearward so that the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 is closed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pivot serving as a pivot center of the pivoting operation is provided on the upper side of the lid member 160, and this pivot is pivotally supported above the introduction path cover 141 in the opening / closing plate 102 so that the lid member 160 pivots backward. Thus, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140 may be opened, and the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140 may be closed by being rotated forward.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lid member 160 is pivotally supported by the introduction path cover 141. However, when the lid member 160 is attached to and detached from the introduction path cover 141, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 is opened and closed. It may be a configuration.

  In the embodiment, an operator such as a game shop clerk manually opens and closes the lid member 160. However, the lid member 160 is driven to open and close by a drive source. When a situation in which the medal M cannot be counted by the counting device 190 occurs, such as when the discharged medal M is clogged or the collecting device (not shown) provided in the gaming machine installation island becomes unable to collect due to a malfunction. The lid member 160 may be configured to be automatically closed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, when the lid member 160 is in a closed state, the receiving portion 140 is closed with the front surface side of the lid plate 160a of the lid member 160 being inclined. Even if an object such as dust is placed on the front surface side of the cover plate 160a of the member 160, the object 160 can be prevented from sliding on the cover plate 160a.

  In addition, the introduction path cover 141 extends upward from the introduction port 142, and the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b through which the nozzle 150 can be inserted in the front-rear direction intersecting with the introduction (movement) direction of the medal M. The receiving portion 140 is provided at a position above the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b. Therefore, while ensuring the storage space of the medal storage unit 183, the nozzle 150 as the guide member can be disposed at a position corresponding to the slot machine 1, and the counting device 190 is disposed at a position below the medal storage unit 183. However, since the receiving portion 140 can be disposed at a position above the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b, that is, the nozzle 150, the nozzle 150 becomes an obstacle when the medal M is inserted. There is no.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to arrange the counting device 190 above the medal storage unit 183, not only can the storage space of the medal storage unit 183 be sufficiently secured, but the medal M stored in the medal storage unit 183 can also be stored. Since there is no need to pump up to the nozzle 150, the apparatus does not become large.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the accepting unit 140 includes a medal insertion unit 4 as a game operation unit operated to advance the game of the slot machine 1 arranged adjacently, Since the switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged at almost the same height, not only does the player feel uncomfortable when the medal M is inserted, but also the game is operated. However, it becomes easier to insert the medal M.

  Further, since the receiving unit 140 is disposed at a position higher than the nozzle 150, the distance from the introduction port 142 to the counting device 190 becomes longer, so even if a hand or a foreign object is inserted from the introduction port 142, Since it becomes difficult to approach the counting device 190 from the introduction port 142, it is possible not only to suppress an illegal counting act and the like, but also to avoid the risk of injury by inserting a finger into the counting device 190 by mistake.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the receiving portion 140 is formed so as to expand at least toward the player side from the introduction path cover 141, so that the insertion slot approaches the player side, so that the medal M is inserted. It becomes easy to do.

  The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a and a front door 1b that can be opened and closed with the left side of the housing 1a as a center. The receiving unit 140 has a rotating shaft 147 that faces in the left-right direction. Since the receiving portion 140 can be rotated and retracted upward by being rotated, the interference can be prevented when the front door 1b is opened.

  In addition, at a predetermined position above the nozzle 150 inside the introduction path cover 141, the posture of the medal M received by the receiving unit 140 is indicated, and the front and back surfaces of the medal M are the introduction direction (vertical direction) of the medal M. Since the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c that are changed to the horizontal posture along the direction intersecting with respect to the front (front-rear direction) are provided, the posture of the medal M that is received and dropped by the receiving unit 140 is higher than the nozzle 150 Since the medal M easily passes through the narrow path K1, the medal M is in the same posture before reaching the introduction port 142, and is aligned with the counting device 190. Since it is introduced, the occurrence of clogging of medals in the counting device 190 can be suppressed.

  The rod-shaped members 146a to 146c are substantially parallel to the side plate 141b of the introduction path cover 141 with a predetermined gap (K1 left-right width> 2R), that is, intersecting the medal M introduction direction (vertical direction). By being provided along the direction (front-rear direction), the posture of the medal M can be changed with a simple configuration.

  The nozzle 150 is extended from the dispensing device 182 to the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b, and is connected to the base 151 and extends from the front insertion hole 143a toward the player. The base 151 is formed so as not to be deformable, and the protrusion 152 is formed so as to be deformable at least toward the slot machine 1 with respect to the base 151. Therefore, since the base 151 inserted through the introduction path cover 141 cannot be deformed, the drop of the medal M is not hindered, and the protrusion 152 can be deformed to the slot machine 1 side to be paid out. Since the medal M can be directly guided to the slot machine 1, the usability is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the opening 140 ′ of the receiving portion 140 of the introduction path cover 141 is opened and closed by the lid member 160, but a lid member for opening and closing the introduction port 142 of the counting device 190 is provided. It may be. In addition, the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ constituting the bottom surface portion of the introduction path cover 141 are configured as detachable lid members, and when the inclined plates 141c and 141c ′ are removed, the inlet 142 of the counting device 190 is provided. It may be configured such that the medal M cannot be introduced.

  15 to 16 show a medal lending machine 100 as a modification of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a front view of an essential part showing a medal lending machine as a modification of the present invention. FIG. 16 is a partial longitudinal sectional view of the medal lending machine of FIG.

  In the embodiment, the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b for inserting the nozzle 150 are formed on one end side (for example, the right side) in the left-right width direction in the introduction path K, and the other end (left end) of the nozzle 150 is formed. The narrow path K1 is formed only on the side, but as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b for inserting the nozzle 150 are provided on the left and right sides in the introduction path K. It may be formed at a substantially central position in the width direction, and narrow paths K2, K2 may be formed on both the left and right sides of the nozzle 150.

  A protective member 145A that guides the medal M falling from above to the left and right sides of the nozzle 150 and bypasses the nozzle 150 so as not to collide with the nozzle 150 is bridged in the front-rear direction above the front insertion hole 143a. It may be provided as follows. The protective member 145A is formed of a plate-like plate material having a substantially square shape when viewed from the front by guide inclined surfaces 145a and 145a that are inclined downward from the center in the left-right direction.

  In addition, since the posture of the medal M is changed to the horizontal posture also when the medal M is guided by the guide inclined surfaces 145a and 145a of the protective member 145A, the guide inclined surfaces 145a and 145a constitute posture changing means. Yes.

  Here, the lateral width L21 of the protection member 145A that protects the nozzle 150 occupies about half of the lateral width L20 of the introduction path K (L21≈2 / L20). Note that the front-rear width L10 (see FIG. 6) of the introduction path K is wider than the diameter 2R of the medal M (L10> 2R). The nozzle 150 and the protection member 145A are arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the introduction path K, so that the introduction path K is bifurcated, and a narrow path on the left and right sides of the nozzle 150 and the protection member 145A. K2 and K2 are formed. Since the left and right width L22 of the narrow path K2 is wider than the diameter 2R of the medal M (L22> 2R), the medal M is not clogged, but is positioned above the narrow paths K2 and K2. Since the posture has been changed by the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c, it passes smoothly.

  Therefore, the medal M dropped on the protection member 145A is guided to the left or right by the left and right guiding inclined surfaces 145a and passes through the narrow paths K2 and K2 between the nozzle 150 and the left and right side plates 141b. Since the medal M is not directly dropped onto the nozzle 150 by being protected by the protective member 145A as described above, it is possible to prevent the medal M from being adversely affected by the nozzle 150 being damaged.

  The medal M that has passed through the narrow paths K2 and K2 is guided to the rear side by the inclined plate 141c in the lower part and to the center in the left-right direction by the inclined plate 141d, and then passes through the introduction port 142 and passes through the opening / closing plate 102. Guided to the back side. Then, it slides down on the inclined plate 141 c and falls into the counting device 190 from the counting port 191.

  In addition, a protective member 145A that covers the top of the nozzle 150 is provided inside the introduction path cover 141, and the protective member 145A allows the medal M falling from the receiving portion 140 to pass through the left and right sides of the nozzle 150. By providing the guiding inclined surface 145a to be guided, not only is it prevented that the falling medal M collides with the nozzle 150 that is inserted through the introduction path cover 141, but the nozzles are prevented by the guiding inclined surface 145a. Since the medal M is guided in a direction to avoid 150, the fall of the medal M is not hindered.

  In the embodiment, the posture is changed by the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c. However, as described above, the inclination is inclined with respect to the moving direction of the medal M like the guide inclined surface 145a of the protective member 145A. It may be a plate-like member provided. Further, for example, various posture changing means such as a spiral linear member or a nozzle tapered toward the tip may be adopted.

  In the embodiment, the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b through which the screws 107 as the maintaining means are inserted are provided in the left side plate 141b in the receiving portion 140, and the screws 107 inserted through the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b are provided. A screw insertion hole through which a screw 107 ′ as a maintaining means is inserted is screwed into a female screw hole 162 provided in the side surface of the lid member side plate 160 b. 108c is provided through the open / close plate 102 on the back side of the receiving portion 140, and a female screw hole 162 'into which a screw 107' inserted through the screw insertion hole 108c is screwed is formed with a thick lid. You may make it provide in the front-end | tip of the member side board 160b. By doing so, it becomes possible for an operator other than an operator such as a game shop clerk who can remove the opening and closing plate 102 to operate the screw 107, and prevents the player from opening the lid member 160 illegally. be able to.

  In the embodiment, the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b through which the screws 107 as the maintaining means are inserted are provided in the left side plate 141b in the receiving portion 140, and the screws 107 inserted through the screw insertion holes 108a and 108b are provided. The screw member 162 is screwed into the female screw hole 162 provided on the side surface of the lid member side plate 160b. However, the maintaining means is not limited to the mode using the screw 107, and other means may be used. For example, as shown in the modified example of FIG. 18, a concave portion 170 is provided on the side surface of the lid member side plate 160b, and an engaging convex portion 172 that protrudes outward by an urging means such as a spring 171 is provided in the concave portion 170. Even if the engaging convex portion 172 is engaged with the engaging hole portion 173 formed in the side plate 141b of the receiving portion 140, a maintaining means for maintaining the open state or the closed state of the lid member 160 may be configured. Good. In this case, when the lid member 160 moves to a position where the engaging convex portion 172 corresponds to the engaging hole portion 173, the engaging convex portion 172 and the engaging hole portion 173 are automatically moved by the biasing force of the spring 171. Engaged. When releasing the engagement state, a tool such as a screwdriver D is inserted into the engagement hole 173 from the outside, and the engagement protrusion 172 is resisted against the urging force of the spring 171 to enter the recess 170. And the lid member 160 is moved.

  In the present embodiment, the engaging convex portion 172 biased by the screw 107, the spring 171 or the like is used as the maintaining means for maintaining the open or closed state of the lid member 160. The means is not limited to the mode using the screw 107, the spring 171 and the like, but may be other modes. For example, an adhesive member having an adhesive force is provided at a portion of the receiving portion 140 that contacts the tip of the lid member 160 when the lid member 160 is in a closed state, and the closed state of the lid member 160 is maintained by the adhesive member. Alternatively, when the lid member 160 is made of a magnetizable metal such as iron and is in a closed state, a magnet member is provided at a portion of the receiving portion 140 where the tip of the lid member 160 comes into contact. The closed state of the lid member 160 may be maintained. Further, the maintaining means may not be able to completely maintain the closed state of the lid member 160, as long as at least the lid member 160 is difficult to open or it takes time to open the lid member 160. The lid member 160 may not be easily opened even if it is moved slightly.

  In the above embodiment, the introduction path member constituting the introduction path K includes the introduction path cover 141 and the opening / closing plate 102. However, the introduction path K may be constituted by a single cylindrical member or the like. Good.

  FIG. 19 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The control unit 181 of the present embodiment includes a central processing circuit (CPU) 181a capable of executing a control program, a visitor card being received by the internal card reader / writer 187, a (member) card ID of a member card, a prepaid balance, A RAM 181b capable of storing various data such as the number of medals, the number of stored medals, the number of points visited, the data of the corresponding slot machine 1 and the game information of members in the game, and a central processing circuit (CPU) 181a EEPROM 181c which is a nonvolatile memory capable of rewriting and storing setting information including the control program to be executed and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100, and a real-time clock (RTC) 181d capable of outputting time information, calendar information, etc. RAM 181b is backed up by a battery (not shown). Are up, even when power supply is stopped, data stored in the predetermined period is maintained. Further, the control unit 181 can perform bidirectional data communication with various computers via the communication unit 184 and the HUB 70 described above.

  Further, the control unit 181 includes a display control board 129 for controlling the liquid crystal display 123 and the touch panel 124, a bill recognition unit 180, a state notification lamp 111, an internal card reader / writer 187, and a face image shooting. An audio control board (not shown) for controlling the camera 188, the payout device 182 and a speaker (not shown) is connected. In the speaker, notification from the medal lending machine 100 is performed by voice. The medal lending machine 100 itself may be configured to output a control signal for notification from the speaker of the calling lamp 200 without providing a means for outputting a voice. Further, the control unit 181 is connected to a reset switch 186 for resetting values of the total medal storage number, the own store medal storage number, and the fake medal storage number of medal information described later. The reset switch 186 is provided inside the casing 101 and can be operated when the opening / closing plate 102 (see FIG. 2) at the lower front of the casing 101 is opened.

  An opening / closing plate key 106 is provided at the upper end of the opening / closing plate 102 (see FIG. 2), and the opening / closing plate 102 is attached to the front side of the medal lending machine 100 by being locked by the opening / closing plate key 106. . The opening / closing plate 102 cannot be removed unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by a store clerk or the like of the game hall is inserted into the opening / closing plate key 106. The reset switch 186 is pressed when a store clerk empties a medal storage box 194 described later.

  Further, a lending operation board 189 is connected to the control unit 181, and this lending operation board 189 corresponds to the card balance display 115 ′ corresponding to the card balance display unit 115 and the medal lending button 116. A medal lending button switch 116 ′, a return button switch 114 ′ corresponding to the return button 114, a deposit enabling lamp 113, a medal lending lamp 117, and a medal expired lamp 118 are provided.

  Further, a replay operation board 185 is connected to the control unit 181, and the replay operation board 185 corresponds to the code number indicator 119 ′ corresponding to the above-described code number display unit 119 and the numeric keypad 120. And a replay button switch 121 ′ corresponding to the replay button 121 are provided.

  Further, the control unit 181 is connected to a counting device 190 provided at a lower position of the medal lending machine 100 so that each counting signal from the counting device 190 can be input. In response to the input of the counting signal from the counting device 190, various tables to be described later are updated. The counting device 190 is provided with the above-described medal photographing camera 190c and a flow path switching unit 190d, and an LED unit 166 corresponding to a light emitting unit 165 described later. Further, the counting device 190 is provided with a memory 190b for temporarily storing medal images taken by the medal shooting camera 190c, and a controller 190a for controlling these devices and determining the authenticity of the medal M.

  In the card table stored in the RAM 181b of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20A, the (member) card ID read from the visitor card or member card inserted into the card reader / writer 187, and the member ID (member card only), PIN (member card only), (member) card ID and prepaid balance based on prepaid balance data, number of medals specified from card ID, (member) card ID and member The number of saving medals specified from the ID (member only), the number of points visited from the member ID (member only), the deposit remaining amount corresponding flag indicating whether or not the card is a deposit remaining amount corresponding card, A card lock valid flag indicating whether the card lock function for the card is valid or invalid, and the card in the theft card restriction function Theft card flag indicating whether or not the card has been registered for theft, the number of today's jackpots counted by the history counting process of the game history counting function for the card, and a small-scale lending function for the card A small-lot lending valid flag indicating whether is valid or invalid is stored.

  The deposit remaining amount correspondence card is a membership card or a visitor card discharged in step Sh15 in FIG. 43 executed in step Sg11 in FIG. 42 when a “remaining amount withdrawal” button in FIG. 41 described later is operated. The remaining amount corresponding card is associated.

  The card lock function is a function that prevents the card from being returned or the card lock function from being switched from valid to invalid unless the password is entered. In the present embodiment, when the card lock function is enabled, the ball splitting function and the post-card insertion function, which will be described later, cannot be executed unless a password is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any function that is restricted from being executed when the card lock function is effective may be any function.

  The stolen card restriction function is a function that restricts a stolen card from being used by registering a stolen card. The registration of the theft card is performed as follows.

  For example, the card ID received in the unit management table of FIG. 25 of the medal management computer 550 by inputting the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 and the time during which the card has been used in the card management computer 500. And the theft card flag of the card ID is registered in the on state in the member card table or visitor card table of FIG.

  Alternatively, immediately after being stolen, the store clerk inputs to the medal lending machine 100 that the card has been stolen with the remote controller, so that the card of the card used immediately before the member card table or the visitor card table in FIG. The theft card flag corresponding to the ID is registered as an on state.

  The game history totaling function is a function of totaling game history (for example, the number of jackpots, the number of jackpot fluctuations, the number of reach, etc.) in association with the card ID of the card. The small amount lending function is a function that lends medals for an amount smaller than the normal lending unit amount. For example, normally, lend medal in units of 1000 yen, but the small amount lending function sets 1000 yen or less. It is possible to lend in the amount of money, for example, in units of 100 yen.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the game information stored in the RAM 181b includes game information from when the member card or visitor card is inserted into the card reader / writer 187, that is, the inserted game information. The game information relating to the game of the player who has the member card or visitor card that has been played is collected.

  Specifically, the start time (card acceptance time) when the player started the game, the end time (card return time) when the player finished the game, the player's game time, and the player's card The number of used medals indicating the number of medals used since receiving the player, the number of replay medals used for replay after receiving the player's card (member only), and the counting device after receiving the player's card When a medal inserted in 190 is determined as an illegal medal, the cumulative illegal medal number indicating the cumulative number determined as the illegal medal is stored, and a player playing a game in the corresponding slot machine 1 plays a game. The game information can be grasped since it started.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20C, the medal information stored in the RAM 181b (storage means) includes the total number of medals paid out as a total number of medals paid out today from the payout device 182 and the counting device. The total number of medals (the number of counting game media) that is the total number of medals inserted in 190 today, the total number of illegal medals that is the total number of medals determined to be illegal by the counting device 190, and the counting device The total number of medals stored in the medal storage box 194 is determined to be an illegal medal at 190, and among the total number of medals stored, the medals are used in other areas of the store. The stored number of own medals indicating the number of stored own medals, and the number of stored false medals indicating the number of stored false medals that are medals brought in from other stores or the like are stored.

  Further, in the RAM 181b, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), when it is determined that the medals inserted into the counting device 190 are continuously unauthorized medals, 1 is incremented and updated (incremented). A medal counter is set.

  Next, the card management computer 500 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 21, a card management computer 500 used in the present embodiment has a CPU 502 that performs various processes executed by the card management computer 500 on a data bus 501 that transmits and receives data inside the computer. RAM 503 used as a work memory, RTC 504 for outputting time information and calendar information, a storage device 505 including a hard disk, an input device 506 such as a keyboard and a mouse, a display device 507 for displaying and outputting various screens, and various information A printer 508 for print output, a communication unit 509 that performs data communication with each device such as a medal lending machine 100 (control unit 181) and a card issuing / payment machine connected to a local area network (LAN), and a card company. Data communication with the management server 82 Cormorant digital service unit (DSU) 510 is connected is a conventional computer.

  The storage device 505 has a membership card table (FIG. 22) for managing the prepaid balance remaining in the membership card, in addition to a processing program in which processing contents for performing various processing executed in the card management computer 500 are described. (See (a)) and a visitor card table (see FIG. 22B) for managing the prepaid balance remaining in the visitor card.

  In the member card table, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), each member card is associated with a member card ID that can be individually identified, and the member ID of the member player who has issued the member card and the prepaid Remaining amount, an unusable flag indicating whether the member card is unusable, a deposit remaining amount corresponding flag indicating whether the member card is a deposit remaining amount corresponding card, and a password used for a card lock function, etc. A card lock valid flag indicating whether the card lock function is valid or invalid, and a theft card flag indicating whether or not the card is registered in the theft card restriction function. Is stored. As a result, from the membership card ID or membership ID stored in the membership card, the prepaid balance, whether or not the membership card can be used, whether or not the membership card is a deposit-amount-compatible card, PIN, and card lock function are valid. It is possible to specify whether or not the card is invalid and whether or not the card is registered as a theft card. In the present embodiment, the membership card password is set in advance when the membership card is issued.

  In the visitor card table, as shown in FIG. 22B, each visitor card is associated with a card ID that can be individually identified, and the status of the visitor card (whether it is being used or stored). ), The latest issue date and time when the member card or visitor card was issued, the prepaid balance, the unusable flag indicating whether or not the card is unusable, and the remaining payment amount of the member card In the remaining deposit amount correspondence flag indicating whether or not the card is compatible, a card lock valid flag indicating whether the card lock function for the card is valid, a PIN number used for the card lock function, etc., and a theft card restriction function A theft card flag indicating whether or not the card has been registered that the card has been stolen is stored. As a result, based on the card ID stored in the visitor card, the prepaid balance, whether or not the visitor card can be used, whether or not the member card is a deposit balance compatible card, the latest issue date and time, whether the card lock function is valid or invalid The personal identification number and whether or not the card is registered as a theft card can be specified.

  The card management computer 500 (CPU 502) according to the present embodiment transmits the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 and the acceptance received from each medal lending machine 100 in response to acceptance of the member card or visitor card in the medal lending machine 100. A card that determines whether or not the member card or visitor card can be used and returns it to the medal lending machine 100 in response to reception of a card acceptance notification including the (member) card ID read from the member card or visitor card and the prepaid balance Execute the acceptance process.

  Further, the card management computer 500 (CPU 502) of the present embodiment is included in the received lending completion notification in response to the reception of the lending completion notification transmitted along with the lending processing in the medal lending machine 100 (membership). ) Subtraction update processing for subtracting and updating the tax-included usage amount included in the lending completion notice from the prepaid balance stored in the member card table or visitor card table corresponding to the card ID is performed.

  In addition, the card management computer 500 (CPU 502) of the present embodiment receives the card payment notice in response to the receipt of the card payment notice transmitted along with the execution of the issue / payment process in the medal lending machine 100 or the card issuance / payment machine. Corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the card payment notification, a payment update process is performed to add and update the payment amount included in the card payment notification to the prepaid balance stored in the member card table or visitor card table.

  Next, the medal management computer 550 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 23, the medal management computer 550 used in the present embodiment has a central operation for performing various processes executed by the medal management computer 550 on a data bus 551 that transmits and receives data inside the computer. A processing unit (CPU) 552, a RAM 553 used as a work memory, a real-time clock (RTC) 554 that outputs time information and calendar information, a storage device 555 including a hard disk, an input device 556 such as a keyboard and a mouse, various types It is a normal computer to which a display device 557 for displaying and outputting a screen, a printer 558 for printing various information, and a communication unit 559 for performing data communication with a medal lending machine 100 connected to a local area network (LAN). .

  The storage device 555 stores the member player on the business day owned by the member player who possesses the member card in addition to the processing program in which the processing contents for performing various processes executed by the medal management computer 550 are described. Recorded in the visitor card and the member saving management table (see FIG. 24A) for managing the number of medals acquired by the member and the number of saving medals acquired by the member player before the business day. A visitor saving management table (see FIG. 24 (b)) for managing the number of medals earned on the day of business by the player possessing the visitor card, and the total of the medals lending machine 100 in the game hall at that time. A unit management table for managing the number of illegal medals and the like and the cards accepted by each medal lending machine 100 ( 25), a member information table (see FIG. 26 (a)) in which member information relating to the member player who owns the member card is stored, and a member ID of the member player that can identify the member player. A member-specific game history table (see FIG. 26B) in which a game history including game information is stored is stored.

  In the member saving management table, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), a member ID which is member identification information which can be associated with each member card ID and which can individually identify the member player who has issued the member card. And the total number of medals earned by the member player on that business day, which is the number of medals that are not used for game or prize exchange, and the member player obtained before that business day. The number of saved medals, which is the total number of medals earned and not used for game or prize exchange, and the number of today's jackpots counted by the history counting process of the game history counting function for the card are stored. Yes. Thereby, from the card ID or member ID stored in the member card, the number of medals possessed by the member player, the number of stored medals, and the number of hits of the day can be specified.

  The number of medals managed in the member savings management table is managed as the number of medals only on the day of business, and the number of medals present in the member savings management table in the closing process after the closing of business is the savings medal All are reset after being added to the number. Further, the number of jackpots managed in the member saving management table is reset after being added to the cumulative number of jackpots in the member-specific game history table of FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the visitor saving management table associates each visitor card with an individually identifiable card ID, and possesses the latest issue date and time of the visitor card and the visitor card. The total number of medals earned by the player on that business day, which is the number of medals that have not been used for game or prize exchange, and is counted by the history counting process of the game history counting function for the card. The number of today's big hits is stored. Thereby, from the card ID memorize | stored in the visitor card | curd, the number of medals possessed by the said player and today's jackpot number can be specified now.

  Note that the number of medals managed in the visitor savings management table is valid only on the day of the business, and all medals existing in the visitor savings management table are reset in the closing process after the end of business. , Disabled. The number of jackpots managed in the visitor savings management table is valid only on the business day, and is reset after the business ends.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the unit management table stores the local IP address of the medal lending machine 100 in association with the device ID uniquely assigned to each medal lending machine 100 installed in the game hall. IP, an installed island that stores the island number of the game island where the medal lending machine 100 is installed, and a situation that stores whether the medal lending machine 100 is accepting a card or is waiting. The corresponding machine number in which the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 is stored, the reception ID in which the card ID of the member card or the visitor card being accepted is stored, and each medal lending machine at that time The total number of illegal medals counted at 100, the total number of medals stored in each medal lending machine 100, the number of own store medals, the number of false medals stored The medal-related information is stored, and the latest medal-related information is managed by being periodically transmitted from each medal lending machine 100 in a counting process described later executed by the medal management computer 550. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the member information table is associated with the member ID of the member player who owns the member card, and the personal identification number for identification and the day of receiving the member card. Membership consisting of store visit points where the predetermined store visit points are added and updated once, rank based on store visit status, member's name (last name and name), gender, age, birthday, occupation, address, e-mail address Attribute information (personal information) is registered.

  In the member-specific game history table, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), for each member ID, the game history of the member player, specifically, the date of visit to the store, the table of the slot machine 1 that played the game. Game consisting of number, model name, game start time (time), game end time (time), game time from game start to game end, number of replay medals, number of used medals, number of medals, total number of hits History is stored. The visit date of the member-specific game history table stores the date when the game history is stored based on the calendar information output from the RTC 554, and the game history of the game start time, game end time, and game time is This is stored based on member game history data transmitted from the medal lending machine 100 when the card is returned.

  Here, the illegal medal-related settings that can be executed by the medal management computer 550 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 27. In the medal management computer 550 of the present embodiment, the medal lending machine 100 in the game hall is explained. Various settings relating to notifications and operating conditions when detecting illegal medals executed in the above are made possible on the illegal medal related setting screen (threshold setting means) shown in FIG.

  In the illegal medal related setting screen of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, setting items of “unit setting” and “island unit setting” are provided at the upper part of the screen. The slot machine 1 to be set can be designated in units of units or in units of islands.

  For example, if “set by unit” is used, the slot machines 1 to be set can be designated one by one by using the unit number, and if “set by island” is used, a plurality of slot machines 1 to be set can be specified. You can specify each island by island number. If "island unit setting" is used, a game area where a game can be performed with a medal worth 5 yen per one, a game area where a game can be played with a medal worth 20 yen per piece, etc. Can be specified for each amusement island. In the “island unit setting”, the island unit is set so that a plurality of slot machines 1 installed on one side of one amusement island and a plurality of slot machines 1 installed on the other side can be individually set. It is divided.

  Further, the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen is notified when each medal lending machine 100 determines that a medal inserted into the counting device 190 is an illegal medal. A selection input unit is provided for setting “total number of illegal medals”, “cumulative number of illegal medals”, and “number of consecutive illegal medals detected” which are conditions to be performed.

  Further, in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition”, in the selection input section of “total illegal medal number”, the total number of medals determined as illegal medals by the counting device 190 from the time of starting the game hall, that is, the above-mentioned It can be set to notify when the total number of illegal medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) reaches a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment).

  In addition, in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition”, in the selection input section of “cumulative illegal medal number”, the counting device 190 illegally operates from the time when the player inserts the member card or the visitor card into the medal lending machine 100. Notification is made when the total number of medals determined as medals, that is, the cumulative number of illegal medals (see FIG. 20B) of the above-described card receiving game information reaches a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). Can be set to do.

  In addition, in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition”, in the selection input unit of “continuous illegal medal detection count”, the number of times that the counting device 190 continuously determines as illegal medal, that is, the above-described counter information consecutive fraud It can be set to notify when a medal counter (see FIG. 20D) reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, when an illegal medal is detected three times in succession).

  In this way, by setting “total number of illegal medals”, “cumulative illegal medals”, and “number of consecutive illegal medals detected”, several medals paid out from the payout device 182 of the medal lending machine 100 are set. When the player counts without noticing that these illegal medals are mixed in (unintentional case), it is not necessary to report them as illegal medals. It is also possible to make a setting so that notification is made when at least one illegal medal is detected.

  Also, in the item of “operation when detecting illegal medals” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen, when the condition set in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition” is met, an alarm notification (status notification lamp) is set. A check box is provided for selecting whether to turn on 111 and notify medal management computer 550 only) or to stop alarming and counting of counting device 190.

  In addition, in the item “handling of illegal medals” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen, when an illegal medal (own medal or fake medal) is detected in the counting device 190, the illegal medal is stored in the medal storage box 194 ( It can be set whether or not to store in the storage unit. In the “handling of illegal medals”, check boxes for “invalid storage unit”, “discharge illegal medals to the island when the storage unit is full” and “stop error when the storage unit is full” are provided.

  Here, when the check box of “invalid storage unit” is checked, when an illegal medal is detected by the counting device 190, it can be discharged from the discharge port 192 to the game island without being stored in the medal storage box 194. . This “reservoir invalid” setting is a setting used when there is a device for collecting illegal medals by providing a separate medal authenticity determination machine on the game island.

  If the check box “Discharge illegal medals into the island when the storage part is full” is checked, only when the medal storage box 194 (storage part) is full, the medal storage box 194 is not stored, but discharged. It can be discharged from the exit 192 to the game island.

  In addition, if the check box of “Stop error when storage part is full” is checked, when the medal storage box 194 (storage part) becomes full, the counting process of the counting device 190 is stopped and error notification is performed. Can be set.

  In addition, in the item of “reservoir state notification condition” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen, a selection input unit for setting the number of sheets to be “full tank notification condition” and the number of sheets to be “closed notification condition” And a selection input unit for setting.

  Here, in the “full tank notification condition”, it is possible to set a first threshold value (first storage amount) that is the number of medals serving as a reference for determining that the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) is full. . For example, in the present embodiment, the “full tank notification condition” is set to “100”, which is when 100 illegal medals are stored in the medal storage box 194, that is, the above-described medal information. When the total number of medals stored (see FIG. 20C) reaches 100, it is determined that the tank is full. In addition, the medal lending machine 100 notifies the medal management computer 550 while notifying by lighting the state notification lamp 111 as described later when the “full tank notification condition” is satisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of medals are stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) when the game hall is closed (when the business is closed), the medals are collected from the medal storage box 194. The medal lending machine 100 is informed by turning on the state informing lamp 111 and is notified to the medal management computer 550. In the “closing notification condition”, a second threshold value (second storage amount), which is the number of medals serving as a reference for determining whether or not the medal lending machine 100 is a target for collecting medals from the medal storage box 194. Settings can be made. For example, in the present embodiment, “50 notifications” (50% of when the store is full) is set as the “closing notification condition”, and this is set to 50 in the medal storage box 194 when the store is closed (when the store is closed). It is set to notify when the number of illegal medals is stored, that is, when the total number of medals stored in the aforementioned medal information (see FIG. 20C) is 50.

  In the present embodiment, medals of different sizes (for example, φ25 medal and φ30 medal) are set by appropriately setting the number of thresholds in the “full tank notification condition” and “closed shop notification condition”. It can be set according to the size of the medal storage box 194 (storage section). For example, even when the same number of medals are stored, the storage amount of the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) changes according to the size of the medals (for example, a φ25 medal becomes full with 100, but φ30 Therefore, it is possible to notify at an appropriate level by changing the threshold according to the size of the medal.

  Hereinafter, operation | movement of the medal lending machine 100 of this Embodiment is demonstrated using FIGS. 30-46.

  First, as shown in FIG. 30, the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 is activated by turning on the power to the medal lending machine 100, thereby executing the activation process of Sb1, initializing various tables, and each unit. The connection management request, transmission of a connection confirmation request to the card management computer 500, hall computer 540, and medal management computer 550, and the card management computer 500, hall computer 540, medal management computer in response to the transmission of the connection confirmation request. Settings such as initial values are executed for each setting data based on the setting information returned from 550.

  Then, after the activation process is completed, the process of Sb2 to Sb9 is cyclically executed, whereby the card acceptance (Sb2), which is the insertion of the membership card or the visitor card into the card insertion slot 112, by the player (member or visitor) Lending button operation (Sb3), cash acceptance by inserting a bill from the bill insertion slot 110 (Sb4), player return button operation (Sb5), replay button 121 operation (Sb6), medal for counting device 190 A standby state is detected in which detection of input (Sb7), detection of a predetermined error signal (Sb8), and operation of the touch panel 124 (Sb9) are detected.

  When the player inserts a visitor card or membership card into the card insertion slot 112 in the standby state of these Sb2 to Sb9, insertion detection information accompanying insertion of the visitor card or membership card is controlled from the card reader / writer 187. By outputting to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is card acceptance in Sb 2, proceeds to step Sb 20, and executes card acceptance processing.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the card acceptance processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 32, in the card accepting process of the present embodiment in Sb20, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 issues an instruction for taking in the member card or visitor card inserted into card insertion slot 112. The data is output to the card reader / writer 187, the inserted member card or visitor card is taken into the card reader / writer 187, and the stored data stored in the member card or visitor card, specifically, the member card or The (member) card ID, member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, medal count data (visitor card only), etc. of the visitor card are read (step Sn1).

  Then, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 transmits a theft card confirmation request including the (member) card ID read from the accepted member card or visitor card and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 to the card management computer 500 (step). Sn21).

  The CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 indicates that the theft card flag corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the theft card confirmation request is on based on the membership card table or the visitor card table described in FIG. Check whether it is “1”. Based on the confirmation result, information indicating whether the card is a theft card is transmitted to the medal lending machine 100 having the device ID included in the theft card confirmation request.

  The CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the received card is a theft card based on the received information indicating whether or not it is a theft card (step Sn22).

  If it is determined that the card is a theft card (YES in step Sn22), the CPU 181a transmits information indicating that the theft card has been received and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 to the hall computer 540 (step Sn23).

  The hall computer 540 controls the radio broadcast system 20 based on the reception of the information, and informs that the theft card has been received from the income 9 worn by the store clerk and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100. Is output, and the surveillance camera system 21 is controlled to photograph the player who has inserted the theft card into the medal lending machine 100. This makes it possible to identify a player who has attempted to use a card that is suspected of being stolen, and to leave evidence of the use of the stolen card.

  Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not a reset operation has been performed by determining whether or not a reset signal has been received from a remote control possessed by the store clerk (step Sn24). When determining that there is no reset operation (NO in step Sn24), the CPU 181a repeats this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the store clerk rushed to the medal lending machine 100 and performed a reset operation (YES in step Sn24), the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 to return the card (step Sn4), and the card Return the process to the caller of the acceptance process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card is not a theft card (NO in step Sn22), the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 includes an authentication request including the (member) card ID, prepaid balance data, and device ID read from the accepted member card or visitor card. Is transmitted to the card management computer 500 (step Sn2). Then, a card authentication process for receiving an authentication result from the card management computer 500 is executed, and it is determined whether or not the authentication is NG (step Sn3).

  When the authentication result returned from the card management computer 500 is “authentication NG” (in the case of YES in step Sn3), the medal lending machine 100 gives a card reader / writer 187 with an instruction to eject the accepted member card or visitor card. And the inserted member card or visitor card is returned to complete the card acceptance process (step Sn4). On the other hand, if the returned authentication result is “authentication OK” (NO in step Sn3), the (member) card ID read from the received card, the member ID (member only), and the prepaid balance are displayed. In addition to storing in the card table, the medal management computer 550 transmits a card acceptance notification including the received (member) card ID, device ID, and medal count (visitor card only) read from the visitor card. Then, a card acceptance notification including the (member) card ID read from the accepted membership card or visitor card and the device ID is transmitted to the card management computer 500 (step Sn5).

  Next, the medal management computer 550 displays the number of medals corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the received card acceptance notification, the number of saved medals (member only), and the number of today's jackpots as a member saving management table or visitor saving management. It is specified from each data stored corresponding to the (member) card ID in the table, and when the card ID is a member card ID, it is stored in the member information table corresponding to the member card ID. The identification number and the visiting points are further identified, and the number of medals held, the number of saved medals (members only), the visiting points (members only), the identification number (members only) and the (member) card ID are accepted. A processing completion notification is returned to the medal lending machine 100 that is the transmission source of the received card acceptance notification.

  In addition, the card management computer 500 displays the PIN code corresponding to the (member) card ID, the card lock valid flag, and the theft card flag included in the received card acceptance notification in the member card table or visitor card table. The medal lending machine 100 that is the sender of the received card acceptance notification is identified from each data stored corresponding to the ID, and the acceptance processing completion notice including the identified personal identification number, card lock valid flag, and theft card flag is received. Reply to

  The CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not a processing completion notification has been received from the medal management computer 550 and the card management computer 500 (step Sn6). In response to the reception of the acceptance processing completion notification (in response to YES in step Sn6), the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 (storage processing means) of the medal lending machine 100 is included in the received acceptance processing completion notification. The number of medals held, the number of saved medals (members only), points to visit (members only), PIN, number of today's jackpots, card lock valid flag, and theft card flag are stored in the card table and stored in the card table. The remaining prepaid balance is displayed on the balance display section 115, and the game information being received (see FIG. 20B) is reset and the time at that time is stored in the “start time” (step Sn7). For members, the same password is received from the medal management computer 550 and the card management computer 500.

  Then, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the accepted card is a deposit-amount-compatible card (step Sn11). In the case of a membership card, whether or not it is a deposit balance card is determined whether the deposit balance correspondence flag stored in the membership card table shown in FIG. 22 of the card management computer 500 is “1”, that is, in an on state. It is determined by inquiring the card management computer 500 whether or not. In the case of a visitor card, in addition to the same method, a deposit remaining amount correspondence flag is recorded on the card itself, so that it may be determined with reference to this.

  When it is determined that the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card (YES in step Sn11), the CPU 181a stores the card ID stored in step Sh14 when executing a later-described balance withdrawal process shown in FIG. This time, it is determined whether or not the card IDs of the accepted cards match (step Sn12). When it is determined that they match (YES in step Sn12), the CPU 181a turns off the deposit balance corresponding flag in the membership card table of the card management computer 500 when it is a membership card, and when it is a visitor card, In addition, the deposit balance corresponding flag recorded on the card itself is also turned off (step Sn13).

  The CPU 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag indicating that the deposit remaining amount corresponding card has been discharged is on (step Sn14). If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is in the on state (YES in step Sn14), the CPU 181a sets the remaining amount discharge flag in the off state, and deletes the card ID of the stored deposit amount correspondence card (step Sn15). Thereafter, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb9.

  Here, the card is received from the outside without storing the remaining amount of money and the number of medals in the medal lending machine 100, and the number of medals and the remaining amount of money to be added later are no longer added to the card corresponding to the remaining amount of deposit. Therefore, in step Sn13 and step Sn15, the deposit remaining amount correspondence flag and the remaining amount discharge flag are turned off.

  Further, when the player operates the lending button, a signal from the lending button switch 116 ′ for detecting the operation of the lending button 116 by the player is output to the control unit 181 so that the control is performed. The unit 181 determines that the lending button is operated in the step Sb3 in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb9, proceeds to the step Sb21, and executes the lending process for lending the medal M for 1000 yen as described above.

  Further, in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb9 described above, when the player inserts cash (banknote) from the banknote insertion slot 112, the currency identification information accompanying the insertion of the cash (banknote) is controlled from the banknote identification unit 180. By outputting to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is acceptance of cash in the step of Sb 4, proceeds to the step of Sb 22, and executes issue / payment processing.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the issue / payment process executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 33, in this issuance / payment process, first, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag indicating that the remaining amount corresponding card has been discharged is on. Is determined (step Sk1).

  If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is on (YES in step Sk1), the CPU 181a indicates that the deposit / remaining amount correspondence card associated with the deposit remaining amount has been discharged and whether or not to continue the deposit as it is. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 for notification. The notification may be notified by voice from a speaker or the like. The display on the liquid crystal display 123 displays a button for inputting that payment is to be continued and a button for inputting that payment is not to be continued.

  When it is determined which input indicating that the deposit is continued or not is performed on the touch panel 124 of the liquid crystal display 123, and when it is determined that the input is not performed (NO in Step Sk3), the CPU 181a The bill recognition unit 180 is controlled so as to be returned. Thereafter, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb9.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sk1), and if it is determined that payment is to be continued (YES in step Sk3), the CPU 181a issues the issuance / payment main. As processing, the following processing is executed (step Sk5).

  In the issuance / payment main processing, first, the amount of money inserted is specified from the input money identification information, and it is determined whether or not there is a member card or visitor card accepted by the card reader / writer 187. .

  When it is determined that there is no member card or visitor card being received, the control unit 181 places the visitor card stored in the card storage unit (not shown) at a predetermined reading position in the card insertion slot 112. The card ID of the visitor card is read out, and an issuance request including the read card ID, the inserted amount, and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 is transmitted to the card management computer 500.

  In response to the receipt of the issuance request, the card management computer 500 determines whether or not the card ID included in the received issuance request exists in the visitor card table, and if it exists, corresponds to the card ID. Update “Status” of the visitor card table to “In Use”, store the current date and time output from the RTC 181d as the latest issue date and time, and store the received input amount as “Prepaid balance” in “Remaining amount” , “Issue permission” is returned to the medal lending machine 100 of the transmission source of the issue request. If the received card ID does not exist in the visitor card table, “Issuance impossible” is returned.

  In addition, with the transmission of the “issue permission”, the card management computer 500 gives the medal management computer 550 an issuance notification including the latest issuance date and time stored, the card ID included in the received issuance request, and the device ID. By notifying the computer 550, the medal management computer 550 stores the latest issue date / time included in the received issue notification in the latest issue date / time of the visitor saving management table corresponding to the card ID included in the received issue notification. At the same time, the “status” of the unit management table corresponding to the device ID included in the received issue notification is updated to “accepting”, and the received card ID is stored in “reception ID” to update the unit management table. To do.

  In response to the reception of the “issue permission”, the control unit 181 (discharge / issue processing means) of the medal lending machine 100 writes and stores the prepaid balance corresponding to the inserted amount in the visitor card moved to the card insertion slot 112. At the same time, the card ID of the visitor card and the prepaid balance corresponding to the inserted amount are stored in the card table, and the prepaid balance is displayed on the balance indicator, and then the issuing / payment processing is terminated and Sb2 to Sb9 Return to the standby state.

  After the standby state of Sb2 to Sb9 described above has been completed, the control unit 181 executes the excess ball setting process (step Sb11). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the overrunning setting process executed in the medal lending machine.

  When the player inserts a medal M from the medal insertion unit 4, it is determined in step Sb7 of FIG. 30 that a medal insertion has been detected, and a counting process of FIG. 37 described later is executed. As a result, the counted medal number is added to the medal number. The possession excess setting process is a process for determining whether or not the number of medals has reached a predetermined specified number (here, 6000 medals).

  Referring to FIG. 31, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not a member card is being accepted by card reader / writer 187 (step Sb12).

  If it is determined that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sb12), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the membership card return division prohibition permission setting is set (step Sb13).

  The member card return split disabling permission setting means that if the number of medals (number of possessions) exceeds the specified number when the member card is accepted, the member card can be returned and This is a setting that permits disabling the process of dividing the number of medals.

  In the medal lending machine 100, the member card return split disapproval permission setting is collectively set for the medal lending machine 100 of the entire game hall, the grouped medal lending machine 100 for each group, or the medal lending machine 100. Each is configured so that it can be set in advance by a store clerk of the game hall.

  If the member card return divisional disapproval permission setting has not been made (if NO is determined in step Sb13), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this overrun setting process.

  When it is determined that the membership card return division prohibition permission setting has been made (YES in step Sb13) and when it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sb12), the CPU 181a determines the number of medals held It is determined whether or not (the number of holding balls) is equal to or greater than a predetermined specified number (here, 6000 medals) (step Sb14).

  When it is determined that the number of medals (the number of possessed balls) is not equal to or greater than the predetermined specified number (NO in step Sb14), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of the retained ball excess setting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of medals (the number of possessed balls) has become equal to or greater than the predetermined specified number (YES in step Sb14), the CPU 181a turns on the excess possession flag (step Sb15).

  The possessed ball excess flag is a flag indicating that the number of possessed medals (held balls) has reached a predetermined specified number, and is stored in the RAM 181b of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. The possessed ball excess flag is not turned off unless the accepted card is returned in step Sm34 of FIG. 34, which will be described later, and the number of possessed medals (the number of possessed balls) becomes a predetermined prescribed number by using the possessed medals for games. Even if it falls below, it is not turned off.

  Next, the CPU 181a transmits to the hall computer 540 that the number of possessed balls has exceeded the specified number (step Sb16). After step Sb16, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this overbearing setting process.

  When the hall computer 540 receives that the number of possessed balls has exceeded the prescribed number, the hall computer 540 generates an automatic voice message informing the fact together with the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 that has transmitted the information. An automatic voice message is transmitted in love with the income 9 worn by the store clerk via the wireless broadcasting system. Thereby, the store clerk who receives the notification through the income 9 can specify the slot machine 1 and the medal lending machine 100 in which the number of possessed balls (the number of medals) has reached the specified number.

  Further, in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb9 described above, when the player operates the return button 114, a signal from the return button switch 114 ′ for detecting the operation of the return button 114 by the player is controlled. As a result of the input to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is an operation of the return button in Sb5, proceeds to Sb23, and executes return processing.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the return processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 34, in this return process, first, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether there is a member card or a visitor card being received by the card reader / writer 187 ( Step Sm1). If it does not exist (NO in step Sm1), the operation is invalidated and the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb9 is restored.

  On the other hand, when it exists (in the case of YES at step Sm1), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the possession excess flag described in step Sb15 of FIG. 31 is in an on state (step Sm31). When determining that it is not in the on state (NO in step Sm31), the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sm21.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the excess ball excess flag is on (YES in step Sm31), the CPU 181a prompts the store clerk to return the card (for example, “the number of possessions has reached the specified number”). The liquid crystal display 123 is controlled to display a message such as “The card cannot be returned. Please call the store clerk” (step Sm32).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the store clerk has performed a confirmation operation with the remote controller (step Sm33). When determining that there is no confirmation operation (NO in step Sm33), the CPU 181a repeats the process of step Sm33.

  On the other hand, when determining that there is a confirmation operation (YES in step Sm33), the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sm21.

  Next, the CPU 181a executes a card lock collation process for collating whether the card lock function is valid or invalid (step Sm21).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the card lock verification processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 35, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 determines whether the card lock function is valid or invalid based on the card lock valid flag in the card table of FIG. 20 (step Ss1). If the CPU 181a determines that the card is invalid (NO in step Ss1), the CPU 181a ends the card lock collation process and returns the process to the caller.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is valid (YES in step Ss1), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 so as to notify the player that the portable terminal used for inputting or locking the code number is held up. . Then, the CPU 181a determines whether a personal identification number has been input or whether a portable terminal held up has been detected (step Ss3). If it is determined that there is none (NO in step Ss3), the CPU 181a repeats this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is any (YES in step Ss3), the CPU 181a determines whether the input personal identification number or the terminal ID of the portable terminal held up matches the personal identification number in the card table of FIG. These are collated (step Ss4). Thereafter, the card lock verification process is terminated, and the process is returned to the caller.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the card lock function is invalid as a result of the card lock collation process or the collation of the personal identification number. If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sm22), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sm23). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card lock function is invalid or matched by collation of the password (YES in step Sm22), the CPU 181a invalidates the operation of the return button 114 and A count prohibition instruction is output to prohibit a new count (step Sm2).

  Then, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 gives the medal management computer 550 the device ID of the medal lending machine 100, the card ID of the returned card, the number of medals stored in the card table, the number of saved medals (only members) ) And a return notification including the number of jackpots (step Sm3).

  In response to the reception of the return notification, the medal management computer 550 stores the number of medals held in the member saving management table or the visitor saving management table corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the received return notification, and the savings. The number of medals (member only) and the number of jackpots are updated to the number of medals held, the number of saved medals and the number of jackpots included in the received return notification, and the “status” corresponding to the device ID received in the unit management table is set to “standby” The card ID stored in the “accepting ID” is deleted, and an update completion notification is transmitted to the medal lending machine 100 that is the transmission source of the return notification.

  The CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not an update completion notification has been received from the medal management computer 550 (step Sm4). In response to receiving this update completion notification (in response to YES in step Sm4), the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the receiving card is a visitor card. (Step Sm11). If it is a visitor card (YES in step Sm11), the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information is recorded on the visitor card (step Sm12).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag is on (step Sm13). When it is determined that it is in the on state (YES in step Sm13), the liquid crystal display 123 notifies that the deposit remaining amount correspondence card associated with the deposit remaining amount has been discharged (step Sm14). The notification may be output by voice from a speaker.

  Then, the fact that the card corresponding to the deposit balance is discharged and recorded is recorded in the receiving visitor card (step Sm15). Next, the CPU 181a turns off the remaining amount discharge flag, and deletes the card ID of the stored deposit-amount-compatible card (step Sm16).

  If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sm13), and after step Sm16, the CPU 181a outputs a discharge instruction to the card reader / writer 187, and the received visitor card or membership card is carded. It is discharged from the insertion port 112 (step Sm17), and the possessed ball excess flag turned on in step Sb15 of FIG. 31 is turned off (step Sm34). Next, the CPU 181a resets the card table, cancels the invalidation of the operation of the return button 114, validates it, and cancels the count prohibition (step Sm18). Then, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb9.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp and manage how many illegal medals are counted by a predetermined player by recording the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information on the visitor card.

  In addition, when the player operates the replay button 121 in the above-described standby state of Sb2 to Sb9, the replay operation information is controlled from the replay operation board 185 that detects the operation of the replay button 121. As a result of the input to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is an operation of the replay button 121 in Sb6, proceeds to Sb24, and executes replay processing.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the replay processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 36, in this replay process, first, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 executes a replay main process (step Sp1).

  In the replay main process, the payout device 182 is controlled so that the number of medals or the number of saved medals managed by the medal management computer 550 is subtracted and the subtracted amount is paid out. When there are medals, the medals are paid out, and when there are no medals and there are saved medals, the medals are paid out. If there is none, nothing is paid out even if the replay button 121 is operated.

  After the replay main process, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the number of medals has become 0 (step Sp2). If it is determined that the number of medals has become 0 (YES in step Sp2), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 of the fact that the deposit remaining amount correspondence card associated with the deposit remaining amount has been discharged. (Step Sp4). The notification may be output by voice from a speaker.

  Next, the CPU 181a turns off the remaining amount discharge flag, and deletes the card ID of the stored deposit-amount-compatible card (step Sp5). When it is determined that the number of medals is not 0 (NO in step Sp2) and after step Sp5, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb9.

  Further, when a medal is inserted into the counting device 190 in the above-described standby state of Sb2 to Sb9, a detection signal is input to the control unit 181 from the counting device 190 that has detected the insertion of the medal. The unit 181 determines that the medal insertion has been detected in Sb7, proceeds to Sb25, and executes a counting process described later (see FIG. 37).

  Further, in a standby state of Sb2 to Sb9 described above, when a predetermined error signal is input from each device to the control unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that an error has been detected in Sb8, and proceeds to Sb26 to report an error. Execute the process.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the counting process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the counting process, the control unit 181 executes the processes Sc1 to Sc13 described below.

  First, in Sc1 of the counting process, the control unit 181 determines whether or not a member card or a visitor card is being received. If the member card or the visitor card is being accepted, the process proceeds to Sc2. If the member card or the visitor card is not being accepted, the process proceeds to Sc11. Note that in Sc11, the control unit 181 executes a notification that prompts the player to insert a member card or a visitor card by lighting the status notification lamp 111 or the like, and ends the process.

  In this embodiment, only when the member card or the visitor card is being accepted, the process proceeds to the steps after Sc2 and the medal counting process is executed. The counting process may be executed even when a medal is inserted when not being accepted. In this case, if a membership card or a visitor card is not received when an inserted medal is detected, a counting process is executed, and after the counting process is completed, a visitor card is issued, and a medal associated with the visitor card is held. What is necessary is just to memorize | store a number.

  In Sc2, the control unit 181 resets the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 20D) and proceeds to Sc3. In Sc3, the control unit 181 acquires medal determination information from the counting device 190, and proceeds to Sc4. The medal determination information acquired from the counting device 190 includes medal authenticity information (information on whether a medal is a regular medal or an illegal medal) determined based on a medal image photographed by the medal photographing camera 190c.

  In Sc4, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the counted total number of medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) and proceeds to Sc5. In Sc5, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the number of medals held in the card table (see FIG. 20A) and proceeds to Sc6.

  In Sc6, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the counted medal is an illegal medal based on the medal determination information acquired from the counting device 190. Here, the control unit 181 refers to the authenticity information of the medal included in the medal determination information, and proceeds to Sc12 if it is an illegal medal, and proceeds to Sc7 if it is a regular medal.

  In Sc12, the control unit 181 performs an illegal medal process described later, and proceeds to Sc13. In Sc13, the control unit 181 executes a medal storage process, which will be described later, and proceeds to Sc9.

  In Sc7, the control unit 181 resets the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 20D) and proceeds to Sc8. In Sc8, the control unit 181 discharges the medal determined to be a regular medal from the discharge port 192 to the game island, and proceeds to Sc9.

  In Sc9, the control unit 181 determines whether there are medals that have not yet been counted among the medals inserted into the counting device 190. If there are no uncounted medals, the process proceeds to Sc10. If there are uncounted medals, the process returns to Sc3 and repeats the processes Sc3 to Sc9, Sc12, and Sc13 until there are no uncounted medals.

  In Sc10, the control unit 181 transmits update information of each table, information of a full tank notification flag described later, a notification image described later, and the like to the medal management computer 550 and ends the process.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the illegal medal process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the illegal medal process, the control unit 181 executes the processes of Sd1 to Sd18 described below.

  First, in Sd1 of the illegal medal process, the control unit 181 uses the face image capturing camera 188 to capture the face image of the player who has inserted the illegal medal, and proceeds to Sd2. In Sd2, the control unit 181 obtains the medal image used for determining the authenticity of the medal from the counting device 190, and proceeds to Sd3.

  In Sd3, the control unit 181 generates a single notification image (see FIG. 29) by combining the player's face image and the medal image in parallel, and stores this notification image in the RAM 181b (imaging data storage means). Then, the process proceeds to Sd4. In Sd4, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the total number of illegal medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) and proceeds to Sd5.

  In Sd5, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 20D), and proceeds to Sd6. In Sd6, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 20B) and proceeds to Sd7.

  In Sd7, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 20B) is a set threshold value. In the present embodiment, “10 sheets” is set in the “cumulative illegal medal number” item of the “invalid medal detection notification condition” on the aforementioned illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). That is, when the cumulative value determined as an illegal medal after the player inserts a member card or a visitor card is 10, the value of the cumulative illegal medal number is set as a threshold. Here, if the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals is a set threshold value (if it is 10), the process proceeds to Sd8, and if the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals is not a set threshold value (if it is less than 10) ) Go to Sd15.

  In Sd8, the control unit 181 subtracts the value of the accumulated illegal medals from the number of medals held in the card table (see FIG. 20A), and proceeds to Sd9. In the present embodiment, if an illegal medal is included in the medals paid out and counted from the slot machine 1, the illegal medal is also counted if the illegal medal detection notification condition (inappropriate condition) is not satisfied. A player who uses an unauthorized medal unintentionally is prevented from being disadvantaged, and when the unauthorized medal detection notification condition is satisfied, the cumulative number of unauthorized medals counted up to that point becomes invalid. It is possible to prevent the number of held medals from being added due to illegal medals.

  In Sd9, the control unit 181 resets the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 20B) and proceeds to Sd10. In Sd10, the control unit 181 resets the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 20D), and proceeds to Sd11.

  In Sd15, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 20D) is a set threshold value. In the present embodiment, “3 times” is set in the “number of consecutive illegal medals detected” item of the “illegal medal detection notification condition” on the aforementioned illegal medal related setting screen (see FIG. 27). . That is, when an illegal medal is detected three times in succession, the value of the consecutive illegal medal counter becomes a set threshold value. Here, if the value of the consecutive illegal medal counter is the set threshold value (when it is three times), the process proceeds to Sd8, and if the value of the consecutive illegal medal counter is not the set threshold value (when it is less than three times). ) Go to Sd16.

  In Sd16, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the value of the total number of illegal medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is a set threshold value. In the present embodiment, “10” is set in the “total number of illegal medals” item of “illegal medal detection notification condition” on the aforementioned illegal medal related setting screen (see FIG. 27). That is, when the value of the total number of medals determined as illegal medals by the counting device 190 from the time of starting business in the game hall is 10, the total illegal medals count value is set. Here, if the value of the total number of illegal medals is a set threshold value (when it is 10), the process proceeds to Sd11, and if the value of the total number of illegal medals is not a set threshold value (when it is less than 10) ) Ends the process.

  In Sd11, the control unit 181 determines whether or not an unauthorized notification has already been sent to the medal management computer 550. If the notification of unauthorized notification has already been made, the process is terminated, and if the notification of unauthorized notification has not been notified yet, the process proceeds to Sd12.

  In Sd12, the control unit 181 sends a fraud notification notifying the medal management computer 550 that a fraudulent medal is being used, and proceeds to Sd13. In Sd13, the control unit 181 turns on the state notification lamp 111 and proceeds to Sd14. In addition, when the state notification lamp 111 is turned on, if it is turned on in a manner that clearly notifies the abnormal situation (for example, fast blinking or red display), an illegal player who uses an illegal medal is illegal. Since it is noticed that the notification notification is being performed and it may be escaped, it is difficult to notice that the unauthorized player is notified of the unauthorized notification when the state notification lamp 111 is turned on. It is made to light in a mode (for example, slow blinking or blue display).

  The medal management computer 550 that has received the fraud notification notification from the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 issues a notification request for requesting the hall computer 540 to notify the store clerk. And the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the machine 100.

  In addition, the hall computer 540 that has received the notification request from the medal management computer 550 generates an automatic voice message that notifies the fact along with the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 in which the illegal medal is used. Then, an automatic voice message is transmitted to the income 9 worn by the store clerk via the wireless broadcasting system. The store clerk who receives the notification through the income 9 can specify the player who uses the illegal medal. In addition, the hall computer 540 operates the monitoring camera system 21 to automatically shoot (or record) a zoom-in video of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 in which the illegal medal is used. Then, the store clerk can identify an unauthorized player and monitor (or record) the behavior through the monitoring camera system 21.

  In Sd14, the control unit 181 causes the alarm notification and counting stop of the counting device 190 (error stop) when an illegal medal is detected in the item of “Operation for detecting illegal medal” in the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). ) Is determined whether or not the selection is made. If the selection to stop the error has been made, the process proceeds to Sd17. If the selection to stop the error has not been made, the process ends.

  In Sd17, the control unit 181 transmits update information of each table, information on a full tank notification flag, which will be described later, a notification image, and the like to the medal management computer 550, and proceeds to Sd18. In Sd18, the control unit 181 performs a count stop process in which the counting device 190 stops counting medals. This counting stop process is maintained until the store clerk operates the reset switch 186 (see FIG. 19) of the medal lending machine 100.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a medal storage process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the medal storage process, the control unit 181 executes the processes of Se1 to Se14 described below.

  First, in Se1 of medal storage processing, the control unit 181 determines whether or not “reservation part invalid” is set in the item of “illegal medal handling” on the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). Determine. Here, if “reservoir invalid” is not set, the process proceeds to Se2. If “reservoir invalid” is set, the process proceeds to Se14.

  In Se2, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the full tank notification flag is set. If the full tank notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to Se3. If the full tank notification flag is set, the process proceeds to Se14.

  In Se14, the control unit 181 causes the medal determined to be an illegal medal to be discharged from the discharge port 192 to the game island, that is, ends the process without switching the flow path by the flow path switch 190d via the counting device 190. To do.

  In Se3, the control unit 181 switches the medal flow path via the counting device 190 by the flow path switch 190d described above, and the medal determined to be an illegal medal is stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage section). The process proceeds to Se4. In Se4, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the total medal storage number of the medal information (see FIG. 20C) (storage medium counting means), and proceeds to Se5.

  In Se5, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the medal determined to be an illegal medal is a medal brought from another area of the own store, that is, the own store medal. Here, if it is a local store medal, the process proceeds to Se6, 1 is added to the number of stored local medals in the medal information (see FIG. 20C), and the process proceeds to Se7. If it is not the own store medal, the process proceeds to Se11, 1 is added to the number of false medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C), and the process proceeds to Se7. In the present embodiment, the own store medals and the fake medals are counted, and the number of the own store medals out of the illegal medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit). By being easy to grasp, it is possible to return to the area that is collected early and determined as an appropriate medal.

  In Se7, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is the first threshold (full tank) (first determination means). In the present embodiment, “100 sheets” is set in the “full tank notification condition” item of the “reservoir state notification condition” in the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). . That is, when the total number of medals stored, which is the number of medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit), is 100, it is determined that the first threshold (full tank) is reached. Here, when the total medal storage number is the first threshold (full tank) (when it is 100), the process proceeds to Se8, and when the total medal storage number is not the first threshold (full tank) (less than 100 sheets). If there is, the process ends.

  In Se8, the control unit 181 sets a full tank notification flag and proceeds to Se9. In Se9, the control unit 181 turns on the state notification lamp 111 (first notification means) and proceeds to Se10.

  In Se10, the control unit 181 determines whether or not “error stop when the storage unit is full” is set in the “illegal medal handling” item of the aforementioned illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). To do. Here, if the error stop when the storage unit is full is set, the process proceeds to Se12. If the error stop is not set when the storage unit is full, the process is terminated.

  In Se12, the control unit 181 transmits update information of each table, information on the full tank notification flag, a notification image, and the like to the medal management computer 550, and proceeds to Se13. In Se13, the control unit 181 performs a count stop process in which the counting device 190 stops counting medals. This counting stop process is maintained until the store clerk operates the reset switch 186 (see FIG. 19) of the medal lending machine 100.

  Next, the unauthorized medal user face image screen displayed on the medal management computer 550 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A notification image in which the player's face image and medal image generated in the aforementioned illegal medal process are combined in parallel is transmitted from the medal lending machine 100, and the medal management computer 550 that receives this notification image uses the illegal medal The notification image can be displayed on the person face image screen.

  In the unauthorized medal user face image screen of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, together with the notification image, the date and time when the notification image was captured, and the apparatus of the medal lending machine 100 that captured the notification image An ID, a machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100, and a member ID when a game is played using a member card are displayed. By doing so, it is possible to identify which one of the medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) of the medal lending machine 100 has been used by a predetermined player, so that it is easy to specify an illegal act.

  In the present embodiment, a closing-related process request for making a request to execute a closing-related process (business closing process) from the medal management computer 550 to each medal lending machine 100 when the game hall is closed (when the business is closed). (Predetermined signal) is transmitted. The control unit 181 of each medal lending machine 100 that has received this tightening related process request executes a tightening related process (business closing process).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a tightening related process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the tightening related process, the control unit 181 executes processes Sf1 to Sf4 described below.

  First, in Sf1 of the tightening related process, the control unit 181 transmits various histories. For example, information such as a prepaid balance usage history is transmitted to the card management computer 500, and data such as forced cancellation history data in the absence of seat is transmitted to both the card management computer 500 and the medal management computer 550, and the process proceeds to Sf2. .

  In Sf2, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (second threshold) (second determination unit). In the present embodiment, “50 sheets” is set in the “Closed state notification condition” item of the “Storage section state notification condition” on the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 27). That is, when the total number of medals stored as the number of illegal medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) is 50 or more, it is determined to be the second threshold value. Here, if the total number of medals is greater than or equal to the second threshold (if it is greater than or equal to 50), the process proceeds to Sf3. If the total number of medals is not the second threshold (if less than 50), processing is performed. Exit.

  In Sf3, the control unit 181 turns on the state notification lamp 111 (second notification means) and proceeds to Sf4. In Sf4, the control unit 181 transmits to the medal management computer 550 a notification notifying that the number of illegal medals stored in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (second threshold). The process ends.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the medal management computer 550 that has received a notification from the medal lending machine 100 (control unit 181) notifying that the number of illegal medals stored is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (second threshold value) Display the processing (illegal medal) screen. On the business end processing (illegal medal) screen, the machine ID of the corresponding slot machine 1 is displayed together with the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 whose stored number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (second threshold). The store clerk can specify the medal lending machine 100 that collects illegal medals based on this business end processing (illegal medal) screen.

  FIG. 41 is a display screen diagram illustrating an example of a menu screen displayed on the display 123 of the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 41, the menu screen includes a “remaining amount withdrawal” button, an “insert after card” button, a “small amount lending” button, a “card lock” button, a “mob ball split” button, and an “information inquiry”. A button is displayed.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the processing content of the touch panel operation processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. This touch panel operation process is a process executed in step Sb27 of the process described with reference to FIG.

  42, first, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not an operation of the “remaining amount withdrawal” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 is detected on the touch panel 124 (step). Sg1). If it is determined that the “remaining amount withdrawal” button has been operated (YES in step Sg1), the CPU 181a executes remaining amount withdrawal processing (step Sg11).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the processing content of the remaining amount extraction processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 43, first, the CPU 181a invalidates the operation of the lending button 116 (step Sh1).

  As a result, it is necessary to operate the return button 114 after this, but the loan button 116 is erroneously operated, and medals are lent out using the deposit amount that is to be taken out now. Can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation caused by the close positions of the return button 114 and the lending button 116.

  Next, the CPU 181a refers to the card table of FIG. 20A to determine whether or not there is a prepaid balance (payment balance) (step Sh2). If it is determined that there is no payment (NO in step Sh2), the remaining payment cannot be taken out, so the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that there is no remaining payment and the withdrawal of the remaining payment is to be stopped (step). Sh3). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a deposit remaining amount (YES in step Sh2), the CPU 181a determines whether or not there is a medal (step Sh4). If it is determined that there is no (NO in step Sh4), there is no need to issue a card for possession medal even if the remaining deposit amount is taken out, so the CPU 181a has a liquid crystal display indicating that there is no possession medal and the withdrawal of the remaining deposit amount is cancelled. The information is displayed on the device 123 and notified (step Sh5). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  If it is determined that there are medals (YES in step Sh4), the CPU 181a executes the same processing as in steps Sm21 to Sm23 in FIG. 34 (steps Sh21 to Sh23). If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sh22), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sh23). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 181a determines that the card lock function is invalid or has been matched by collation of the personal identification number (YES in step Sh22), the CPU 181a controls to display on the liquid crystal display 123 that the return button 114 is operated. (Step Sh6).

  In the remaining amount withdrawal process, even if the card lock function is valid, the password is not verified. If the card lock function is valid, the process cannot proceed to step Sh6 and the card lock function is invalidated. Only in the case where it is determined that it is determined, the process may proceed to step Sh6 and subsequent steps. In other words, the remaining amount may not be taken out unless the card lock function is disabled in advance.

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the return button 114 has been operated (step Sh7). When determining that there is no operation (NO in step Sh7), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed (step Sh8). This predetermined time is set to be shorter than the time-out time of the input operation of the ball splitting process in step Sg15 of FIG. Thereby, the time when a game is not performed can be shortened as much as possible. If it has not elapsed (if NO is determined in step Sh8), the processes in steps Sh7 and Sh8 are repeated.

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed without the return button 114 being operated (YES in step Sh8), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that the withdrawal of the remaining amount of money is to be stopped due to the time being over. (Step Sh9). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  If it is determined that the return button 114 has been operated before the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step Sh7), the CPU 181a determines whether the member card is being received (step Sh11).

  If it is determined that the member card is being accepted (YES in step Sh11), the CPU 181a transmits to the card management computer 500 that the card is a deposit balance corresponding card and the deposit balance.

  In the card management computer 500, as shown in FIG. 22A, the prepaid balance corresponding to the card ID of the card in the member card table is updated to the received deposit balance, and the deposit balance correspondence flag is turned on. Change to (value "1").

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted, that is, the visitor card is being accepted (NO in step Sh11), the CPU 181a informs the card management computer 500 that the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card and the deposit balance. The information is transmitted for registration, and the information is recorded on the visitor card (step Sh13).

  In the card management computer 500, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the prepaid balance corresponding to the card ID of the card in the visitor card table is updated to the received deposit balance, and the deposit balance correspondence flag is turned on. Change to (value "1").

  After Step Sh12 and Step Sh13, the CPU 181a causes the RAM 181b to store the card ID of the deposit remaining amount correspondence card (Step Sh14). Next, the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 to discharge the member card or the visitor card that is being accepted as a deposit remaining amount correspondence card (step Sh15). Next, the CPU 181a turns on a remaining amount discharge flag indicating that the deposit remaining amount correspondence card has been discharged (step Sh16).

  Then, the CPU 181a deletes the deposit remaining amount stored in the RAM 181b (step Sh17). Next, since the CPU 181a has a medal number, the card ID is assigned to the medal management computer 550 in order to move the visitor card stored in the card reader / writer 187 to the read / write position and perform the issuing process. If it can be issued, the number of medals and the card ID are transmitted to the medal management computer 550 and the number of medals is recorded on the visitor card (step Sh18).

  In step Sh19, the CPU 181a validates the operation of the lending button 116. Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the caller of the remaining amount withdrawal process.

  In this way, the remaining amount of medals remains in the medal lending machine 100 only by the operation of the “remaining amount withdrawal” button in step Sg1 in FIG. 42 and the return button 114 in step Sh7 in FIG. Can be discharged. In the case of holding ball split or prepaid balance split, which will be described later, in addition to the operation for instructing the split, an operation for specifying the quantity to be split must be performed. As a result, when the remaining amount is discharged with the number of medals remaining, it is possible to perform a simple operation without requiring a complicated operation of specifying the quantity.

  Returning to FIG. 42, if it is determined that the “remaining amount withdrawal” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg 1), the CPU 181 a operates the “insert after card” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 on the touch panel 124. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step Sg2). When determining that the “insert after card” button has been operated (YES in step Sg2), the CPU 181a executes post-card insertion processing (step Sg12).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the post-card insertion processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 44, first, CPU 181a determines whether or not a member card is being accepted (step Sj1). If it is determined that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sj1), the CPU 181a displays on the liquid crystal display 123 that the acceptance of the operation of the post-card insertion button is stopped because the membership card is being accepted. Notification is made (step Sj2). Thereafter, the process to be executed is returned to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the caller of the post-card insertion process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sj1), the CPU 181a determines whether or not there are counted medals stored in the RAM 181b (step Sj3). If it is determined that there are no medals (NO in step Sj3), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that there is no medals and the acceptance of the post-card insertion button operation is stopped (step Sj4). ). Thereafter, the process to be executed is returned to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the caller of the post-card insertion process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a medal (YES in step Sj3), the same processing as in steps Sm21 to Sm23 in FIG. 34 is executed (step Sj21 to step Sj23). If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sj22), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sj23). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the calling source of the post-card insertion process.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 181a determines that the card lock function is invalid or has been matched by collation of the password (YES in step Sj22), the CPU 181a changes the visitor card at the reading position of the card reader / writer 187 to invalid, Return to the card storage unit (step Sj5). Then, the CPU 181a displays on the liquid crystal display 123 that a membership card or a visitor card is to be inserted (step Sj6).

  Next, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a card has been received (step Sj7). When determining that it has not been received (NO in step Sj7), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed (step Sj8). If it has not elapsed (if NO is determined in step Sj8), the processes in steps Sj7 and Sj8 are repeated.

  If the CPU 181a determines that the predetermined time has passed without accepting the card (YES in step Sj8), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that the insertion after the card is canceled due to the time being over (step). Sj9). Thereafter, the process to be executed is returned to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the caller of the post-card insertion process.

  If it is determined that the card has been received before the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step Sj7), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag stored in the RAM 181b is in an on state (step Sj11). .

  When it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is on (YES in step Sj11), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the accepted card is a deposit remaining amount correspondence card (step Sj12). Whether or not the card is a deposit remaining amount correspondence card is determined by inquiring the card management computer 500 and confirming whether or not the deposit amount correspondence flag of the member card table or the visitor card table described in FIG. 22 is on. Is done.

  If the CPU 181a determines that the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card (YES in step Sj12), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the card ID of the received card matches the card ID of the deposit-amount-compatible card stored in the RAM 181b. (Step Sj13).

  If it is determined that the card ID of the reception card matches that stored (YES in step Sj13), the CPU 181a stores the remaining balance corresponding flag stored in the card management computer 500 and the card in the case of a visitor card. The recorded deposit balance correspondence flag is turned off (step Sj14).

  It should be noted that even when the deposit remaining amount correspondence flag is turned off, the history that the deposit remaining amount correspondence flag is turned on or off may be stored. Thereby, it is possible to grasp how many times the “remaining amount withdrawal” operation is performed for the card during a predetermined period (a specific day or a certain period).

  Then, the CPU 181a turns off the remaining amount discharge flag stored in the RAM 181b, and deletes the card ID of the deposit remaining amount corresponding card (step Sj15).

  After step Sj15 and when it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sj11), the CPU 181a stores the number of medals held in the card table in FIG. 20A of the RAM 181b of the medal lending machine 100. Is registered in the member saving management table or visitor saving management table of FIG. 24 in association with the card ID of the received card, and information such as the card ID and the number of medals is sent to the medal management computer 550 and received. If the received card is a visitor card, the number of medals held is recorded in the visitor card (step Sj16).

  In addition, the setting and processing of the specific function of the previous card returned to the card storage unit are transferred to the received card (step Sj20).

  Specifically, if the specific function is a card lock function, the card lock valid flag of the previous card is transferred to the subsequent card, and if the received card is not a membership card, the password of the previous card is Let the number be transferred to a later card.

  When the specific function is the theft card restriction function, the theft card flag of the previous card is transferred to the subsequent card. If the specific function is a small-scale lending function, the small card lending valid flag of the previous card is transferred to the subsequent card.

  When the specific function is the game history totaling function, the history totaling process executed on the previous card is handed over to the subsequent card. That is, the number of big hits and the number of ARTs, which are the game histories accumulated in the history aggregation process, are taken over. In this takeover, for example, when a card is inserted later in the middle of the big hit gaming state and the ART state, the number of the gaming state in the middle is not double counted.

  This history tabulation process is managed by a management device such as the medal management computer 500. That is, the number of jackpots is stored in the member saving management table and the visitor saving management table of FIG. 24 of the medal management computer 500. Then, when a history totaling process executed for the previous card is taken over by the later card, the management device such as the medal management computer 500 stores the number of jackpots in association with the card ID of the later card. By doing so, it is managed that the process in which the function for the previous card is executed is taken over for the subsequent card.

  If the specific function is the possession ball payout function, the possession ball payout process executed on the previous card is taken over. For example, in accordance with the operation of the replay button 121, when the ball payout process for returning the possessed medals or the saving medals is executed, the number of possessed medals and the saving medals satisfies the number corresponding to the lending unit amount. If there is not enough possession medals and saving medals in the subsequent card, the post-card insertion process is executed if there is not, and if there is a shortage of medal and saving medals, the lending unit amount summed up with the previous card and the subsequent card Held medals and saving medals are paid out.

  After step Sj20, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 that is the caller of the post-card insertion process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card is not a deposit remaining amount corresponding card (NO in step Sj12) or does not match the stored card ID (NO in step Sj13), the received card corresponds to the correct deposit remaining amount. The fact that it is not a card is displayed and notified on the liquid crystal display 123 (step Sj17). Then, the fact that an error has occurred is notified by the liquid crystal display 123 and the speaker (step Sj18).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not an error reset operation has been performed by the store clerk (step Sj19). When determining that the reset operation has been performed (step Sj19), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. Thereby, the store clerk can cope with the situation where a player may illegally acquire a medal.

  In the post-card insertion process shown in FIG. 44, when there are medals, the process of associating the number of medals with the card inserted later is performed. On the other hand, when there are no medals, even if there is a prepaid balance, the process of associating the prepaid balance with a card inserted later is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when there are no medals, if there is a prepaid balance, a process for associating the prepaid balance with a card inserted later may be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 42, when determining that the “insert after card” button is not operated (NO in step Sg 2), the CPU 181 a operates the touch panel 124 to operate the “small amount lending” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step Sg3). If it is determined that the “small amount lending” button has been operated (YES in step Sg3), the CPU 181a executes a small amount lending process (step Sg13).

  In the small amount lending process, a medal of a smaller amount than the number of medals lent out by operating the normal lending button 116 is lent. For example, normally, medals M (for example, 50) corresponding to 1,000 yen are lent out, but in the small amount lent processing executed by operating the “small amount lending” button, medals M (for example, 200 yen) (for example, 10) are lent out. In this small amount lending process, the rented amount may be set in advance by the store clerk or may be set by the player.

  Further, in the small amount lending process, only the lending amount is set to be smaller than usual. After the small amount lending process is executed, the lending button 116 is operated so that a small amount of medals can be lent. Good. In this case, the loan amount may be returned to the normal amount by executing a small amount loan process next. This makes it possible to borrow a small amount while avoiding a wasteful amount such as borrowing up to a normal amount in the case where a small amount of medals is found due to the big hit.

  If it is determined that the “small amount lending” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg3), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the operation of the “card lock” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 has been detected on the touch panel 124. (Step Sg4). When determining that the “card lock” button has been operated (YES in step Sg4), the CPU 181a executes a card lock process (step Sg14).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the card lock processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 45, in the card lock process, the accepted card is locked so that it cannot be returned only by operating return button 114. Specifically, a password is set. Thus, when the return button 114 is operated, the password is requested to be input, and when the correct password is input, the accepted card is ejected. Further, in the card lock process, when the identification information of the portable terminal is received from the portable terminal incorporating the non-contact IC chip, the card is locked and the return button 114 is operated. If the identification information is accepted, the accepted card may be ejected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the accepted card from being stolen.

  First, the same processing as Step Sm21 to Step Sm23 of FIG. 34 is executed (Step Sq1 to Step Sq3). If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sq2), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sq3). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the calling source of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card lock function is invalid or matched by the collation of the personal identification number (YES in step Sq2), the CPU 181a determines whether the member card is being accepted (step Sq4).

  If it is determined that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sq4), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to display a message confirming whether the card can be locked (step Sq5). Then, it is determined whether or not the selection of whether or not to lock the card is “YES” (step Sq6). When determining that the selection is not “YES” (NO in step Sq6), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the caller of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the selection is “YES” (YES in step Sq6), the CPU 181a turns on the card lock valid flag of the card in the card table of FIG. 20A (step Sq7) and validates it. To the card management computer 500 (step Sq8). With this reception, the CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 turns on the card lock valid flag of the member card table or visitor card table of FIG. Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the calling source of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sq4), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the visitor card is being accepted (step Sq11). When determining that the visitor card is not being received (NO in step Sq11), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the caller of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the visitor card is being received (YES in step Sq11), the CPU 181a changes the lock method to a method using a personal identification number or a method using a portable terminal incorporating a non-contact IC chip. The liquid crystal display 123 is controlled so as to display that it is to be selected (step Sq12).

  First, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a method using a personal identification number has been selected (step Sq13). When determining that it is not selected (NO in step Sq13), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a portable terminal incorporating a non-contact IC chip is detected (step Sq14). When determining that it has not been detected (NO in step Sq14), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to step Sq13.

  When determining that the mobile terminal is detected (YES in step Sq14), the CPU 181a acquires the terminal ID of the mobile terminal from the contact IC chip of the mobile terminal (step Sq15). Then, the CPU 181a turns on the card lock validity flag of the card in the card table of FIG. 20 (a), stores the acquired terminal ID as a personal identification number (step Sq16), and indicates that it has been activated and the acquired terminal ID. The data is transmitted to the card management computer 500 (step Sq17). With this reception, the CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 turns on the card lock valid flag of the member card table or visitor card table of FIG. 22 and stores the terminal ID as a personal identification number. Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the calling source of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the method using the password is selected as the lock method (YES in step Sq13), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to display the password input screen (step Sq21). Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a personal identification number has been input (step Sq22). When determining that it has not been input (NO in step Sq22), CPU 181a repeats the process of step Sq22.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a password has been input (YES in step Sq22), the CPU 181a turns on the card lock valid flag of the card in the card table of FIG. 20A, and stores the input password. (Step Sq23), the fact that it has been validated and the input personal identification number are transmitted to the card management computer 500 (Step Sq24). With this reception, the CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 turns on the card lock valid flag of the member card table or visitor card table of FIG. 22 and stores the password. Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the calling source of the card lock process.

  When the card lock function is enabled, it is preferable to display a display (for example, a symbol) indicating that the card lock function is enabled on the display 123. Thereby, the player can recognize that the card lock function is effective.

  Returning to FIG. 42, if it is determined that the “card lock” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg 4), the CPU 181 a operates the “dividing ball” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 on the touch panel 124. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step Sg5). When determining that the “divide ball” button has been operated (YES in step Sg5), the CPU 181a executes a ball division process (step Sg15).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the coin splitting process executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 46, in the possession ball dividing process, the number of medals designated by the player in the current number of medals or the number of saved medals is divided by associating it with another visitor card. The number of medals to be divided may be designated as a numerical value or selectable from choices.

  First, the same processing as Step Sm21 to Step Sm23 of FIG. 34 is executed (Step Sr1 to Step Sr3). When it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sr2), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sr3). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the calling source of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card lock function is invalid or matched by the collation of the passwords (YES in step Sr2), the CPU 181a determines whether the number of medals is more than twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount. It is determined whether or not (step Sr11). When the number of medals is less than the number corresponding to the lending unit amount, usually the medals cannot be paid out. It is necessary to be at least twice the number corresponding to.

  If it is determined that the number of medals is not more than twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount (NO in step Sr11), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the number of medals is insufficient ( Step Sr12).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is twice or more (YES in step Sr11), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the over-bearing flag described in step Sb15 of FIG. 31 is on (step Sr41). When determining that it is not in the ON state (NO in step Sr41), the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sr13.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the excess ball excess flag is in the on state (YES in step Sr41), the CPU 181a prompts the store clerk to call for the division of the possession ball (for example, “the number of possession balls is a predetermined number”). The liquid crystal display 123 is controlled to display a message such as “Please call a clerk.” (Step Sr42).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a confirmation operation has been performed by the store clerk with the remote controller (step Sr43). When determining that there is no confirmation operation (NO in step Sr43), the CPU 181a repeats the process of step Sr43.

  On the other hand, when determining that there is a confirmation operation (YES in step Sr43), the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sr13.

  Next, the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to display a screen for inputting the number of medals to be divided (step Sr13). The number of divisions may be selectable from options, or may be input by increasing or decreasing the number of units corresponding to the lending unit amount by operating the increase or decrease button, or a numerical value can be directly input. You may do it. Then, it is determined whether or not the division number has been input (step Sr14). When determining that the division number has not been input (NO in step Sr14), the CPU 181a repeats the process of step Sr14.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of divisions has been input (YES in step Sr14), the CPU 181a determines whether the member card is being accepted (step Sr21). When determining that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sr21), the CPU 181a subtracts the number of divisions from the number of medals and transmits the number of medals after the subtraction to the medal management computer 550 (step Sr22). The medal management computer 550 updates the number of medals held in the member saving management table of FIG. Next, the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 to discharge the member card (step Sr23).

  Next, the CPU 181a takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer 187 to the reading position, and performs a process for issuing the taken-out visitor card (step Sr24). Specifically, the status of the visitor card table of the card management computer 500 is changed during use, the latest issue date is updated, the latest issue date of the visitor saving management table of the medal management computer 550 is updated, and both tables are updated. Reset other items in.

  Then, the CPU 181a associates the visitor card with the number of divisions as the number of medals (step Sr25). Specifically, the division number is stored as the number of medals held in the card table of the medal lending machine 100, and the division number is stored as the number of medals held in the visitor saving management table of the medal management computer 550. Next, the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 so as to eject the visitor card (step Sr26).

  Next, the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 so as to notify the user that the re-insertion of the previously ejected member card is urged (step Sr27). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the calling source of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sr21), the CPU 181a stores the card information stored in the card table in FIG. Retreat to the area (step Sr31).

  Then, the CPU 181a resets the card information of the visitor card at the reading / writing position being accepted, and performs the issuing process as described in step Sr24 (step Sr32). Next, as in step Sr25, the CPU 181a associates the number of medals with the visitor card as the number of medals (step Sr33), and controls the card reader / writer 187 to eject the visitor card (step Sr34).

  Next, as in step Sr24, the CPU 181a takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer 187 to the reading position, and performs the process of issuing the taken-out visitor card (step Sr35). Then, the CPU 181a associates the card information saved in step Sr31 with the visitor card (step Sr36). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 42 which is the calling source of this card lock process.

  If it is determined that the “divide ball” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg5), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the operation of the “information inquiry” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 has been detected on the touch panel 124. Judgment is made (step Sg6). When determining that the “information inquiry” button has been operated (YES in step Sg6), the CPU 181a executes an information inquiry process (step Sg16).

  In the information inquiry process, the prepaid balance (payment balance), the number of medals, the number of saved medals, and the medal management computer 550, hall computer 540, and card management computer 500 are managed according to the player's operation. Other information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 123.

  When it is determined that the “information inquiry” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg6), and after step Sg11 to step Sg16, CPU 181a changes the process to be executed to the process of FIG. return.

  When the member exchange card or the visitor card is received at the gift exchange POS 570, the medal management number and the saving medal number associated with the card are inquired to the medal management computer 550, and all or one of the medal number and the saving medal number are inquired. A process for exchanging the value of the department for a prize is performed. Specifically, the number of medals or the number of saved medals is subtracted according to the value of the prize to be exchanged. At this time, if the card lock function for the card is valid, the player is required to input a personal identification number.

  In this gift exchange POS 570, if a possessed medal compatible card is accepted, and if the retained medal compatible card is discharged, there should be a deposit remaining amount corresponding card, so the presence of a remaining deposit supported card is notified ( Here, display on the display unit of the gift exchange POS 570 to that effect and output of sound).

  There are many cases where time elapses after the deposit-corresponding card is discharged and before the possession medal-compatible card is discharged. For this reason, when exchanging medals or saving medals for prizes, it is possible to alert the player to the settlement of the remaining amount specified by the deposit remaining amount correspondence card. As a result, forgetting to settle the remaining amount can be prevented.

  When the member card or the visitor card is received in the checkout device 580, the prepaid balance associated with the card is inquired to the card management computer 500, and a process for paying the prepaid balance into money is performed. At this time, if the card lock function for the card is valid, the player is required to input a personal identification number.

  In this settlement apparatus 580, if a card with a deposit remaining amount is accepted, there may be a card with a corresponding medal corresponding to the card with a deposit remaining amount. Then, it is notified that there may be a card with medals (in this case, display on the display unit of the settlement apparatus 580 and output of sound).

  There are cases where two cards, that is, a card corresponding to the deposit remaining amount and a card corresponding to a medal are discharged. For this reason, when paying out the remaining amount specified by the deposit remaining amount correspondence card, it is possible to alert the player to exchange medals of the number of medals specified by the possession medal correspondence card for prizes. As a result, forgetting to exchange prizes can be prevented.

  As described above, in the medal lending machine 100 (game device) according to the embodiment of the present invention, when the illegal medal (unsuitable game medium) reaches the full tank (first storage amount). By notifying that effect, it is possible to collect illegal medals from the medal storage box 194 (storage unit), and at least when the predetermined number (second storage amount) has been reached at the end of the game hall business. By notifying that fact, it is possible not only to collect illegal medals before the tank is full, but also to eliminate the need to collect medals from the storage section that still has room for storage. Is improved. Therefore, since the amount of medals stored during business hours is prevented from reaching a full tank, it is possible to prevent illegal medals from being collected from the medal storage box 194 (storage section) that has reached the full tank and circulating. it can.

  Specifically, when a large number (for example, 1000) of medal lending machines 100 are installed in the amusement hall, all medal lending machines are periodically updated unless the medal storage amount in the medal storage box 194 is notified. Although it is necessary to check the 100 medal storage boxes 194 and turn around, for example, the medal lending machine 100 in which only about one or two medals are stored in the medal storage box 194 is also checked. Although it takes a lot of trouble, it is possible to efficiently collect illegal medals by notifying that effect when the predetermined number is reached.

  In addition, when an illegal medal reaches a full tank (first storage amount), even if it is in business, it can be promptly collected by notifying that fact, so that the medal is left as it is full. It is prevented from being discharged and circulated within the amusement island.

  In addition, when the predetermined number (second storage amount) has been reached at least at the end of the game hall business, the fact is notified so that illegal medals can be collected before the tank is full. Since it can be avoided as much as possible that a small amount of illegal medals is stored during business, it is possible to prevent annoying the player when collecting illegal medals during business.

  In addition, the controller 190a of the counting device 190 receives a plurality of types of illegal medals that are determined to be inappropriate and include a local medal that can be used in the game hall and a fake medal that cannot be used in the game hall. The self-stored medal is registered in the memory 190b by having about 100 self-stored medals inserted in the counting device 190 in advance. Then, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C) in Se4 of the medal storage process in FIG. 39, and in the medal storage process Se5 in FIG. If it is the own store medal, the process proceeds to Se6 to add 1 to the own store medal storage number of the medal information (see FIG. 20C), and if it is not the own store medal, Se11 And by adding 1 to the number of false medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 20C), how many of the illegal medals stored in the medal storage box 194 are own medals. It becomes possible to return to the area | region which collect | recovers at an early stage and is determined as an appropriate medal.

  Further, when the control unit 181 determines that the counted medals are not appropriate, in Sd3 of the illegal medal process of FIG. 38, the player's face image and the medal image are combined in parallel to form one notification image ( 29) and the notification image is stored in the RAM 181b, so that it is possible to identify which one of the medals stored in the medal storage box 194 is used by the predetermined player. It becomes easier to identify fraud.

  Note that in Sd3 of the illegal medal process in FIG. 38, the player's face image and medal image are combined in parallel to generate one notification image (see FIG. 29). It is not always necessary to generate a notification image. For example, an ID is assigned to each of the face image and the medal image, and the face image and the medal image are separately transmitted to the medal management computer 550, and the medal management computer 550 The IDs of the images may be stored in association with each other.

  Further, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the counted medal is an illegal medal based on the medal determination information acquired from the counting device 190 in Sc6 of the counting process in FIG. On the condition that the condition is satisfied, the number of illegal medals determined to be inappropriate among the number of medals counted until the inappropriate condition is satisfied is invalidated (for example, in Sd8 of the illegal medal process in FIG. 38). The control unit 181 subtracts the value of the cumulative illegal medal number from the medal number of the card table (see FIG. 20 (a)), so that the medal paid out from the slot machine 1 and counted is not appropriate. If the improper condition is not satisfied, the improper medals will be counted, so that a player who uses an illegal medal unintentionally suffers a disadvantage. It with be prevented, if the improper condition is satisfied, since the number of medals counted so far becomes invalid, it is possible to prevent unauthorized medal is acquired.

  Further, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 20B) in Sd6 of the illegal medal processing of FIG. 38, and also performs the card acceptance processing of Sb20 of FIG. , The number of medals held, the number of saved medals (member only), the point of visit (member only), and the personal identification number (member only) included in the received acceptance processing completion notification are stored in the card table. On the other hand, in the return process of Sb23 in FIG. 30, it is determined whether or not the card being received is a visitor card. If the card is a visitor card, accumulation of game information being received on the card table is stored in the visitor card. In addition to recording the number of illegal medals and recording the information on a card and ejecting it, information that can identify the number of medals stored in the medal storage box 194 is recorded. It is possible to grasp and manage how many medals were counted by a person.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the case where the invention is applied to the medal lending machine 100 provided corresponding to the slot machine 1 has been described. In the second embodiment, a case where the invention is applied to a card unit 750 provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 701 will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine 701 and a card unit 750 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750.

  The pachinko gaming machine 701 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 701 has a glass door frame 702 formed in a frame shape that can be opened and closed in the game frame. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 706).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 702 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 703, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 703, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 705 for firing the hitting ball, and the like. A game board 706 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 702. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 706 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 707 is formed on the front surface of the game board 706 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member forming the extra ball tray (lower tray) 704 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower tray) on the upper surface of the lower tray body, for example, A stick controller 7122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. Note that the stick controller 7122 has a predetermined controller finger, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 7122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 7125 (see FIG. 48) that can be instructed is provided. Further, the stick controller 7122 incorporates a vibrator motor 7126 (see FIG. 48) for vibrating the stick controller 7122.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 703 is operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by, for example, pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 7122). A possible push button 7120 is provided.

  On the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703, a ball lending button 751 that is operated when lending a ball, a return button 752 that is operated when a card is returned by specifying the remaining amount of the card, the number of balls acquired, etc., and a card A remaining frequency display portion 753 for displaying the remaining frequency is provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 707, there is provided an effect display device 709 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. On the right side of the effect display device 709 in the game area 707, a first special symbol display 708a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and a plurality of types that can identify each of them. And a second special symbol display 708b for variably displaying the second special symbol as the identification information.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 708a and the second special symbol display device 708b is configured by a simple and small display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 709 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and displays various images such as a change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the display screen. An area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (for presentation) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is formed.

  Each of the first special symbol display 708a and the second special symbol display 708b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 709 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 708a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 709 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 708b performs the first display. Since the effect display is executed by the effect display device 709 along with the change display when the change display of the 2 special symbols is being executed, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  When the jackpot display result (bonus symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 708b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 709 also derives and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 709, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) It is stopped, swinging, enlarged, reduced, or deformed in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols may fluctuate in synchronization with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol may be switched. An effect that is performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the change of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are synchronously changing while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 709 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  On the right side of the effect display device 709, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 708a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information that can identify each of them is provided. The first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numbers 0 to 9. In addition, on the right side of the effect display device 709 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 708a), a second special symbol display (second display) that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information that can identify each of them. Fluctuation display portion) 708b is provided. The second special symbol display 708b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numbers 0 to 9.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 708a and 708b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 713 or the second start winning opening) After passing 714 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) Is started and a big hit game is not executed), and when a variable display time (variable time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 713 is provided below the effect display device 709. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the first start opening switch 713a.

  A variable winning ball device 715 having a second starting winning port 714 through which a game ball can be won is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 713. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the second start opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 714 (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 714 than the first starting winning port 713. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 714. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 713 than the second starting winning port 714. Note that, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). Hereinafter, the first start winning port 713 and the second start winning port 714 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  Above the second special symbol display 708b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 718b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 714, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 718b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, further above the second special symbol hold memory display 718b, the number of valid winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 713, that is, the first reserved memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 718a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 718a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a hitting operation handle 705 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 707. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 707 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 713 and is detected by the first start port switch 713a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 708a starts the first special symbol variation display (variation), and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 713. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 714 and is detected by the second start port switch 714a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 708b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 714. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 708b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 708b, the effect display device 709 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 709, a first reserved memory display unit for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit for displaying the second reserved memory number are formed. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable winning ball apparatus 720 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 708b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 721 in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 723.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 709, there is provided a normal symbol display 710 that variably displays normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 710 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can display numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. That is, the normal symbol display 710 is configured to display the numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9 in a variable manner. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the display variation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is closed in a disadvantageous state for a player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol holding storage display 741 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 732 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 732, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold storage display 741 increments the LED to be lit by one. Then, each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  At the bottom of the game board 706, there is an out port 726 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. Also, four speakers 727 that emit sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper and lower left and outer sides outside the game area 707. A frame LED 728 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 707.

  In addition, a card unit 750 that enables lending of a ball by inserting a card (member card, visitor card) is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 701. The card unit 750 is a card that records the card remaining amount and the number of balls acquired from a card that records the remaining amount of the card as a value that can be used for the game by the player and the number of balls acquired as a value acquired by the player as a result of the game. Upon accepting the withdrawal, a control signal is output to the withdrawal control board 737 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 to instruct the ball dispensing device 797 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 to pay out a pachinko ball as a lending ball corresponding to the withdrawal amount. By using the pachinko ball, the player can play a game with the pachinko gaming machine 701. Thus, the control signal output from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701 is an example of a pachinko ball lending command based on the value recorded on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to signals exchanged between the card unit 750 and a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 701. When the card unit is built in the gaming machine, the lending command is exchanged inside the gaming machine. It may be a control signal.

  The card unit 750 includes, for example, a usable display lamp indicating whether or not the card unit 750 is in a usable state, a connecting table direction indicator indicating which side of the pachinko gaming machine 701 corresponds to the card unit, and a card unit. When checking the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card is inserted in the card, the card insertion slot into which the card as a recording medium is inserted, and the card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back of the card insertion slot A card unit lock for releasing the card unit is provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 701, when a player plays a game, a game card that can be used for the game is used. There are two types of cards: a membership card issued individually to a player registered as a member in a game hall, and a visitor card that can be used by all players.

  The membership card is a recording medium made up of an IC card. A card ID is recorded on the membership card. Various information (card information) such as a card remaining amount as a consideration for a player's input price, earned ball number information, accumulated ball number information, and member information for identifying a member individual is associated with the card ID and will be described later. Recorded on the management server. The acquired ball management server can determine various corresponding card information based on the membership card. Card information such as the remaining card amount, information on the number of stored balls, information on the number of points visited, and member information is managed by the acquired ball management server using the card ID.

  Here, the stored ball refers to an act of depositing an acquired value such as an acquired ball acquired by the player to the game hall side and the deposited value. The accumulated ball number information is information indicating the number of accumulated balls of the player who owns the member card. The earned ball refers to a value indicating the score or ball obtained by the player through the game. The acquired number-of-balls information is information indicating the number of acquired balls of the player who owns the member card. The replay means that a player plays a game by lending a ball using a stored ball or an acquired ball not deposited in a game hall.

  When a player plays a game, first, money (1000 yen) is inserted into the money insertion slot. Then, when the inserted money is discriminated and is a proper money, when the ball lending button 751 is operated, the game balls are lent out within the range of the amount of the inserted money, and a game becomes possible. Note that money other than 1000 yen bills can also be used. When the card is returned, the number of balls acquired by the player can be added to the number of balls specified by the card ID of the inserted member card. If no membership card is inserted, a visitor card is issued from the card unit 750. The number of balls acquired by the player is recorded on the visitor card and discharged to the player. In this way, the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount used for the game from the deposit amount is stored in the member card and the visitor card in an identifiable manner.

  When a player plays a game using a visitor card, the visitor card is inserted into a card slot provided in the card unit 750. Then, card information recorded on the inserted visitor card such as the remaining card amount and the number of balls acquired is read by a card reader / writer provided in the card unit 750. Then, based on the read card information, the remaining card amount is displayed on the remaining number display unit 753 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701, and the acquired number of balls is displayed on the count display unit 7555 provided in the card unit 750. Is displayed. The count display unit 7555 is configured to display the remaining card amount and the number of acquired balls with a predetermined number of digits. A game can be played using the displayed card remaining amount and the number of acquired balls.

  When a player plays a game using a membership card, the membership card is inserted into a card slot provided in the card unit 750. Then, the card ID recorded on the inserted member card is read by the card reader / writer. Then, the ball number data (acquired ball number data, accumulated ball number data) specified by the acquired ball management server based on the read card ID is displayed on the count display unit 7555. A game can be performed using the displayed card remaining amount, the number of acquired balls, and the number of stored balls.

  The card unit 750 is provided with a replay button 7554 that is operated when receiving a lend using a stored ball or an acquired ball, that is, when replaying.

  When the ball lending button 751 is operated, a predetermined lending unit amount is deducted from the remaining card amount displayed in the remaining frequency display portion 753 and reduced, and in exchange for that, a ball for the lending unit amount is deducted. Is paid out from the pachinko machine 701 as a ball. Further, the remaining card amount is displayed on the remaining frequency display portion 753. Such an operation is called a ball lending operation.

  If the replay button 7554 is operated in a state where a card is inserted in the card slot, the number of balls corresponding to the number of return units determined in advance from the number of acquired balls or the number of stored balls displayed on the counting display portion 7555. Are deducted and subtracted, and in exchange, balls for the number of return units are returned from the ball payout device 797 of the pachinko gaming machine 701. Such an operation is called a replay operation. The balls paid out in this way are called return balls.

  If the return button 752 is operated in a state where the membership card is inserted in the card slot, information such as the number of balls acquired at that time, the remaining card amount, and the number of stored balls is stored in the acquired ball number management server, The membership card in which the card ID specifying the stored information is recorded is ejected from the card slot and returned to the player.

  Balls paid out as balls for lending from the card unit 750 are paid out on a ball supply tray 703 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701 from a ball dispensing device 797 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  In the game, the player operates a hitting operation handle 705 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701 to eject and fire the balls stored in the hitting ball supply tray 703 and to hit the game area 707. Then, when the balls that are driven into the game area 707 win the various winning areas as described above, a predetermined number of premium balls for each winning area are paid out to the hitting ball supply tray 703. When the hitting ball supply tray 703 becomes full, balls are sent to an excess ball receiving tray 704 provided below and stored.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 701, pachinko ball counting devices called individual counters 705 are provided corresponding to the respective pachinko gaming machines 701. Each counter 705 includes a counting ball storage 794 provided below the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  The counting ball storage unit 794 is provided below the surplus ball receiving tray 704 and has a shape capable of receiving and storing the balls discharged from the surplus ball receiving tray 704. When the discharge lever provided in the surplus ball receiving tray 704 is operated due to the storage ball becoming full or the like, the ball stored in the surplus ball receiving tray 704 is opened at the bottom of the surplus ball receiving tray 704. Is discharged downward and received by the counting ball reservoir 794.

  The counting ball storage unit 794 is provided with a counting shutter 794a that can be operated by the player. The counting shutter 794a is a member for opening and closing an opening provided at the bottom of the counting ball storage portion 794, and is opened and closed according to an operation of the integrally formed lever portion 794b. The counting shutter 794a is closed in a normal state to make the counting ball storage portion 794 ready to store balls, and is opened when the lever portion 794b is operated by the player. When the counting shutter 794 a is opened, the balls stored in the counting ball storage unit 794 are discharged to the ball discharge passage 7520 connected to the bottom of the counting ball storage unit 794. On the entry side of the ball discharge passage 7520, there is an acquisition ball detection switch 7501 comprising a passage detection sensor that detects the ball discharged from the counting ball storage unit 794 (hereinafter referred to as “acquired ball”). Is provided.

  When a ball is detected and counted by the acquired ball detection switch 7501, the count value is displayed on the count display portion 7555 provided in the card unit 750. This count value (also referred to as “acquired ball count”) is recorded on the visitor card as acquired ball count information at the end of the game, and can be used for various purposes such as prize exchange. The member card is stored in the acquired ball management server in association with the card ID of the member card, and can be used for various purposes such as prize exchange. Further, the number of acquired balls indicated by the acquired number of balls information can be converted into the number of stored balls and recorded as the number of stored balls information.

  When returning, the return button 752 is operated by the player. When the return button 752 is operated, all the count values obtained by the above-described acquired ball detection switch 7501 are settled for the exchange of prizes, and information such as the settled count value (in other words, the number of obtained balls) is stored in the card. The data is written on the visitor card by the reader / writer, and the visitor card is ejected from the card slot and returned to the player. On the other hand, when a player inserts a member card into the card slot and returns, information such as a count value (in other words, the number of balls acquired) is stored in the acquired ball management server in association with the card ID of the member card. Is done.

  Of the “big hit”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state (low probability state) that is not a probable change state) as a special gaming state A type of jackpot (type) that shifts to a state of probability variation (an abbreviation of probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability variation jackpot”.

  As the big hit gaming states with different numbers of rounds, there are provided a plurality of types of big hit gaming states such as a normal big hit and a big hit gaming state of 15 rounds with a probable big hit, and a two round big hit gaming state with a sudden probable big hit. In addition, the big hit gaming state where the number of rounds is the same, but the opening times of each round are different, the big hit gaming state with a normal big hit and a probable big hit is 29 seconds and the open time due to a sudden probable big hit is 0.5 seconds A plurality of types of big hit game states are provided. In the small hit, the small hit game state of the number of times of opening (2 times) and the opening time (0.5 seconds) is the same as the sudden probability change big hit.

  Specifically, in the big hit game state of the normal big hit and the probable big hit, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is set in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) in the open state) is set. The closed state is established in accordance with the elapse of time or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a right to continue is generated, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Also, in the big hit gaming state with sudden probability change big hit, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened, a predetermined open condition end condition (predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses). In other words, the closed state is established when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls has been established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a right to continue is generated, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the big hit gaming state reaches two rounds (final round) at which a predetermined upper limit is reached.

  As described above, the sudden probability variation jackpot is allowed up to the number of times the opening of the big winning opening is less than 15 rounds (two in this embodiment), and the opening time of the big winning opening is short (for example, 0. 0. It is a big hit type (type) for 5 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the special game state based on the probability variation jackpot is accompanied by the probability variation state, and the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol and the production symbol is more than the non-short-time state (normal variation time state). When shortened, it is controlled to the short state. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot is controlled to be a short time state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise.

  Note that the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15-round jackpot gaming state among the “hits” is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  In addition, as a special game state based on the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable prize ball device 715 is increased by increasing the frequency at which the variable prize ball device 715 is opened. It is controlled to an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approach, higher frequency) to the device 715. On the other hand, the special gaming state based on the sudden probability change big hit is controlled to the probability change state, but is not controlled to the electric chew support control state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the game will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability control), control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 715 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 715 Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased. As a result, the game ball becomes easier to start and win (the execution conditions for the variable display in the special symbol displays 708a and 708b and the effect display device 709 are more easily established). In addition, by increasing the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 714 by such control, a gaming state is achieved in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased by such electric Chu support control is the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the ratio “base” is higher than when the control is not performed, it is called “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 715 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 715, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Furthermore, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to a state in which any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increase control state are combined, You may make it transfer to a high base state. In addition, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to any one of the normal symbol shortening control state, the normal symbol probability changing control state, the opening time extension control state, and the opening number increasing control state, You may make it transfer to a state. As described above, as the electric chew support control, any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increasing control state, any one of a plurality (all) Any control may be performed as long as the control is performed in a combined state or a combined state.

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot is controlled to the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state accompanying the control to the probability variation state. In addition, as a relationship between the short time state and the electric chew support control state in the special game state, the electric chew support control state may be controlled in association with the short time state. You may make it control to a control state.

  In the case of this embodiment, there is a case where the special game state is not controlled to the short-time state and the electric chew support control state as the special game state after the end of the big hit game state like the sudden change big hit. In addition, after the big hit gaming state, when it is in the normal state without being controlled to the probability change state, the period is not limited by the number of variable display times, and the short time state and electric support are available until the next big hit occurs. You may make it control to a control state.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the jackpot probability state. The “high base state (electric power support control state)” and the “low base state (non-electric power support control state)” are used.

  In this embodiment, terms indicating a combination of the state of the big hit probability and the base state are “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, “high accuracy low base state”, and Use “highly accurate base state”. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the time-short state, and the electric chew support control state (low-accuracy high-base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state. The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the short time state, and the electric chew support control state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state.

  Sudden probability change big hit is controlled to shift to the probability change state after the end of two rounds of big hit game state with very short opening time, and shifts to the short time state and electric chew support control state (high probability / high base state) This is a big hit that is controlled to the non-time-short state and the non-electricity Chu support control state (high probability / low base state) without performing control.

  In the probability variation big hit, the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the electric Chu support control state continue for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied. In the normal big hit, the period until the shorter condition is satisfied, which is the condition that the time reduction state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times of the variable display or the condition that the next big hit occurs. continue. The number of times of variable display in which the time reduction state continues is also referred to as the time reduction number.

  Also, in the case of a sudden probability change big hit, the special gaming state consisting of the probability change state continues for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

  When the small hit game state is reached, the big hit probability and the base state as the gaming state before the start of the small hit gaming state are maintained after the small hit gaming state ends. In this embodiment, the small hit is an example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened in the small hit gaming state with the same number of times and the same opening time as the sudden probability change big hit. However, as for the small hits, the opening mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is not completely the same as the opening mode at the time of sudden probability variation big hit, but it is difficult to distinguish from the opening mode at the time of sudden probability variation big hit. It may be visible. In other words, as a small hit, the opening mode of the special variable winning ball device 720 may be a hit in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened with substantially the same number of opening times and approximately the same opening time as the sudden probability variation big hit.

  Since the sudden probability variable big hit and the small hit are the same as the number of times and the release time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 720, whether the sudden odd-change big hit or the small hit is in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state? Is difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, when a common performance that does not notify that the probability change state is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the sudden probability change big hit and the end of the small hit gaming state, it is determined whether or not the probability changed state. It is difficult for players to recognize. In addition, suddenly probable big hits have a low base after the end of the big hit gaming state, so compared to the small hits where the base does not change after the end of the small hit gaming state, and after the end of the big hit gaming state of the sudden probable big hit, It is difficult for the player to distinguish the operation status after the gaming state is finished. Since such a control state is a state in which the probability variation state is latent, it is called a latent state, and the control for making such a latent state is called latent control. In the case of a sudden probability change big hit that occurs in the high probability low base state, after the big hit gaming state is ended, it may be controlled to a short time state and controlled to electric chew support control. In this way, when shifting to the high-accuracy and high-base state, it is desirable not to perform a latent effect described later.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 701 according to this embodiment, in the effect control CPU 7101, after the end of the big hit gaming state and after the end of the small hit gaming state, a latent effect that provides a common effect without notifying whether or not it is in a probable change state. Is done. For example, in the effect control CPU 7101, when a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command is received at the end of the big hit, the common background image after the big hit gaming state (the small hit gaming state in the case of the small hit) is ended. A common effect, such as displaying. By performing such a latent effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the player is in a probable state, and to improve the interest of the game. The latent effect may be transmitted by sending a command instructing execution of the latent effect from the game control microcomputer 7100 and the effect control CPU 7101 may execute the latent effect in response to the command.

  FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. FIG. 48 also shows a payout control board 737, an effect control board 780, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 7560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 701 according to a program is mounted on the main board 731. The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 755 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 757. The game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 754 and a RAM 755 are incorporated. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply substrate 7910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 755 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 754, so that the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. Random number circuit 7503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503.

  An input driver circuit 758 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, and the count switch 723 to the game control microcomputer 7560 is also mounted on the main board 731. Also, an output circuit 759 for driving a solenoid 716 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 715 and a solenoid 721 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 720 for forming a special winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 7560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 731.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 7560 includes a first special symbol display 708a, a second special symbol display 708b, which displays special symbols in a variable manner, a normal symbol display 710, which displays normal symbols in a variable manner, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 718a, the second special symbol storage memory display 718b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 741 is performed.

  The effect control board 780 includes an effect control microcomputer 7100, a ROM 7102, a RAM 7103, a VDP 7109, an I / O port unit 7105, and the like. The ROM 7102 stores a program and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 7103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 7102 and the RAM 7103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 7100. The VDP 7109 performs display control of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 7100.

  The effect control microcomputer 7100 provides an effect control command for instructing the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777 that allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main board 731 to the effect control board 780. And display control of the frame LED 728 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 735 and also from the speaker 727 via the audio output board 770. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 7101 receives an operation detection signal from the trigger sensor 7121 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 7125 of the stick controller 7122 has been detected. Further, the effect control CPU 7101 inputs an operation detection signal from the push sensor 7124 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 7120 has been detected. In addition, the effect control CPU 7101 inputs an operation detection signal from the tilt direction sensor unit 7123 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 7122 has been detected. The effect control CPU 7101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 7126 to vibrate the stick controller 7122.

  A card unit 750 is connected to the payout control board 737 via an interface board 766. The card unit 750 outputs a signal instructing the payout control board 737 to pay out game balls such as a lent ball, an acquired ball, and a stored ball. Each counter 705 is connected to the card unit 750. Each counter 705 outputs a signal that can specify the number of balls acquired by the acquired ball detection switch 7501 to the card unit 750.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 47, the present invention is provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 701) and can identify the amount of gaming value (card balance) that can be used for gaming (card ID). Accepts the insertion of a game recording medium (member card or visitor card) on which is recorded, and performs a process (ball lending process) for using the game value in the corresponding gaming machine. Based on accepting the operation of the use processing means (card reader / writer, the control unit of the card unit 750) and the return operation means (return button 752) for accepting an operation for returning the inserted game recording medium. A gaming device (card unit) comprising: return processing means (card reader / writer, control unit of card unit 750) for performing a return process for returning the game recording medium 50), in particular, a confirmation operation means (touch panel display 7123) for accepting a confirmation operation for confirming the return of the inserted game recording medium, and the return process on condition that the confirmation operation is accepted A return setting means (in the card management computer 500) for setting which one of the first return process for performing the return process or the second return process for performing the return process without the condition that the confirmation operation has been accepted. 52. The control unit of the card unit 750 that stores “whether or not a confirmation operation is necessary” is set, and the return processing unit has received an operation of the return operation unit (S202 in FIG. 52). The first return process or the second return set by the return setting means based on the reception of the return request signal. The process is executed (determining whether or not “confirmation operation is required” is set in S204. If there is no setting, the card is immediately returned in S209, and if there is a setting, it is determined in S208 that the confirmation button is operated in S209. A gaming device characterized in that the card is returned).

  In the following, an example will be described in which the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 701, the gaming medium is a pachinko ball, and the gaming medium is loaned. In the following description, the database may be abbreviated as “DB”, the reader / writer as “R / W”, and the step as “S”.

  The membership card or visitor card is an example of a game recording medium, and is recorded with information that can identify the remaining amount of the card that can be used for a game (pachinko ball lending). A card ID for individually identifying a card or a visitor card and the remaining card amount are recorded. This membership card or visitor card is formed by forming a recording area (not shown) in which a card ID, a card balance and the like are recorded at a predetermined portion of a rectangular plastic thin plate. This is an IC card equipped with a non-contact type integrated circuit (IC chip) having a nonvolatile EEPROM as a recording area.

  The payout control board 737 and the card unit 750 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 are connected via an interface board 766. A PSI signal line, a PRDY signal line, a BRDY signal line, a BRQ signal line, and an EXS signal line are provided between the card unit 750 and the payout control board 737.

  The PSI signal line is a signal line for confirming the connection between the card unit 750 and the pachinko gaming machine 701. By transmitting a connection confirmation signal via the PSI signal line, the launch handle can be operated in the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  The PRDY signal line provides a payable signal indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 701 is in a state (standby state) where communication between the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750 is possible with respect to the corresponding card unit 750. This is a signal line for transmission. Specifically, as shown in S1 of FIG. 49, when the voltage level applied to the PRDY signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, a payout enable signal is sent from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750. Sent.

  The BRDY signal line transmits a ball lending possible signal from the card unit 750 to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701 when there is a ball lending operation in the standby state in which the card unit 750 receives the payable signal. Signal line. Specifically, as shown in S2 of FIG. 49, the voltage level applied to the BRDY signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, so that a ball lending possible signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  In addition, the BRDY signal line terminates the ball lending from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701 when the ball lending processing for a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 minutes) associated with one ball lending operation is completed. A signal line for transmitting a signal. Specifically, as shown in S7 of FIG. 49, when the voltage level applied to the BRDY signal line is switched from LOW to HIGH, the ball lending end signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  The BRQ signal line is an example of a lending command signal line (= ball lending command signal line), and a lending request signal (= ball lending) requesting lending of game media from the card unit 750 to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701. Request signal). Specifically, as shown in S3 of FIG. 49, the voltage level applied to the BRQ signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, so that the ball lending request signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  The BRQ signal line is a signal line for transmitting a lending command signal (= ball lending command signal) that commands lending of a pachinko ball to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701 from the card unit 750. Specifically, as shown in S5 of FIG. 49, the voltage level applied to the BRQ signal line is switched from LOW to HIGH, so that the ball lending command signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  The EXS signal line is an example of a request acknowledge signal line, and a request acknowledge signal indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 701 has accepted the ball lending request to the card unit 750 (that is, the ball lending request signal has been received). Is a signal line for transmitting. Specifically, after the pachinko gaming machine 701 receives the ball lending request signal, it is confirmed that the pachinko gaming machine 701 is ready to lend a pachinko ball (ie, there is no ball out and no error). After that, as shown in S4 of FIG. 49, when the voltage level applied to the EXS signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, a request acknowledge signal is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750. The

  The EXS signal line is a signal line for transmitting a ball lending completion signal indicating that the ball lending processing is completed from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750 when the ball lending processing for several times is completed. It is. Specifically, when the ball lending process is completed, that is, when the pachinko ball payout is completed, the voltage level applied to the EXS signal line is switched from LOW to HIGH as shown in S6 of FIG. As a result, a ball lending completion signal is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750.

  That is, the card unit 750 gives a lending preparation signal (for example, a LOW level of the PRDY signal) indicating that a gaming medium (for example, a pachinko ball) can be lent by a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 701). A first receiving means for receiving from the machine, and a lending request signal (for example, a LOW level of the BRDY signal) indicating that a lending operation (for example, operation of the ball lending button 751 of the pachinko gaming machine 701) has been received to the gaming machine. A first transmission means for transmitting; a second transmission means for transmitting a lending command signal (for example, a LOW level of a BRQ signal) for instructing lending of a game medium to the gaming machine after transmission of the lending request signal; and the lending A loanable signal (for example, indicating that the game medium transmitted from the gaming machine can be loaned in response to the request signal and the loan command signal (for example, Second receiving means for receiving the LOW level of the EXS signal), third sending means for sending a loan confirmation signal (for example, HIGH level of the BRQ signal) indicating confirmation of reception of the loanable signal to the gaming machine, Lending of game media (for example, actual payout of pachinko balls, addition of the number of game balls) is executed in the gaming machine in response to the lending confirmation signal, and is sent when completed, indicating completion of lending of game media Third receiving means for receiving a signal (for example, HIGH level of the EXS signal), and fourth transmitting means for transmitting a loan request end signal (for example, HIGH level of the BRDY signal) indicating the end of the loan request to the gaming machine. Is provided.

  The touch panel display 7123 is for accepting operations from the player and displaying various information. Specifically, as shown in D0 of FIG. 51, it functions as a display means for displaying an alert regarding the return of the membership card or visitor card, and the return button 752 is operated as shown in D1 of FIG. 52 functions as a confirmation operation means for accepting a confirmation operation for confirming the return of the inserted member card or visitor card as shown in D2 of FIG. .

  When the setting mode is activated in the card management computer 500, a setting screen shown in FIG. In this setting screen, a radio button for setting whether or not the confirmation operation is necessary and a radio button for setting whether or not to display the alert display are displayed. Then, by operating the input device of the card management computer 500, selecting whether the confirmation operation is necessary or not and whether or not to display a warning, and operating the “Setting” button, the setting is performed. The contents are transmitted to each card unit 750 and stored in the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750.

  Here, the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 may perform the first return process for performing the return process on the condition that the confirmation operation has been accepted, or the return process without having the condition for accepting the confirmation operation. This function functions as a return setting means for setting which of the second return processing to be executed, and a confirmation operation is required according to the setting content received from the card management computer 500 (that is, the first return processing is performed). Or whether the confirmation operation is unnecessary (that is, the second return process is performed) is stored. The EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 functions as display setting means for setting whether or not to perform a warning display, and displays a warning display according to the setting content received from the card management computer 500. Alternatively, it memorizes whether or not to display an alert.

  Next, the operation of the card unit 750 (that is, processing performed by the control unit of the card unit 750) will be described.

  The ball lending process performed by the control unit of the card unit 750 will be described. When the card unit 750 accepts a ball lending operation with the card remaining amount recorded on the membership card or visitor card being several minutes or more once, the control unit of the card unit 750 first uses the BRQ signal line to make a pachinko game. The ball lending request signal (S3 in FIG. 49) is transmitted to the payout control board 737 of the machine 701, and the request acknowledge signal (S4) transmitted from the payout control board 737 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 via the EXS signal line is received. Wait. If it is determined that the request acknowledge signal has been received, the ball lending command signal (S5) is transmitted to the payout control board 737 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 via the BRQ signal line, and the pachinko machine via the EXS signal line. It waits for the reception of the ball lending completion signal (S6) transmitted from the payout control board 737 of the gaming machine 701. If it is determined that the ball lending completion signal has been received, the card reader / writer updates and subtracts the amount of money for one time from the remaining amount of card recorded on the member card or visitor card, and a remaining number display portion 753 The display of the remaining frequency at 1 is subtracted by 1 frequency, and the process ends. The control unit of the card unit 750 performs a process (ball lending process) for using the card remaining amount specified from the recorded information of the member card or the visitor card that has been inserted into the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701. It functions as a usage processing means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the alert display process which the control part of the card unit 750 performs is demonstrated. When the card unit 750 accepts a membership card or a visitor card (that is, is inserted), the control unit of the card unit 750 displays “a warning display” based on the stored contents of the EEPROM functioning as the display setting means. It is determined whether or not “Yes” is set (S101). If it is determined that “not display alert” is set (NO), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that “notice display” is set (YES), the display timing (for example, every 2 minutes) is waited (S102). An alerting display (for example, “Please be careful about forgetting to remove the card or theft” shown in D0) is displayed on the display 7123 (S103), and the process is terminated. That is, if “to display caution” is set, a caution display is displayed at each display timing. According to this, an alerting display can be performed regardless of whether the first return process or the second return process is performed. The display timing can be arbitrarily set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the return process which the control part of the card unit 750 performs is demonstrated. If there is a return operation (operation of the return button 752) in the pachinko gaming machine 701 in a state where the card unit 750 is accepting a member card or a visitor card (that is, inserted) (YES in S201), the pachinko gaming machine When the return request signal is transmitted from 701 to the card unit 750 (S202) and the card unit 750 receives the return request signal, a return process is started and a return operation notification (for example, “Return button shown in D1” Is operated ”) is displayed on the display 7123. Thus, by executing the return process based on the receipt of the return request, the pachinko gaming machine 701 only performs a normal process of transmitting a return request signal by operating the return button 752, so the pachinko machine There is no need to change the gaming machine 701. Further, since the fact that the return button 752 has been operated is notified, the player can discover that another person has operated the return button 752.

  Next, the control unit of the card unit 750 determines whether or not “confirmation operation is required” is set based on the stored contents of the EEPROM functioning as the return setting means (S204). Here, when it is determined that “confirmation operation is not required” is set (NO), that is, when it is set to execute the second return process in which the return process is performed without the condition that the confirmation operation is accepted. Returns the member card or visitor card that has been accepted (that is, inserted), displays a return indication (for example, “Please take the card” shown in D3) on the display 7123 (S209), and performs the processing. finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that “confirmation operation is required” is set (YES), that is, when it is set to execute the first return processing that performs the return processing on condition that the confirmation operation is accepted The time measurement is started (S205), a confirmation operation request display (for example, “please press the confirmation button” and confirmation button shown in D2) is displayed on the display 7123 (S207), and the time is up (for example, 10 seconds have elapsed). Until the operation of the confirmation button is waited until (S207, S208).

  If it is determined that the confirmation button has not been operated before the time is up (NO in S207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a confirmation button operation before the time is up (YES in S208), the process proceeds to S209 and the process is terminated. Here, the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S205 functions as a time measuring unit that starts timing based on the reception of the return request signal, and the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the processes of S207 to S209. If the return setting means is set to execute the first return process (YES in S204), the return process performs the return process on the condition that the time measured by the time measuring means is received within the predetermined time. It functions as a processing means. According to this, since the membership card or the visitor card is not returned unless the confirmation operation is performed within a predetermined time, it is possible to make it difficult for the other person to steal the membership card or the visitor card. The predetermined time can be set arbitrarily, but it is longer than the time required for the player to operate the return button 752 until the confirmation button is operated, and another person who aims to steal the membership card or visitor card returns the return button. It is preferably shorter than the time required for operating the confirmation button after operating 752.

  Moreover, it is preferable that the confirmation button is provided at a position away from the return button 752 by a predetermined interval. Here, the predetermined interval is, for example, within a range in which the player can see both the return button 752 and the confirmation button in view. According to this, since it is difficult for another person who operates the return button 752 to operate the confirmation button without noticing the player, the member card or the visitor card can be more effectively prevented from being stolen. Since the return button 752 is often provided on the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 701, the confirmation button is not only the card unit 750 arranged on the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 701, but also the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 701 itself. Alternatively, it may be provided on the calling lamp 200 installed on the upper side of the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  As described above, the confirmation operation means (confirmation button displayed on the touch panel display 7123) for accepting the confirmation operation for confirming the return of the inserted member card or visitor card and the confirmation operation are accepted. A return button 752 for setting which of the first return process for performing the return process or the second return process for performing the return process without the condition that the confirmation operation has been received is set. Since the first return process or the second return process is executed based on the receipt of the operation, in order to prevent the game recording medium from being stolen during the game, the store staff closely monitors the theft The amusement hall that operates to prevent the situation may be set to execute the second return process, reducing the monitoring burden on the store clerk, but making the player troublesome Game arcade wishing to operate to prevent theft since it is sufficient to set the execution of the first return processing by, it is possible to provide a card unit 750 capable of supporting both a game arcade.

  Note that the gaming device is provided with each unit counting device for counting the number of acquired game media (the number of possessed balls) acquired by the player, and the remaining card amount and the number of retained balls are stored and displayed on the gaming device. In this case, the storage and display of the remaining amount of the card is erased, the remaining amount card (corresponding to the membership card or the visitor card of the present invention) that can specify only the remaining amount of the card is discharged, and the storage and display of the number of balls is retained It is conceivable to configure a gaming device. According to this, when a big hit or the like occurs in the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701, the remaining card can be discharged for the time being, so that the card remaining can be prevented from being stolen. The number of balls you have may be stolen, but if you have two cards to return to the player, handling will be cumbersome. Later, it is possible to discharge a ball card that can specify the number of balls. However, with such a gaming device, it is possible to discharge the remaining card without erasing the memory and display of the number of balls, so even if the remaining card is stolen by another person, If it is set that the first return process is performed by applying the invention (confirmation operation is necessary), it is particularly effective because the remaining amount card is difficult to be stolen.

Next, a modification of the above embodiment will be described.
In the above embodiment, the card balance recorded on the member card or visitor card is compared with the card balance managed by the card management computer 500 in association with the card ID of the member card or visitor card. In the above description, an example in which ball lending using the remaining card amount recorded on the membership card or the visitor card is performed when the verification is OK has been described.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the card remaining amount is not recorded on the member card or visitor card, but the card remaining amount managed by the card management computer 500 is used in association with the card ID of the member card or visitor card. The ball management may be performed, and conversely, the card management computer 500 does not manage the remaining amount of the card, and the remaining amount of the card recorded on the membership card or the visitor card is used. good.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the return operation means (return button 752) and the return confirmation means (confirmation buttons displayed on the touch panel display 7123) are separate has been described. It may be a button.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the return confirmation unit is a confirmation button displayed on the touch panel display 7123 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return confirmation unit is provided at a predetermined location of the card unit 750. It may be an independent button.

  Also, the return confirmation means is a numeric keypad displayed on the touch panel display 7123 (or a numeric keypad provided separately on the card unit 750), and the password desired by the player is entered and stored using the numeric keypad. When an operation is requested, an input of a personal identification number may be accepted with a numeric keypad, and a confirmation operation may be accepted when it is determined that the inputted personal identification number matches the stored personal identification number. . According to this, although the time and effort of the player is increased, the confirmation operation is not accepted unless the password stored by the player is inputted, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the game recording medium from being stolen.

  The return confirmation means is an IC chip R / W provided in the card unit 750, and the IC chip identification information built in the portable terminal possessed by the player is read in advance by the IC chip R / W. When the confirmation operation is requested, the identification information is read from the IC chip of the portable terminal with the IC chip R / W, and it is determined that the read identification information matches the stored identification information. Accordingly, the confirmation operation may be accepted. According to this, since the confirmation operation cannot be accepted unless it is the portable terminal of the player, it is possible to reliably prevent the game recording medium from being stolen.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, whether or not a confirmation operation is necessary and whether or not to display a warning is set in the card management computer 500, and the setting contents are set for each. The example in which the data is transmitted to the card unit 750 and stored (set) in the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each card unit 750 may be set to determine whether or not a confirmation operation is necessary and whether or not to display a warning. For example, each card unit 750 may be set by providing a dip switch, or each card unit 750 may be set by a remote controller, or may be set by a touch panel display 7123. According to this, even if the card management computer 500 and each card unit 750 are offline, these settings can be performed. Note that the setting on the touch panel display 7123 may be set not only by the store clerk but also by the player.

  Further, the same setting may not be made for all card units 750 provided in the game hall, but different settings may be made for each card unit 750. For example, it is set that a confirmation operation is necessary for a card unit 750 on a certain amusement island (that is, the first return process is performed), and the monitoring operation is reduced, while a confirmation operation is performed on a card unit 750 on a certain amusement island. It can be set to be unnecessary (that is, the second return process is performed), so that the salesclerk can be closely monitored. In this case, as described above, the setting is not limited to each card unit 750, but can be set for each card unit 750 in the card management computer 500.

  In the above-described embodiment, a setting content screen indicating whether the first return process (confirmation operation is required) is set or the second return process (confirmation operation is not required) is set is displayed on the display 7123. Anyway. This setting content screen is displayed at a position close to the confirmation button, or is displayed together with a screen on which the remaining number (and the number of balls in the card unit 750 with each counter) is displayed. An unauthorized person who steals a game recording medium often decides whether or not to steal by looking at the screen, but it can be expected to abandon the theft by displaying this setting content screen.

  In the above embodiment, the display 7123 displays the remaining number and the number of balls, and a camera is provided in the card unit 750. When the camera senses a person approaching the card unit 750 other than the player playing the game, You may make it erase | eliminate the display of the number of remaining degrees or the number of balls. According to this, since an unauthorized person cannot immediately grasp the remaining number and the number of balls, it leads to theft prevention. Here, it is more preferable to display an alert instead of erasing the display of the remaining number and the number of balls.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in S208 of FIG. 52, the example in which the membership card or the visitor card is returned when the confirmation operation (operation of the confirmation button) is accepted once has been described. When the operation is received a plurality of times, the member card or the visitor card may be returned.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, an example in which a membership card or a visitor card is returned when a confirmation operation (operation of the confirmation button) is accepted after receiving a return operation (operation of the return button 752) will be described. However, not limited to this, the membership card or the visitor card may be returned when the confirmation operation is accepted and then the return operation is accepted. Even if the user wants to press the button 751 and presses the return button 752 by mistake, the membership card or the visitor card is not returned. That is, the order of the return operation and the confirmation operation is not particularly limited.

  In the above embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 701 is not operated for a predetermined time with the membership card or visitor card inserted in the card unit 750 (for example, the player enters a break without returning the membership card or the visitor card). When the user leaves the seat), the user may enter a safe mode in which the operation of the return button 752 or the ball lending button 751 is restricted in order to prevent the theft of the membership card or the visitor card and the use of the remaining card amount. Specifically, the safe mode is started after the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 701 is stopped, and the safe mode is entered when the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). This predetermined time can be arbitrarily set. If the return button 752 is operated during the safe mode timing, the timing is temporarily stopped. If the confirmation button is operated before the time is up in S207 of FIG. 52, the member card or the visitor card is returned. When the time is up without the confirmation button being operated, the temporarily stopped timing is resumed. In order to return from the safe mode, a remote control operation by a game clerk, an input of a personal identification number, or the like is accepted.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 57, the present invention is provided corresponding to a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 701) and accepts a value (banknote, membership card or visitor card) possessed by the player (in S101 and S102). YES) based on the received acceptance value (acceptance amount, remaining card amount), usable processing means for performing usable processing (remaining frequency storage processing) that can be used for gaming in the corresponding gaming machine (S117, The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S108), and the use process (ball lending process) that uses the usable value (number of remaining times) that can be used by the usable process for the game in the corresponding gaming machine. Use processing means (the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S135), and a post-use remaining after subtracting the use value provided for the use processing from the usable value And return processing means for returning process for returning an identifiable recording medium value (control unit of the card unit 750 performs the process of S126), a device for a game having a (card unit 750).

  Then, in the gaming device according to the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the usable processing means provides a condition that the accepted value is less than a predetermined value (NO in S116) as the usable processing. As a condition, all available processing (S117) is performed in which all of the received value is used as the available value, and the received value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (YES in S116). Based on the receipt of a return operation (YES in S125), the return processing unit performs the return process while performing a partly usable process (S118) with a part as the usable value. It is possible to specify the remaining value at the time of reception that was not regarded as the usable value of the received value without receiving a return operation based on the fact that the part usable process was performed Wherein by performing the value accepted at returning process for returning the recording medium (S119), characterized in that to prevent the overuse of the value of the game.

  In addition, in the gaming device according to the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, a cumulative value specifying process for performing a cumulative value specifying process for enabling each player to specify a cumulative value that is a cumulative value of the use value. Means (the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S136), and the return processing means performs the return process based on accepting a return operation (YES in S125), while the value is Based on the acceptance (YES in S101), a part or all of the acceptance value is accepted without accepting a return operation on condition that the cumulative value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (YES in S116 ′). It is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game by performing a return process at the time of receiving a value (S119) for returning the identifiable recording medium. To.

  The EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 stores a predetermined amount table shown in FIG. This predetermined amount table can be partially used in the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment for each player's age (in this example, 20's, 30's, 40's, 50's and 60 or more). Whether to perform return processing upon receipt of value in the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment and the first predetermined amount to be compared with the received amount in order to determine whether or not to perform processing and return processing upon receipt of value A second predetermined amount to be compared with the accumulated amount to determine the value and a specific amount to be compared with the accumulated amount to determine whether or not to perform value reception prohibition processing described later in both embodiments are set and stored. ing.

  Here, the first predetermined amount, the second predetermined amount, and the specific amount are set to different values for each player (in this example, for each player's age). A player who is easy to use too much (in this example, in his 20s and 60s or more) is set at a lower price than a player of other ages. According to this, for example, overuse of the value to the game can be prevented for a low-income person or a player who is easy to use too much.

  The predetermined value is an amount corresponding to a preset high denomination currency, specifically 5000 yen for players in their 20s and 60s, and for players of other ages. It is 10,000 yen. According to this, when the money of the high denomination is received, the partially usable process and the return process at the time of receiving the value are performed, so that it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game.

  Further, the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 also stores a display reference amount corresponding product table shown in FIG. In this display reference amount corresponding product table, for each display reference amount (10000 yen, 20000 yen, 30000 yen ... in this example) to be compared with the cumulative amount in order to determine whether or not to perform product notification processing described later, Genre products are set and stored.

  The card reader / writer is an example of a recording medium accepting unit, accepts a membership card or a visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 25a, and obtains a card ID and a card remaining amount recorded on the accepted membership card or visitor card. Read. The card reader / writer includes an IC chip R / W corresponding to an IC chip of a membership card or a visitor card that is the IC card. Then, as shown in FIG. 57, the card reader / writer adds and updates the received amount to the remaining card amount recorded on the accepted membership card or visitor card when deposit is made (S117). When this is done, the ball lending usage amount is subtracted and updated from the remaining card amount (S135). When the member card or visitor card is returned from the card reader / writer (S126), the stock card, which is a visitor card stored in the card storage unit, is transported to the card reader / writer and becomes a reserved card (S127).

  The face image photographing camera is for photographing a player who plays a game with the pachinko gaming machine 701 corresponding to the card unit 750. Face data is extracted from the face image of the player imaged by the face image photographing camera by the image recognition processing of the control unit of the card unit 750.

  Next, the card management computer 500 is a computer provided at a predetermined location (for example, a management office) in the game hall. The card management computer 500 stores a card DB shown in FIG. In this card DB, for each card ID of each member card or visitor card, a card remaining amount and a return flag upon deposit are stored. If the deposit return flag is “1”, it indicates that the card is a member card or a visitor card returned in the value reception return process. The remaining card amount is not cleared even after the business day ends, but the return flag at the time of deposit is cleared to “0” after the business day ends.

  Next, the hall computer 540 is also a computer provided at a predetermined location (for example, a management office) in the game hall. The hall computer 540 stores a player DB shown in FIG. In this player DB, for each face data extracted from the player's face image captured by the face image capturing camera (that is, for each player), the player's age determined based on the face data, The accumulated amount obtained by accumulating the amount used by the player for the game is stored. Note that the stored content of the player DB is cleared after the business day ends.

  Next, the settlement apparatus 580 is provided at a predetermined location in the amusement hall (for example, in the vicinity of the prize exchange counter). When the membership card or visitor card is received, the card ID of the membership card or visitor card is sent to the card management computer 500. And when the card balance stored in the card DB in association with the card ID is received from the card management computer 500, the received card balance and the card balance recorded on the member card or visitor card Are matched, an error process is performed if they do not match, and a settlement process for paying out the remaining money of the card is performed if they match.

  In the checkout process, the deposit return flag stored in the card DB in association with the card ID of the accepted member card or visitor card is also received from the card management computer 500, and the received return flag is received. Is “1”, that is, if the received member card or visitor card is the first card returned in the return process at the time of value reception, a notification prompting the reception of the second card returned in the normal return process May be performed. According to this, since the payment of the second card is not forgotten, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the operation of the card unit 750 which is the gaming apparatus according to the present invention (that is, the processing performed by the control unit of the card unit 750) will be described. Here, the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment will be described first, and then only the differences of the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment from the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment will be described. explain.

  First, the card unit 750 waits for reception of banknotes (S101) or reception of a membership card or visitor card (S102). If a banknote is accepted in S101 (YES), the accepted banknote is identified (S111). If the banknote is identified as NG, the banknote is returned. If the banknote is identified, player identification processing is performed (S112). In this player identification process, a player is imaged by a face image capturing camera, face data is extracted from the captured player's face image by image recognition processing, and the extracted face data is sent to the hall computer 540. Send.

  The hall computer 540 that has received the face data determines whether or not the face data is registered in the player DB. If registered, the age and the total amount corresponding to the face data are stored in the card unit 750. If not registered, the player's age is specified based on the face data, the specified age is stored in association with the face data, and the age corresponding to the face data is stored. The accumulated amount (here, zero) is returned to the card unit 750.

  Next, the card unit 750 specifies the predetermined amount (here, the first predetermined amount) and the specific amount stored in the predetermined amount table in association with the age received from the hall computer 540 in the player identification process of S112. Then, it is determined whether or not the accumulated amount received from the hall computer 540 is equal to or greater than the specified specific amount (S114). If it is determined in S114 that the accumulated amount is less than the specific amount (NO), the accepted banknote is returned (S115), and the process is terminated.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S115 performs a value reception prohibition process (in this case, a process of returning the banknote in S115) for prohibiting the reception of the value on the condition that the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the specific value. It functions as a value reception prohibition processing means for performing. According to this, if the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the specific value, the acceptance of the value is prohibited, so that overuse of the value for the game can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S114 that the accumulated amount is equal to or greater than the specified amount (YES), it is determined whether or not the received amount is equal to or greater than the specified predetermined amount (S116). If it is determined in S116 that the received amount is less than the predetermined amount (NO), the received amount is stored in the remaining number, and the received amount is recorded on the reservation card, and the process proceeds to S122. On the other hand, if it is determined in S116 that the accepted amount is equal to or larger than the predetermined amount (YES), the half of the accepted amount is stored in the remaining frequency (S118), and the half of the accepted amount is recorded on the reservation card and returned. (S119), the process proceeds to S120.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the processing of S117 and S118, based on the reception of the value (banknote) owned by the player, the received reception value (reception amount) at the corresponding gaming machine. It functions as a usable processing means for performing usable processing (remaining frequency storage processing) that can be used for a game, and as the usable processing, the acceptance value is provided on condition that the acceptance value is less than a predetermined value. All usable processes (S117) to make all of the received values usable, and on the condition that the received value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a part (half price here) of the received value is used as the usable value. The partially usable process (S118) is performed.

  Further, the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S119 does not accept the return operation based on the fact that the partially usable process has been performed, and does not regard the usable value of the received value. It functions as a return processing means for performing return processing at the time of value reception (S119) for returning a recording medium that can specify the remaining value at the time of reception (here, half of the received amount).

  According to this, if the reception value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a part of the reception value is subjected to a partially usable process and the usable value is not included in the reception value. Since the return processing at the time of receiving a value for returning a recording medium that can specify the remaining value at the time of reception is performed, it is necessary to receive the recording medium in order to use the remaining value at the time of reception for a game (that is, one-hour work) Therefore, overuse of value for games can be prevented. Further, since there is an opportunity to settle the value of the returned recording medium with the settlement apparatus 580, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  Next, the card unit 750 performs card management of a return notification at the time of deposit including the card ID of the member card or visitor card returned in S119 and the card remaining amount recorded in the member card or visitor card (here, half of the accepted amount). It is transmitted to the computer 500 (S120), one of the membership card or visitor card stored in the card storage unit is transported to the card reader / writer and reserved, and the usable value (here, the received amount) for the reserved card (Half price) is recorded (S121), and the process proceeds to S122.

  Here, the card management computer 500 that has received the deposit return notification in S120 associates the remaining amount of the card included in the received deposit return notification with the card ID included in the received deposit return notification in the card DB. And a deposit return flag “1”. The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S120 functions as a return processing unit that performs a value reception return specifying process that can specify that the recording medium is returned in the value reception return process (S119). is there.

  If the member card or visitor card is received in S102 (YES), the member card or visitor card (retained card) reserved by the card reader / writer is stored in the card storage unit (S103), and the received member is received. The card ID and card remaining amount of the card or visitor card are read (S104), and collation processing is performed (S105).

  In this verification process, the read card ID is transmitted to the card management computer 500, and the remaining card amount and the deposit return flag stored in the card DB in association with the card ID are received from the card management computer 500. Then, it is determined whether or not the received card remaining amount matches the read card remaining amount. If they do not match, error processing is performed, and if they match, the process proceeds to S105.

  Next, the card unit 750 determines whether or not the deposit return flag received in the verification process of S105 is “1”, that is, the received membership card or visitor card is returned in the value reception return process. It is determined whether or not there is (S106). If it is determined in S106 that the return flag at the time of deposit is “0” (NO), that is, the received member card or visitor card is not returned by the return process at the time of value reception, the card remaining amount read Is stored in the remaining frequency (S108), and the process proceeds to S122.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S108 receives the received value (card balance) based on the received value (member card or visitor card) owned by the player, and the corresponding gaming machine. It functions as usable processing means for performing usable processing (remaining frequency storage processing) that can be used for games in the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S106 that the return flag at the time of deposit is 1 (YES), that is, the received member card or visitor card has been returned in the return process at the time of value reception, an alert notification (for example, "Do you use too much?" Shown in D0 is displayed on the display 7123 (S107), and the process proceeds to S108.

  The control unit and display 7123 of the card unit 750 that performs the processing of S107 are based on receiving the recording medium that has been returned in the value reception return processing (S119) and that has undergone the value reception return specification processing (S120). Thus, it functions as a caution alerting means for performing alerting. According to this, when receiving the recording medium returned by the return processing at the time of receiving the value, a notice for calling attention is performed, so that overuse of the value to the game can be prevented.

  Next, the card unit 750 waits for operation of the ball lending button 751 (S122), reception of banknotes (S123), reception of a membership card or visitor card (S124), or operation of the return button 752 (S125). If there is an operation of the ball lending button 751 in S122 (YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmation condition is satisfied (S131). Here, the confirmation condition is, for example, “the accumulated value is a certain value or more”. Specifically, the accumulated amount received from the hall computer 540 in the player identification process of S112 is displayed in the display reference amount corresponding product table. One of the stored display reference amounts has been reached.

  If it is determined in S131 that the confirmation condition is satisfied (YES), as shown in D2, the accumulated amount is stored in the display reference amount corresponding product table in association with the reached display reference amount. The displayed product and a confirmation button are displayed on the display 7123 (S132), and the process proceeds to S133.

  Here, the control unit and display 7123 of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S132 displays the accumulated value on the condition that the confirmation condition (here, the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value) is satisfied. It functions as a means. According to this, by letting the player grasp the accumulated value, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game.

  Further, the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S132 and the display 7123 function as a product notification unit that notifies the product corresponding to the accumulated value. According to this, since the commodity purchased with the value used in the game is notified, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  Next, the card unit 750 switches the display of D2 and the display of D2 ′ that displays “Please press the confirmation button” and the confirmation button at predetermined intervals (for example, every 3 seconds), and operates the confirmation button. (S133), and if there is a confirmation button operation (YES), the display of D2 and D2 ′ is erased and the ball lending process is performed (S135). The ball lending process is also performed when it is determined in S131 that the confirmation condition is not satisfied (NO) (S135). This ball lending process has been described in the third embodiment.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S135 causes the usable value (remaining frequency) made available by the usable process (S117, S118, S108) to be used for the game in the corresponding gaming machine. It functions as a usage processing means for performing usage processing. Here, the usage processing is performed on the basis of accepting the usage operation (operation of the ball lending button 751) (YES in S122), and the accumulated value is constant. Based on the fact that the use operation is accepted on the condition that it is equal to or greater than the value (YES in S131) and a specific operation (operation of the confirmation button) different from the use operation is further accepted (YES in S133), Use processing is performed. According to this, if the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value, the number of operations for performing the use process increases, so that excessive use of the value for the game can be prevented.

  Next, the card unit 750 transmits a ball lending usage amount notification including the ball lending usage amount used for the ball lending processing and the card ID of the reservation card to the card management computer 500, and the ball lending usage amount. A ball lending usage amount notification including face data is transmitted to the hall computer 540 (S136), and it is determined whether the remaining frequency after the ball lending process is zero (S137). ) Return to S122, and if it is zero (YES), the process is terminated.

  The card management computer 500 that has received the notice of the amount used for the ball loan subtracts the amount used for the ball loan included in the notification from the remaining amount of the card stored in the card DB in association with the card ID included in the notification. The hall computer 540 that has received the ball lending usage amount notification adds the ball lending usage amount included in the notification to the accumulated amount stored in the player DB in association with the face data included in the notification.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S136 functions as a cumulative value specifying processing unit that performs a cumulative value specifying process for enabling each player to specify a cumulative value that is a cumulative value of use. . According to this, various processes based on the accumulated value can be performed.

  If a bill is accepted in S123 (YES), the process proceeds to S111. If a membership card or a visitor card is received in S124 (YES), the process proceeds to S103. If the return button 752 is operated in S125 (YES), the membership card or visitor card retained by the card reader / writer is returned (S126), and the membership card or visitor card stored in the card storage unit is returned. One sheet is conveyed to the card reader / writer and reserved, and the process is terminated.

  Next, a difference between the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment and the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment described above, the first predetermined amount is specified in S113 of FIG. 57, but in the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the second predetermined amount is determined in S113. Is identified. Specifically, the predetermined amount (here, the second predetermined amount) stored in the predetermined amount table and the specific amount are specified in association with the age received from the hall computer 540 in the player identification process of S112.

  In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, it is determined in S116 of FIG. 57 whether or not the received amount is equal to or larger than the first predetermined amount. In the embodiment, in S116 ′ instead of S116, it is determined whether or not the accumulated amount is greater than or equal to the second predetermined value. If the accumulated amount is less than the second predetermined value (NO), the process proceeds to S117, and the accumulated amount is determined. Is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value (YES), the process proceeds to S118, and a return process upon receipt of value is performed in S119. In this example, in the return process at the time of value reception, half of the received amount is recorded and returned on the reservation card, but the entire received amount may be recorded on the reservation card and returned.

  That is, based on the fact that the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S119 in the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment has received the value (YES in S101), the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. It functions as a return processing means for performing return processing at the time of value reception for returning a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the received value without receiving a return operation on the condition (YES in S116 ′). Is.

  According to this, when the value is accepted, if the accumulated value that is the accumulated value of use is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the value is received for returning a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the accepted value When the return process is performed, in order to use the returned value for the game, it is necessary to accept the recording medium (that is, the time and effort is increased). Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game. Further, since there is an opportunity to settle the value of the returned recording medium with the settlement apparatus 580, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

Finally, a modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second to fourth embodiments described above, the example in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 701 has been described. However, the gaming machine is not limited thereto, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine or a game that uses a medal as a gaming medium, for example. Enclosed pachinko machine in which pachinko balls, which are media, are inaccessible, pachinko machines and slot machines that can be played using score data without using pachinko balls and medals, game areas and pachinko balls in the image It may be an image-type pachinko machine that is displayed in this manner, an image-type slot machine in which reels are displayed as images, or the like.

  In the second to fourth embodiments described above, an example in which the lending of the game medium is a ball lending that lends a pachinko ball has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lending of the game medium lends the medal. For example, in the above-mentioned image-type pachinko machine or slot machine, the remaining card amount may be converted into a score as a game medium and used in a game.

  In the second to fourth embodiments, the example in which the currency is a banknote has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the currency may be a coin or both a banknote and a coin. . Also, it is not limited to accepting deposits of tangible money, but intangible money (for example, money data equivalent to money amount such as electronic money, balance of deposit account specified from debit card record information, or credit) You may make it receive the payment of the credit amount etc. which are specified from the recording information of a card | curd in contact or non-contact. Further, the gaming apparatus (card unit 750) may be one that cannot accept money (that is, cannot deposit money).

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the money (banknote) received by the money receiving means (banknote identification machine 24) is discharged to the outside of the gaming apparatus (card unit 750) and is transported by the banknote transport mechanism. Alternatively, the accepted money may be stored inside the gaming device.

  In the above first to fourth embodiments, the example in which the member card or the visitor card is an IC card that records information using a non-contact type IC chip has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The visitor card may record information using a contact IC chip, a magnetic stripe, a two-dimensional code (for example, a bar code), a three-dimensional code, or optical interference (for example, a hologram). Further, these shapes are not limited to the card type, and may be a coin type. Further, the game recording medium may be a mobile phone or the like mounted with an IC chip, instead of a membership card or a visitor card.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the remaining card amount is recorded on the membership card or the visitor card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining card amount is not recorded on the membership card or the visitor card. It may be one that manages the remaining card amount (complete ID management).

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the recording medium is a membership card or a visitor card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the recording medium is information that can specify the number of acquired game media (the number of possessed balls, the number of stored balls). May be a possession card or a membership card. That is, the recording medium may be any recording medium on which information capable of specifying the value owned by the player is recorded.

  When the recording medium is a possession card, the number of possessions is managed by the possession management device in association with the card ID of the possession card, and when the possession card is received in the card unit 750, In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the card ID of the possession card is transmitted to the possession management device, and the number of possessions managed in association with the card ID is received. If the amount equivalent to the received number of balls is equal to or more than the first predetermined amount (YES in S116), half of the number of balls is stored as the number of available balls (S118), The possession card that can specify half of the number is returned (S119).

  According to this, if the received value (the number of possessed balls) is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a partly usable process is performed in which a part of the received value (in this example, half of the number of retained balls) is an available value. As a result of the return processing at the time of receiving the value to return the recording medium that can specify the remaining value at the time of reception (in this example, half of the number of possessions) that was not regarded as the usable value of the received value In order to use the remaining value at the time of reception in the game, it is necessary to receive the recording medium, so that it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value in the game.

  In the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, if the accumulated amount is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value (YES in S116 '), the processes in S118 and S119 are performed. According to this, when the value (mochitama card) is accepted, if the accumulated value, which is the accumulated value of use, is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, a part or all of the accepted value (the number of possessions) can be specified. By performing return processing at the time of receiving a value for returning the recording medium, it is necessary to receive the recording medium in order to use the returned value for the game, so that excessive use of the value for the game is prevented. it can.

  When the recording medium is a member card, the number of stored balls is managed by the stored ball management device in association with the member ID recorded on the member card, and when the card unit 750 receives the member card, The member ID of the membership card is transmitted to the storage management device, and the number of storages managed in association with the member ID is received. In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the received If the amount corresponding to the number of stored balls is equal to or greater than the first predetermined amount (YES in S116), half of the number of stored balls is stored as the number of usable stored balls (S118), and the member capable of specifying half of the number of stored balls can be specified. The card is returned (S119).

  According to this, if the received value (the number of stored balls) is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a part of the received value (a half of the number of stored balls in this example) is used as a usable value. At the time of reception, the return processing at the time of receiving the value for returning the recording medium that can identify the remaining value at the time of reception (in this example, half of the number of stored balls) that was not regarded as the usable value of the received value is performed. In order to use the remaining value for the game, it is necessary to accept the recording medium, so that it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  In the second embodiment, if the accumulated amount is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value (YES in S116 '), the processes of S118 and S119 are performed. According to this, when the value (member card) is accepted, if the accumulated value that is the accumulated value of use is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the accepted value (number of stored balls) Since the return process at the time of receiving the value for returning the game requires the reception of the recording medium in order to use the returned value for the game, it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game.

  In the above second to fourth embodiments, as shown in FIG. 47, an example in which the remaining frequency display portion 753, the ball lending button 751, and the return button 752 are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701 has been described. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and some or all of these may be provided in the card unit 750.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the first predetermined amount, the second predetermined amount, and the specific amount are set for each player's age in the predetermined amount table of FIG. 53 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first predetermined amount, the second predetermined amount, and the specific amount may be uniform regardless of the player's age, and conversely, different values are set for each player. May be. According to this, for example, overuse of value to a game can be more effectively prevented for a low-income person or a player who is easy to use too much.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the age and cumulative amount are stored in association with the player's face data in the player DB of FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of the player's face data, a member card or a visitor card card ID, or a member card member ID, or the like is stored in association with information that can individually identify the player. It may be.

  In the above embodiment, it is determined in S106 in FIG. 57 that the deposit return flag is “1”, that is, the accepted membership card or visitor card is returned in the value acceptance return processing (S119). And the example where alerting alerting | reporting is performed by S107 was demonstrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when it is determined that the deposit return flag is “0”, that is, the accepted membership card or visitor card has been returned in the normal return process (S126). You may perform alerting alerting | reporting.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in S116 of FIG. 57 that the received amount is greater than or equal to the first predetermined amount, and when it is determined in S116 ′ that the accumulated amount is greater than or equal to the second predetermined amount, in S119 Although the example in which the return process at the time of receiving a value is described has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return process at the time of receiving a value may be always performed without performing the determination of S116 or S116 ′. According to this, since the return process at the time of receiving the value is always performed, in order to use the returned value for the game, it is necessary to receive a recording medium (that is, increase in labor). Prevent overuse of value. Further, since there is an opportunity to settle the value of the returned recording medium with the settlement apparatus 580, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in S118 of FIG. 57, an example in which half of the received amount is stored in the remaining frequency in the partially usable process has been described. However, the amount is not limited to half of the accepted amount, and any portion of the accepted amount may be stored in the remaining frequency. That is, the usable processing means may be a part that performs a partly usable process that uses a part of the received value as a usable value on condition that the received value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the confirmation condition shown in S131 of FIG. 57 is “the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value” has been described. However, the confirmation condition is not limited to this, and it may be “a game time is a certain time or more” or “a predetermined time has elapsed during the game”.

  Here, when the confirmation condition is “the time during which the game is played is a certain time or more”, for example, in the player DB of the hall computer 540, the time during which the game is played in association with the face data Is stored, and if the time during which the game is played is equal to or longer than a certain time (for example, 2 hours), the process of S132 is performed assuming that the confirmation condition is satisfied.

  When the confirmation condition is “a predetermined time has elapsed during the game”, for example, in the player DB of the hall computer 540, the time when the game is started is stored in association with the face data, Every time a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses from the stored time, the process of S132 is performed assuming that the confirmation condition is satisfied.

  According to this, by letting the player grasp the accumulated value, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game.

  The use operation (the operation of the ball lending button 751) is accepted on the condition that the playing time is a certain time or more, or a predetermined time has elapsed during the game, and the use operation is Based on the fact that a different specific operation (operation of the confirmation button) is further accepted (YES in S133), the use process (ball lending process in S135) is performed. According to this, if the time during which the game is played exceeds a certain time, or if a predetermined time has elapsed during the game, the number of operations for performing the use processing increases, so that excessive use of the value for the game can be prevented. .

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which a specific operation (operation of the confirmation button) is received in S133 to perform the ball lending process on condition that the confirmation condition shown in S131 of FIG. 57 is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific operation may always be accepted to perform the ball lending process regardless of whether or not the confirmation condition is satisfied. According to this, since it takes one more time to perform the ball lending process, it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game. It is also effective to make the user aware of overuse by displaying the accumulated amount on the display 7123 at that time.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific operation is the operation of the confirmation button indicated by D2 or D2 ′ in FIG. 57 has been described. However, the confirmation button is not limited to that displayed on the touch panel display 7123, and may be an independent button provided at a predetermined location of the card unit 750. The specific operation may be a re-operation of the return button 752. That is, the specific operation may be a specific operation different from the use operation.

  As described above, the object of the present invention is to prevent overuse of value in games, but the prevention of overuse can also be achieved by the following method.

  When the cumulative amount reaches a certain amount, the error goes down. According to this, since a player can be calmed down by taking a certain period of time until error handling, overuse can be prevented.

  After accepting bills of high denomination (5000 yen, 10,000 yen), display the desired amount of use below the set amount (for example, 5000 yen) and make it available up to the selected amount. The lending button 751 is invalidated. According to this, overuse can be prevented by having the player decide the desired amount of money at the time of payment.

  For each player, the number of deposits of each denomination is managed, and when a player who has received a denomination of a denomination inserts a banknote of that denomination, the banknote is returned. According to this, overuse can be prevented by limiting the number of times of deposit.

  Each time a bill is inserted, a confirmation operation (for example, an operation of a deposit button displayed on the display 7123) is accepted. According to this, excessive use can be prevented by adding one effort to the deposit. It is also effective to make the user aware of overuse by displaying the accumulated amount on the display 7123 at that time.

  The game time from insertion of the membership card or visitor card to return is displayed on the display 7123. According to this, the display of the game time and making the player aware of the game can prevent the sinking.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the second to fourth embodiments, a case has been described in which the invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine 701 that is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball. In the fifth embodiment, the invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game ball and gives a score in response to detection of a winning ball.

  Specifically, the gaming machine of the above embodiment is a gaming machine in which a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the game ball or rental ball that the player has paid out is launched into the game area. However, the game score for use in the game is given using the frequency that is the game value of the size specified by the record information of the game recording medium such as the membership card or the visitor card, and is given. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a gaming score given by winning a game score or winning a game. .

  In other words, after the game medium (game ball) passes through the start area, based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display, a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner and a display result is derived. A game machine that includes a variable display device for displaying, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, the game machine shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to a player. A game ball encapsulated in the gaming machine is used to play the game area, and the game score is subtracted in response to the game ball being driven, and the game ball wins the winning area provided in the game area. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds game scores accordingly. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an outline of authentication of an enclosed game machine in the fifth embodiment. Referring to FIG. 58, in such an enclosed game machine, a mechanism for authenticating whether the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750 have been illegally modified is defined.

  In this mechanism, the authentication / communication control circuit 7311 of the main board 731 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 is connected to the authentication / communication control circuit 7371 of the payout control board 737, the interface board 766, and the control unit 7510 of the card unit 750. The authentication / communication control circuit 7501 and the hall server 590 are communicably connected to the key management server 600. Further, devices on the way between the main board 731 and the key management server 600 are also communicably connected to the key management server 600.

  These devices can authenticate whether these devices have been tampered with by exchanging authentication information with the key management server 600. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the security of the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 701 can give a predetermined game point when a winning occurs and can play a game using the game point. Based on the reception of the operation of the ball lending button 751 by the card unit 750, information that can specify the game points to be added using at least a part of the accepted money is transmitted to the pachinko gaming machine 701. The The card unit 750 receives information from the pachinko gaming machine 701 that can identify the game points stored in the pachinko gaming machine 701 based on the reception of the counting operation at each counter 705. For this reason, it is possible to deal with a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 701 in which a predetermined game point is given by the occurrence of a winning and a game using the game point is possible.

  The card unit 750 is communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the hall computer 540. The card unit 750 includes an external output terminal (not shown) for converting information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the hall computer 540 and transmitting it. For this reason, even if the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 is not information for the conventional hall computer 540, the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 is converted and transmitted to the conventional hall computer 540. Hall computer 540 can be used.

  The card unit 750 replaces the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 with the external output terminal for converting and transmitting the information to the hall computer 540, and converts it into a pachinko gaming machine. An external output terminal that relays the information generated in 701 may be provided.

[Modification]
Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.

  (1) For example, in the above embodiment, a medal is applied as an example of a game medium, but a spherical pachinko ball (game ball) may be applied.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the pachinko parlor where the slot machine 1 or the pachinko machine is installed is illustrated as the game arcade where the medal lending machine 100 is installed, but the game arcade to which the present invention is applied. May be a game center or the like.

  (3) In the embodiment, the counted regular medals are discharged and collected from the discharge port 192 to the game island. However, the regular medals are stored in the housing 101 in the same manner as the illegal medals. However, it may be recovered as appropriate.

  (4) In the above embodiment, when medals are counted by the counting device 190, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the number of medals held in the card table (see FIG. 20A) (FIG. 37). When the illegal medal detection notification condition is satisfied, the control unit 181 subtracts the value of the cumulative illegal medal number from the medal number of the card table (see FIG. 20A). (See Sd8 of illegal medal processing in FIG. 38), but other modes may be used. For example, when the counting device 190 counts medals, the control unit 181 suspends adding 1 to the number of medals and records it in the hold count value, and the illegal medal detection notification condition is not satisfied. The holding count value may be added to the number of medals.

  (5) In the embodiment, the authenticity of the medal counted by the counting device 190 is determined. However, when the payout device 182 pays out the medal, the authenticity of the medal is determined. The illegal medals may be stored in a storage unit in the payout device 182 to prevent the illegal medals from being paid out. Then, when the storage unit in the payout device 182 becomes full, and when a predetermined amount of medals are stored at the time of closing (end of business), the illegal medals in the storage unit in the payout device 182 are collected. You may make it perform the alerting | reporting to carry out.

  That is, the gaming device of the present invention includes a gaming device that includes one or both of a counting device that counts game media such as medals and a payout device (rental device) that pays out (lends) game media.

  (6) Also, in the above embodiment, at the end of the game hall business, the medal management computer 550 requests each medal lending machine 100 to execute a tightening related process (business closing process). When the request is received, when the number of medals in the medal storage box 194 (reservoir) reaches a predetermined number (second storage amount), this is notified. (2 storage amount) is notified at the time when the game room is closed as well as during the business hours, and the corresponding slot machine 1 is in a standby state (game is performed). Notification may be made when the state is not in the state.

  (7) In the embodiment, the number of medals in the medal storage box 194 reaches the second storage amount based on the reception of the tightening related process request for performing the request for executing the tightening related process (business closing process). However, the notification may be made based on the reception of a request other than the tightening related processing request.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of medals in the medal storage box 194 has reached the second threshold (second storage amount) in the tightening-related processing, and notification is made when the second threshold is reached. However, the timing for determining whether or not the second threshold value has been reached can be changed in various ways, and it is always determined whether or not the second threshold value has been reached. In such a case, the fact is stored (for example, a predetermined flag is set), and whether or not it is determined that it has been reached when the game hall is closed (whether or not the predetermined flag is set). ) And may be notified if stored.

  (8) In the embodiment, when the number of medals in the medal storage box 194 (storage unit) reaches a first threshold value (first storage amount) that is a predetermined number that needs to be collected, this is indicated. Although notification is made, if notification is not made when it is reached, for example, notification may be made after the end of business, for example, notification that the first threshold value has been reached in the tightening-related processing. You may make it do.

  (9) In the embodiment, when setting is performed on the illegal medal relation setting screen, “100 sheets” is set as the “full tank notification condition” as the first threshold (first storage amount), “50 sheets” is set in the “closing store notification condition” as the second threshold (second storage amount), and the first threshold and the second threshold are set as different numbers. The second threshold value may be set to be the same number.

  (10) In the above embodiment, the medal lending machine 100 indicates that the medal storage amount of the medal storage box 194 has reached the first threshold (first storage amount) or the second threshold (second storage amount). Although the state notification lamp 111 for notification by light is provided, a speaker capable of outputting sound or a display device for notification by a predetermined image may be provided. Furthermore, if the medal lending machine 100 has a function capable of outputting to the external device (medal management computer 550, etc.) that the medal storage amount of the medal storage box 194 has reached the first threshold value or the second threshold value, The notification means may not necessarily be provided, but may be provided in an electrically connected external device or the like.

  (11) In the above embodiment, each medal lending machine 100 exemplifies a mode in which regular medals are registered individually, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these regular medals are registered. The medal image may be distributed from the medal management computer 550 to each medal lending machine 100 so that it can be registered at once, or a storage medium such as a flash memory in which the image of the regular medal is stored can be rented individually. It may be installed in the machine 100 for registration.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, the remaining amount of medals (the number of balls) is left in the medal lending machine 100 (card unit 750), and only the remaining prepaid amount is associated with the deposit amount corresponding card and discharged to the outside. It was made to be. As a result, when there are counted medals (game balls), it is possible to prevent a medal lending using a prepaid balance not used for medal lending out of accepted money from being erroneously performed. it can.

  Generally, the unit price of a game medium when a prepaid balance is used to lend a game medium such as a medal is higher than the unit price of a game medium when a medal is exchanged for a prize. For this reason, a player who uses a medal with a low unit price can play more games with less value than a player who uses a loaned medal with a high unit price. It is advantageous. Therefore, it is effective for a player to prevent the medal lending using the prepaid balance from being erroneously performed even though there are medals.

  (13) When a card return operation is performed, the card unit 750 may transmit a signal indicating that to the pachinko gaming machine 701. The pachinko gaming machine 701 may receive the signal and notify that the card has been ejected. In this way, even when the return button is accidentally touched, the fact that the card has been ejected is notified, so there is no need to forget to acquire the card and the card can be prevented from being stolen. . A signal indicating that the card return operation has been performed may be transmitted to the calling lamp 200 instead of the pachinko gaming machine 701 to notify the calling lamp 200 that the card has been ejected.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the membership card is a complete ID management system, and the visitor card is a system that records information on the card in addition to the complete ID system. The complete ID management method is a method in which only identification information such as a card ID is recorded on a card, and management of the remaining amount, holding balls, and storage balls is performed by a management computer in association with the identification information.

  However, it is not limited to this, the membership card and the visitor card are both complete ID management, both are stored in the card, both are used together, one is the complete ID management, the other is stored in the card, and either is used together It is possible to adopt various methods as a management method of the remaining amount, the holding ball, and the stored ball, such as the complete ID management on the other side, the combination on one side, and the other side being stored in the card.

  (15) The player's face may be imaged and stored when discharging the deposit-corresponding card in step Sh15 of the remaining amount withdrawal process of FIG. Then, the remaining amount discharge flag is turned on in step Sk1 of the issue / payment process in FIG. 33, step Sm13 in the return process in FIG. 34, step Sp3 in the replay process in FIG. 36, step Sj11 in the post-card insertion process in FIG. In addition to determining whether or not the player is in a state, it is determined whether or not the player's face when the remaining amount is discharged matches the current player's face. If they match, the processing may proceed to the subsequent processing. As a result, in the case where the player does not have a matching face and does not have a deposit balance card, it is not necessary to proceed to the subsequent processing, so that unnecessary processing can be prevented from being executed.

  In particular, in the case of the post-card insertion process in FIG. 44, when the player leaves the deposit remaining amount corresponding card in a state where it is out of the card insertion slot, Even if the card is inserted by operating the “” button, the faces do not match, and therefore the processing for associating the number of medals in the medal lending machine 100 with the card is not performed, so the medal is stolen. I can't.

  (16) In the embodiment described above, in the remaining amount extraction process of FIG. 43, after the deposit remaining amount correspondence card is discharged in step Sh15, the possession medal correspondence card is issued in step Sh18. At this time, in the member card table or the visitor card table shown in FIG. 22, the card ID of the deposit remaining amount correspondence card and the card ID of the possession medal correspondence card may be associated with each other. Or you may make it memorize | store the flag which shows whether a corresponding deposit remaining amount corresponding | compatible card or a medal corresponding card | curd exists.

  That is, you may make it manage a payment remaining amount corresponding | compatible card and a corresponding medal corresponding card | curd correspondingly. This management may be performed by a management apparatus such as the card management computer 500, or may be performed by a gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100.

  Then, when the payment remaining amount corresponding card is accepted by the settlement apparatus 580, the card management computer 500 is inquired as to whether or not the flag is stored corresponding to the card ID when the prepaid balance is inquired. Only when there is a response indicating that there is a card with medals, the presence of a card with medals may be notified.

  This makes it possible to alert the player to exchange medals with the number of medals specified on the card with medals for prizes only when necessary when the balance specified with the card corresponding to the deposit is settled. . As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to exchange prizes without performing unnecessary notification.

  In addition, when a game device such as another medal lending machine 100 or a card unit 750 receives a card with a remaining deposit or a card with a corresponding medal, is there a corresponding card with a corresponding medal or a card with a remaining deposit? Whether or not the card management computer 500 is inquired and there is a response indicating that it exists may be notified to the player.

  As a result, even when the player moves to another gaming machine, the presence of a corresponding medal-supported card or a deposit balance card can be notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming medium from being lent by using the prepaid balance specified by the deposit remaining amount corresponding card even though there is a possessed medal specified by the possessed medal compatible card. In addition, when there is no longer a medal specified by the card corresponding to a medal, it is possible to notify the player that there is a prepaid balance specified by the card corresponding to the remaining payment amount, so that unnecessary payment can be prevented. it can.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, the setting of functions for the membership card or the visitor card and the processing being executed are taken over only at the game hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be handed over to other amusement halls.

  (18) As a specific function described in step Sj20 of FIG. 44 described above, the gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 is configured such that the number of jackpots and the number of jackpot fluctuations on the display 123 and the call lamp 200 of the medal lending machine 100, etc. A display screen custom function for customizing a display method (for example, display content, layout, etc.) of the game information may be provided. Although the index to be emphasized differs depending on the player, by providing the function, it is possible to display the game information according to the player's desire and improve the player's willingness to play. Also, the setting of the display method and the like with this function may be transferred to the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  Moreover, you may make it provide another function as a specific function. For example, as a specific function, a display design custom function for customizing a display design such as an avatar and a background displayed on the display 123 or the call lamp 200 may be provided. Thereby, since it can be set as the display design suitable for the player's taste, a player's willingness to play can be improved. The setting of the design content with this function may also be taken over by the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  Also, as a specific function, a game with a low ball rental machine with a low unit price per ball (for example, 1 yen per ball) (for example, a slot machine with 1 medal of 5 yen, a pachinko game machine with 1 yen per ball). Or a normal ball rental machine with a normal unit price per ball (for example, a slot machine with one medal of 20 yen, a pachinko machine with 4 yen per ball). In addition, when a card with the setting of the function is inserted into a medal lending machine or a card unit of a gaming machine different from the setting, a function of notifying that the setting is different may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player from making a mistake in selecting a gaming machine having a unit price for which a game is desired. The selection setting by this function may also be taken over by the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  In addition, as a specific function, whether to give priority to the game with the holding ball or to give priority to the game with the storage ball is selected and set so that the set holding ball or the storage ball is used with priority. May be. Thereby, it is possible to play a game using the possession balls or storage balls to be prioritized. The selection setting by this function may also be taken over by the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  Further, as a specific function, the amount used for the game after the game is started may be a predetermined amount (the amount set by the player may be a predetermined amount, for example, 30000 yen, etc. It may be provided with a squeeze-in limiting function for notifying that or limiting the game when it becomes above (or over). As a result, it is possible to limit the player's infiltration into the game. The setting of the predetermined amount with this function may also be taken over by the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  Also, as the specific process described in step Sj20 of FIG. 44 described above, in this confinement restriction function, a process of accumulating the amount used for the game after the game is started may be executed. The processing for accumulating the amount of money used for this function may also be taken over by a card inserted later in the processing of step Sj20 in FIG.

  In addition, as a specific function, if it is prohibited to share a game medium such as a ball or a medal with another player in a game, if it is determined that the player is different by face authentication, that fact May be provided with a sharing prohibition function for informing the store clerk or restricting the game. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the disadvantageous situation to the game store side as the prohibition of sharing can be ensured. Further, the game store side can increase the setting of the lottery probability of the slot machine game, which can be in an advantageous state for the player.

  In addition, in each vehicle counting function as a specific function, when a process of counting game media such as medals or pachinko balls is being executed, if the membership card is not accepted, the membership card is inserted. The membership card inserted later may be transferred to the game media counting process. As a result, it is possible to easily perform processing for storing balls and storing medals with the membership card.

  In addition, in the drink ordering function as a specific function, there are not enough balls in the middle of the process of paying the price of the drink from the number of balls on the card that the clerk providing the drink has received earlier In addition, if a card with a recorded ball is inserted later, the adjustment process is taken over so that the amount of the card that has been inserted later is compensated for the missing value. You may make it settle from.

  (19) In the process of step Sj20 in FIG. 44, a process for confirming whether or not to take over the function setting and the process in which the function is being executed later may be executed.

  (20) The medal management computer 550 or the card management computer 500 manages the setting of functions for the recording medium and the processing being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be managed by another management apparatus such as the hall computer 540.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, the small-lot lending valid flag is stored only in the card table as shown in FIG. 20 of the gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100, and the card management computer 500 or the like. The data is not stored in the membership card table or the visitor card table as shown in FIG. In other words, the small lending function is not managed by the management device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small-lot lending function may be managed by the management device as well as other functions.

  (22) The function settings stored in the visitor card table of FIG. 22B (for example, the card lock valid flag, password, etc.) are not being used and are being stored. And when the game shop is closed. The function settings (for example, card lock valid flag) stored in the member card table of FIG. 22 (a) may or may not be cleared during the game shop closing process.

  In addition, it is preferable that a specific function setting (for example, a theft card flag of the theft card restriction function) is not cleared even at the time of a game shop closing process. Even if a theft card is used at a later date, the use of the card is restricted.

  (23) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 44, the number of medals of the previous card is added to the card inserted later. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prepaid balance of the previous card may be added to the card inserted later, or the number of medals and the prepaid balance may be added together.

  (24) At least two of the management devices such as the medal management computer 550, the hall computer 540, and the card management computer 500 may be used.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the card management computer 500 sets the card lock valid flag and the personal identification number, which are the card lock function settings, and the theft card restriction function. The theft card flag is now managed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the medal management computer 550 manages the history counting process, which is the process in which the game history counting function is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 20, the medal lending machine 100 stores a small amount lending flag which is a setting of the small amount lending function.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting of each function and the processing in which each function is executed may be managed by any management device, or for games such as the medal lending machine 100 or the card unit 750. It may be stored only in the apparatus.

  (26) The gaming apparatus has not only the medal lending machine 100 and the card unit 750 but also the function of counting each unit, and the number of possessed balls or information that can identify the number of possessed medals (for example, the number of possessed balls or possessed medals) The number itself, or the card ID that can identify the number of possessed balls or the number of possessed medals stored in association with the management device) is also recorded on the card.

  (27) The game history totaled by the game history totaling function may be configured to be transmitted from a gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 or the card unit 750 to the player's portable terminal in a wired or wireless manner. .

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, as described in step Sj20 of FIG. 44, when the card inserted later is a membership card, the setting of the encryption number of the card lock function is not taken over. . In other words, when the later-inserted recording medium is a member-purpose recording medium, the function setting for the previously inserted recording medium is not transferred to the later-inserted recording medium.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the later-inserted recording medium is for a member or non-member, the function setting for the previously inserted recording medium can be set in the later-inserted recording medium. You may make it not take over.

  In addition, instead of taking over the function settings for the previously inserted recording medium as they are, the settings whose contents and format have been changed may be taken over for the later inserted recording medium. For example, in step Sj20 of FIG. 44, the setting of the encryption number set in advance for the member card inserted later is not inserted without taking over the setting of the PIN number of the visitor card inserted previously. It can also be considered that the membership card is taken over.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the embodiment has been described on the assumption that the recording medium processing device is the medal lending machine 100 and the card unit 750 that use a card as a recording medium. However, the recording medium used by the recording medium processing apparatus is not limited to the card, and may be another recording medium. For example, a coin-shaped recording medium, a memory card-shaped recording medium, or a portable terminal possessed by a player may be used as the recording medium.

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the membership card is received by the card reader / writer 187, so that the processing related to the membership card can be executed.

  However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a mobile terminal such as a smartphone has a membership card function, and a gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 and the card unit 750 is provided with a function of communicating with a non-contact IC chip of the mobile terminal. The portable terminal may be held over the communication portion of the function of the gaming device, and the portable terminal may be received so that the processing related to the membership card can be executed.

  For example, by accepting a portable terminal as a membership card, the lending process, replay process, counting process, small-scale lending process shown in steps Sb21, Sb24, Sb25 in FIG. 30 and steps SSg13, Sg15, Sg16 in FIG. You may make it comprise so that a ball splitting process and an information inquiry process may be performed.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in step Sb14 and step Sb15 in FIG. 31, when the number of medals (the number of possessed balls) reaches a predetermined prescribed number, I made it to a state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to turn on the excess ball excess flag when the increase rate (for example, 1 hour increase rate) of the possession ball (held medal) reaches an abnormal value, The number or rate of increase in the number of possessed balls (held medals) in a gaming state advantageous to the player such as a big hit state of a single pachinko machine, a high base state (for example, a short time state) or a slot machine bonus or ART state It may be when the value reaches an abnormal value.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, in step Sm32 of FIG. 34, a notification that the store clerk is called to return the card is provided. In addition, in step S42 in FIG. 46, a notification that the store clerk is called for division is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of notifying that the store clerk is called, or notifying that the store clerk is called, the hall computer 540 is notified via the intercom 9 of the wireless broadcasting system 20. Information for this may be transmitted. As a result, the store clerk can be more reliably directed to the gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100.

  (33) In the embodiment described above, in step Sm31 to step Sm33 before the card is returned in the return process of FIG. 34 when it is determined in step Sb5 of FIG. 30 that the card has been returned. When the number of game media (the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals) exceeds the prescribed number, when the store clerk is called and a confirmation operation is performed by the store clerk, the process proceeds to the card return process (the process after step Sm33). I did it.

  In addition, when it is determined in step Sg5 in FIG. 42 that there has been an operation for splitting the ball, in steps Sr41 to Sr43 before the ball is split in the ball splitting process in FIG. When the store clerk is called and the store clerk performs a confirmation operation when the number of balls and the number of medals exceeds the specified number, the process proceeds to the process for splitting the ball (process after step Sr43). .

  However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured as follows. When the number of possessed game media exceeds the specified number (when YES is determined in step Sb14 in FIG. 31), the store clerk is assigned in the same manner as in steps Sm32 and Sm33 in FIG. 34 and steps Sr42 and Sr43 in FIG. Informed that the call is urged, and when the clerk confirms with the remote control, the clerk excess confirmed flag indicates that the clerk has confirmed that the number of possessed game media exceeds the specified number Turn on the. If it is determined that there has been a card return operation, and if the overrun confirmation flag is on, the process proceeds to a card return process. If it is determined that the operation for splitting the ball has been performed, and if the flag for confirming that the excess of the ball is on is on, the process proceeds to the processing for splitting the ball.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step Sm33 in FIG. 34 and step Sr43 in FIG. It may be transmitted from a gaming device such as the lending machine 100 to a management device such as the hall computer 540.

  Further, even though information indicating that such a confirmation operation has not been received from the gaming device, processing for returning the corresponding card (processing after Sm33 in FIG. 34) is executed, When a process for division (process after Sr43 in FIG. 46) is executed, it may be determined that there is an abnormality before or after completion of the card return process or the ball splitting process. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the fact may be notified by a management device such as the hall computer 540, or the hall computer 540 may notify the store clerk via the income 9 of the wireless broadcasting system 20, or a card return process. If the ball splitting process is not completed, those processes may be interrupted.

[Sixth Embodiment]
As a sixth embodiment, a detailed example of the enclosed game machine and card unit described in the fifth embodiment and an example of a system for managing them will be described. Note that the gaming machine, card unit, and system for managing them described as the sixth embodiment below include the gaming machine and card unit (including medal lending machines) described as the first to fifth embodiments. ).

  The present invention shown by the embodiment described below is connected to a gaming machine in which a game is played using a predetermined score, and the gaming machine is connected so as to be able to communicate with the gaming machine. A gaming system including a gaming device for enabling gaming on a machine, and a communication unit that communicates with a gaming machine where a game is played using a predetermined score. The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus for enabling a game on the gaming machine.

  Conventionally, even after a card of a recording medium is inserted into an information display terminal device and the card is removed, game history data is continuously aggregated as game data of the member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-328390). Issue gazette).

  Conventionally, in the closing operation, it has been necessary for the store clerk of the game hall to insert and count the game machine with the game points remaining, and to perform the operation of collecting the inserted card. When there are a plurality of gaming machines that require the work in the amusement hall, the burden on the store clerk in the work during the closing operation is large and complicated.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to reduce work on a gaming machine in which game points remain in store closing work.

(1) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P 2F), medal-free slot machine (S 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player A gaming system including a gaming device (CU3F, a call lamp device, etc.) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the valuable value owned by the player,
Accepting means (FIG. 59: a card reader / writer for accepting a member card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F) for accepting a storage medium (member card, visitor card, etc.) storing player identification information (card ID, etc.);
An acceptance signal transmitting means for transmitting to the gaming machine an acceptance signal indicating that the storage means has been accepted by the accepting means (FIG. 67: a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU3F to the P stand 2F);
A game point conversion means (FIG. 70: possession) for converting a score that is a valuable value owned by the player specified by the storage medium received by the reception means into a game point used for a game in the gaming machine. (Addition request processing to pay out the ball and make it a game ball)
A point conversion means (FIG. 71: game ball counting process for counting game balls to a ball) for converting the game points held by the gaming machine into points;
A score storage means for storing the score converted by the score conversion means in the storage medium (the area of the card holding ball (counting ball) in FIG. 64);
A return means (the CU control unit 323F ejects the card) for returning the storage medium received by the receiving means to the player after the game ends;
Return signal sending means for sending a return signal indicating that the return means has returned the storage medium accepted by the accepting means to the gaming machine (FIG. 73: Sending a card return notice command from the CU3F to the P stand 2F) When,
End processing means (FIG. 72: processing after the “closed” setting is set on the CU3F side) for executing a predetermined end processing when the game hall is closed,
The termination processing means is
End acceptance processing means for transmitting the acceptance signal to the acceptance signal transmission means as accepting the storage medium when the acceptance means does not accept the storage medium and the gaming machine has game points. (FIG. 72: A card insertion notification command indicating that a card with card ID = 0 and insertion time = 0, which is a virtual card, is inserted from CU3F to the P unit 2F),
End score processing means (FIG. 72: a card that is a virtual card) that stores the score by causing the score conversion means to convert the game points held by the gaming machine to a score when the store is closed. Stored in the CU3F as a holding ball of a card with ID = 0, insertion time = 0),
End return processing means for sending the return signal to the return signal sending means assuming that the storage medium has been returned (FIG. 72: Indicates that the card with card ID = 0, insertion time = 0, which is a virtual card, has been returned from CU3F. A command for notifying the card return is transmitted to the P platform 2F).

  According to the above configuration, the end return processing means that performs the end acceptance processing means and the end holding point processing means and returns the storage medium for accepting the storage medium to the gaming machine with the game points remaining in the closing operation. Therefore, it is not necessary for the store clerk of the amusement hall to insert the card into the gaming machine to perform the counting process, and to collect the inserted card, thereby reducing the burden of the closing operation.

(2) In (1) above,
The termination processing means is
The score relating means for relating the score stored by the end score processing means to the player specifying information stored in the storage medium received by the receiving means immediately before closing the game hall (FIG. 72). The counting ball is associated with the card ID of the card inserted in the CU3F immediately before the “closed” setting shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, the remaining game points are likely to be the game points of the player specifying information stored in the storage medium that was inserted immediately before closing the store, so the task of specifying the owner of the game points is performed. The game points can be reduced and the game points can be returned to the player at a later date more easily.

(3) In the above (1) or (2),
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information input by the reception means (backup of the received card ID or the like on the CU3F side);
When starting a game, player specifying information transmission control means for transmitting the player specifying information input by the receiving means to the gaming machine (FIG. 67: card ID and insertion time included in card insertion notification command) And so on)
Storage means for storing the player identification information transmitted by the player identification information transmission control means in the gaming machine (FIG. 67: backup of data such as card ID and insertion time included in card insertion notification command) In addition,
When the player specifying information transmission control means transmits the player specifying information while the receiving means is receiving the storage medium, the storing means does not store the transmitted player specifying information, The stored player specifying information is held (FIGS. 67 and 68: Since the card is being inserted, the card ID and the card insertion time are not backed up).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as falsifying the player specifying information stored in the gaming machine by intentionally transmitting the player specifying information to the gaming machine while the card is inserted. Can improve security.

(4) In the above (1) to (3),
Addition correction determination means for determining whether or not addition correction is made for the gaming points possessed by the gaming machine when the gaming machine recovers from a communication disabled state in which communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is not possible (FIG. 79). : CU3F requests recovery from the P unit 2F depending on whether the previous last transmission addition serial number transmitted from the P unit 2F matches or does not match)
As a result of the addition correction determination means, when it is determined that addition correction of game points is performed, retransmission means for retransmitting the game point addition information transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming machine before restoration (FIG. 79: CU3F Is retransmitted to the P unit 2F by the recovery request 2),
When it is not possible to add to the gaming points held by the gaming machine based on the addition information retransmitted by the retransmission means, the correction impossible information is transmitted to the gaming device and the gaming machine holds the gaming machine. Correction return means for transmitting point information to the gaming device (FIG. 79: notification of game ball addition NG is sent to the CU 3F, and the current number of game balls is transmitted as a status information response).

  According to the above configuration, when the addition information of the game points transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming machine cannot be added to the gaming points held by the gaming machine, the gaming point information held by the gaming machine is used for gaming. Since it is transmitted to the device, the gaming device can recognize that the addition correction could not be performed, and the gaming points that could not be added can be returned to the gaming device.

(5) In the above (1) to (3),
Update transmitted to the gaming machine together with addition information for adding gaming points held by the gaming machine and arrival confirmation information (additional serial number) updated according to a predetermined update pattern for confirming arrival of the addition information Information transmitting means (FIG. 78: transmitting a status information request including the number of balls to be added to the P stand 2F);
Update information processing means (FIG. 78) for performing processing for adding game points held by the gaming machine based on the addition information transmitted by the update information transmitting means and transmitting the arrival confirmation information to the gaming device. : Add the number of game balls based on the addition information, and send a status information response including the addition result to CU3F),
When the update information transmitting means transmits the arrival confirmation information to the gaming machine, a first storage means for storing the arrival confirmation information on the gaming device side (FIG. 78: CU3F adds the serial number to the P stand 2F) , Store that number as the last transmission addition serial number last time)
When the updated information processing means transmits the arrival confirmation information to the gaming device, the second storage means for storing the arrival confirmation information on the gaming machine side (FIG. 78: P stand 2F adds serial number to CU3F) , Store that number as the last transmission addition serial number last time)
Information requesting means for requesting the arrival confirmation information stored in the second storage means (FIG. 78: Recovery) when recovering from a communication-disabled state in which communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is not possible Send request),
Based on the arrival confirmation information stored in the second storage means obtained by the information request means and the arrival confirmation information stored in the first storage means, the gaming machine has Addition correction determination means for determining presence / absence of addition correction with respect to game points (FIG. 78: CU3F determines whether or not the last transmission addition serial number transmitted from P table 2F matches or does not match with respect to P table 2F. Request recovery),
When the addition information for adding the gaming points held by the gaming machine and the arrival confirmation information are transmitted to the gaming machine after the determination by the addition correction determination means, the transmitted arrival confirmation information; Based on the arrival confirmation information stored in the second storage means, re-addition correction determination means (FIG. 78: P stand 2F is used for re-determining presence / absence of addition correction for the gaming points held by the gaming machine) If the previous last transmission serial number is the same, the processing result is determined to be NG and notified to the CU3F).

  According to the above configuration, since the presence / absence of addition correction for the gaming points held by the gaming machine is re-determined, the gaming points held by the gaming machine even though the addition correction determination means determines that there is no addition correction. Even if the addition information to add is transmitted to the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent unnecessary addition correction from being performed. Further, unnecessary addition information is transmitted to the gaming machine and changed to an incorrect gaming point. Can be prevented.

(6) In (3) above,
The gaming machine is
Score storage means for storing the score (game ball counter, game score counter);
Score update means for updating the score stored in the score storage means in accordance with the use in the game and the occurrence of a prize (FIG. 69, FIG. 70: The number of game balls is added based on the number of balls added from the CU. A payout control unit 171F), and
At the start of communication with the gaming device, the player specifying information and predetermined numerical information (card insertion time, etc.) stored in the player specifying information storing means and the score storing means are stored. The score is transmitted to the gaming device (FIG. 73: a card return response including the card ID and the card insertion time is transmitted to the CU),
The gaming device is:
Score specifying storage means (the number of game balls in FIG. 64, the number of games in FIG. 166) for specifying and storing the current score when the player is playing with the gaming machine;
Accepting means for accepting input of the player specifying information and the predetermined numerical information stored in an external storage means (the host server 801F or a card) other than the gaming machine (FIGS. 76 and 80: Receiving the card insertion time from the host server 801F and reading the card ID from the reinserted card),
When the player is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player specifying information and the predetermined numerical information received by the receiving unit, the player specifying information transmitted from the gaming machine, and the predetermined Identical determination processing means (FIG. 77, FIG. 78: payout control unit 171F for determining whether the card ID and the insertion time coincide with each other) ) And
The score specifying storage means stores the score transmitted from the gaming machine as the current score when the same determination processing means obtains the same determination result (FIGS. 77 and 78). When the card ID and the insertion time match, the number of game balls = 175 is stored).

  According to the above configuration, the player specifying information and the predetermined numerical information transmitted from the gaming machine when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, and the player specifying information received by the receiving means And a process for determining whether or not the same player is specified based on predetermined numerical information, and when a determination result is obtained that the same player is obtained, the game is The score of the player who has been performed is stored and taken over as the score on the gaming device side after the start of communication, and the player can continue the game without suffering a disadvantage. Further, in determining the identity of the player, not only the player specifying information but also predetermined numerical information is used as the determination material, so that it is possible to determine the identity with higher reliability.

(7) In (3) above,
The gaming machine is
Storage means for storing the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means (the received card ID and type in FIG. 67 is stored in the payout control unit, SF8 in FIG. 68);
When the game ends, transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player specifying information stored in the storage means to the gaming device (received from the CU when the card is inserted in FIG. C-ID and type)
In the gaming apparatus, whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the transmission control means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means. The same determination means (determination of coincidence between stored C-ID and received C-ID in FIG. 73) is included.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device can identify the same player based on the player identification information transmitted from the gaming machine when the game is finished and the player identification information stored at the start of the game. It can be determined whether or not.

(8) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P 2F), medal-free slot machine (S 2SF)) in which a player plays a game. A gaming device (CU3F, paging lamp device, etc.) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the valuable value owned by the player,
Accepting means (FIG. 59: a card reader / writer for accepting a member card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F) for accepting a storage medium (member card, visitor card, etc.) storing player identification information (card ID, etc.);
An acceptance signal transmitting means for transmitting to the gaming machine an acceptance signal indicating that the storage means has been accepted by the accepting means (FIG. 67: a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU3F to the P stand 2F);
A game point conversion means (FIG. 70: possession) for converting a score that is a valuable value owned by the player specified by the storage medium received by the reception means into a game point used for a game in the gaming machine. (Addition request processing to pay out the ball and make it a game ball)
A point conversion means (FIG. 71: game ball counting process for counting game balls to a ball) for converting the game points held by the gaming machine into points;
A score storage means for storing the score converted by the score conversion means in the storage medium (the area of the card holding ball (counting ball) in FIG. 64);
A return means (the CU control unit 323F ejects the card) for returning the storage medium received by the receiving means to the player after the game ends;
Return signal sending means for sending a return signal indicating that the return means has returned the storage medium accepted by the accepting means to the gaming machine (FIG. 73: Sending a card return notice command from the CU3F to the P stand 2F) When,
End processing means (FIG. 72: processing after the “closed” setting is set on the CU3F side) for executing a predetermined end processing when the game hall is closed,
The termination processing means is
End acceptance processing means for transmitting the acceptance signal to the acceptance signal transmission means as accepting the storage medium when the acceptance means does not accept the storage medium and the gaming machine has game points. (FIG. 72: A card insertion notification command indicating that a card with card ID = 0 and insertion time = 0, which is a virtual card, is inserted from CU3F to the P unit 2F),
End score processing means (FIG. 72: a card that is a virtual card) that stores the score by causing the score conversion means to convert the game points held by the gaming machine to a score when the store is closed. Stored in the CU3F as a holding ball of a card with ID = 0, insertion time = 0),
End return processing means for sending the return signal to the return signal sending means assuming that the storage medium has been returned (FIG. 72: Indicates that the card with card ID = 0, insertion time = 0, which is a virtual card, has been returned from CU3F. A command for notifying the card return is transmitted to the P platform 2F).

  According to the above configuration, the end return processing means that performs the end acceptance processing means and the end holding point processing means and returns the storage medium for accepting the storage medium to the gaming machine with the game points remaining in the closing operation. Therefore, it is not necessary for the store clerk of the amusement hall to insert the card into the gaming machine to perform the counting process, and to collect the inserted card, thereby reducing the burden of the closing operation.

(9) The present invention provides a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine so as to communicate with the gaming machine using the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables the game of
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 64: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 73). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming apparatus (FIG. 73: P table 2F, when there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, sends a command of state information response including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, the counting processing means for counting the game points to the holding points (FIG. 73: CU3F is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 59: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 73: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium reception means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 73: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 73: CU3F is ready to return a card when the card can be removed) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal is notified to P stand 2F.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(10) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P 2F, S 2SF) that gives a predetermined game point when a winning occurs, and is connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicable, and has a valuable value (balance, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using storage balls, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.,
The gaming device is:
Player specifying information reading means (card reader / writer) for reading player specifying information (C-ID (card ID) or the like) for specifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (the CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer);
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (card ID is notified by card insertion notification in FIG. 67). Notification)
The gaming machine is
Storage means (FIG. 67: backup card ID) for storing the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means;
When the game is finished, transmission control means for performing control to transmit the player specifying information stored in the storage means to the gaming device (FIG. 73: P table 2F is backed up by a card return response). Send C-ID)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 64);
Conversion request transmitting means (FIG. 73: FIG. 73) for transmitting a conversion request for converting the gaming point to the holding point based on an operation (counting) for converting the gaming point into a predetermined holding point. P base 2F transmits a count request = ON state information request)
The gaming device is:
Based on the conversion request transmitted from the conversion request transmitting means, a conversion process for converting the gaming points into the holding points is executed (FIG. 73: the number of balls is added to the number of holding balls) and the conversion is performed. A conversion processing means for returning a conversion approval indicating that the request has been accepted to the gaming machine (FIG. 73: sending a count response = ON state information request);
Identical determination for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the transmission control means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means Further, it further includes means (FIG. 73: coincidence determination between the C-ID stored from the time of card insertion on the CU3F side and the C-ID notified by the card return response).

  According to such a configuration, the game points are converted into points based on the conversion operation, and the same game is determined by the player specification information transmitted from the gaming machine and the player specification information stored at the start of the game. By determining whether or not the player is specified, it is possible to determine the identity between the information specifying the player at the start of the game and the information specifying the player at the end of the game. Further, it is possible to end the game based on the determination result, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the game is ended by a player different from the player at the start of the game.

(11) The present invention is an information management device (for example, CU3F, Hallcon 900F, call lamp) capable of communicating with a gaming machine capable of playing a game medium by launching a game medium.
A signal (for example, a status information response indicating the launch intensity) output from the gaming machine and a first area where the game medium is provided in the game area (e.g., normal winning holes 272F to 274F). , A signal indicating that the vehicle has passed a large winning opening 271F, a starting winning opening 275F to 277F, a normal symbol gate, or one of a plurality of areas including at least one of the stage inlets (for example, a passing area) State information response) and a second area where the game medium is provided in the gaming area (for example, at least one of a normal winning port 272F to 274F, a big winning port 271F, a starting winning port 275F to 277F, a normal symbol gate, or a stage entrance) A signal indicating that the signal has passed through one of the plurality of regions including the first region and a region different from the first region (for example, Acquisition means for acquiring the status information response) indicating the passage region and (SF610 in Figure 147),
Using the signal received by the acquisition means, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area are each determined as the firing strength. Separately, a totaling unit (for example, SF613 in FIG. 147) that performs a totaling process for totaling is provided.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area are tabulated for each firing strength. Therefore, it is possible to grasp which area the game medium tends to pass according to the launch intensity (ease of passing through each area according to the launch intensity). In addition, when grasping | ascertaining the ease of passage of each area | region according to discharge | release intensity | strength, you may make it compare the frequency | count of a 1st area | region and the passage ratio of a 2nd area | region, for example.

  Hereinafter, a sixth embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each amusement island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls (halls), an enclosed circulation pachinko machine as an example of a game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine). 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3F, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2F at a side position on a predetermined side of the P table 2F. Yes. The card unit will be described below as an example of the gaming device according to the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but it is connected to the P stand 2F to collect game information such as jackpots and abnormalities, and the number of winnings. It may be a calling lamp device or the like.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F (see FIG. 62) is driven to make one shot of the enclosing ball. The game board 26F is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27F in front of the game board 26F. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the hitting operation handle 25F. Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted according to the amount of turning operation of the hitting operation handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  The launch strength of the pachinko ball (hereinafter simply referred to as launch strength T) can be adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting ball operating handle 25F (hereinafter also simply referred to as handle manipulation amount), and the handle manipulation amount is increased. The firing intensity T increases accordingly. Therefore, the player can adjust the firing strength T so that the pachinko ball passes through the region he / she aims by adjusting the handle operation amount.

  59 is a so-called first-type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided at the center of the game area 27F. In addition, the game area 27F is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 59, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271F, three normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, and three start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls that have won the respective start winning openings 275F, 276F, 277F. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271F is opened.

  A probable variation winning opening 271aF is arranged in the big winning opening 271F. When the pachinko ball that has won the big prize opening 271F further wins the probability variation prize opening 271aF, the probability that a big hit will occur after the end of the current big hit state is improved (hereinafter also referred to as a probability variation state or simply a probability change state). Will occur.

  Further, the display result of the variable display device 278F becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves). And a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27F are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 154F without winning. The pachinko balls won in any one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out opening 154F are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the P stand 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27F.

  An indicator 54F is provided at a position below the game area 27F in the P stand 2F. The display device 54F is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the points, the remaining card amount, or the display of the variable display device 278F to the player. Note that the display 54F is formed integrally with the CU (card unit) 3F even if it is attached to the P base (pachinko machine) 2F independently of the CU (card unit) 3F as shown in FIG. (Pachinko machine) It may be configured to be fitted to the front surface of 2F. If the display unit 54F of the CU3F is fitted to the front surface of the P base 2F, the CU3F and the P base 2F can be more strongly connected, and thus fraud can be further prevented. In this case, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the indicator 54F from being released unless the lower door provided with the glass door 6F or the ball hitting operation handle 25F is opened. .

  A 7-segment display 50F is provided below the display 54F. The 7-segment display 50F includes a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The 7-segment display 50F displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like.

  Further, a counting button 28F for counting from game balls to holding balls is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25F on the P platform 2F. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28F is kept pressed. It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or when the counting button 28F is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time). Further, the counting speed is further improved when a card return operation is performed, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  As described above, since the counting button 28F is provided on the P unit (pachinko machine) 2F side, it is seated facing the P table 2F as compared with the case where the counting button 28F is provided on the CU (card unit) 3F side. Can improve the operability of the player. In addition, the P platform 2F is provided with speakers 270F for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with the effects displayed on the variable display device 278F at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27F. Note that the position and the number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 59, and the position and the number may be changed as necessary.

  A game ball number display 29F for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28F. The game ball number display 29F is a 7 segment type display. The game ball number display 29F may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  The P stand 2F according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26F and another front frame (game frame) 5F. In particular, the game board 26F is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5F is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, the game store only needs to replace the game board 26F when replacing a new stand.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU3F according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3F is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member player who has registered as a member in the playground. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU3F that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of accumulated balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2F, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU3F, a bill insertion slot 302F for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305F formed to project forward from the front of the device, a card insertion / discharge port 309F for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305F described above, on the surface facing the player, the display card 312F and the membership card ID recorded on the membership card when the membership card is received (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID). ) And a replay button 319F for performing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the member card ID.

  The display 312F displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as card balance or simply the balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), but can display the number of game balls and other various information. In addition, the surface is configured by a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game by the P stand 2F. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the holding ball may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to savings ball withdrawal.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine. As described above, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in association with the membership card number on a server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding storage ball is searched based on the membership card number. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. When storing the hall server 801F in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801F may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  In addition, the timing of storing the holding ball in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored in a fixed period, for example, in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored in a lump or when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the CU3F, the holding ball stored in the CU3F is temporarily stored as a stored ball in the hall server 801F, and the date when the player receives the return of the card When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3F again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3F, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302F is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320F, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321F, and a card return button 322F are further provided on the front side of the CU 3F. The IR photosensitive unit 320F is an IR photosensitive unit 320F that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a game attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the P stand 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 60, P base 2F opens and closes with respect to frame-shaped outer frame 4F with front frame (hereinafter also referred to as cell) 5 and glass door 6F with its left edge as the center of swing. It is provided as possible.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging projections 6aF and 6bF are provided near the edge of the front frame 5F opposite to the center of swing (the free end side). The engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF of the outer frame 4F. When the open front frame 5F is pressed against the outer frame 4F, the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF get over the engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF, and the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  Then, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. 59 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, clockwise rotation), so that a pair of upper and lower engaging projections 6aF against the biasing force of the spring, 6bF is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6aF and 6bF are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF to be in the unlocked state, and the front frame 5F is released.

  Further, the front frame 5F is also provided with an engaging protrusion 8F for the glass door 6F, and an engaging hole 9F is provided in the glass door 6F portion facing the engaging protrusion 8F. The engaging protrusion 8F is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engaging protrusion 8F is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engaging hole 9F by pressing the opened glass door 6F against the front frame 5F. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8F is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8F and the engagement hole 9F are engaged to be in a locked state. In this state, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. 59 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation), whereby the engaging protrusion 8F is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring. Then, the engagement between the engagement protrusion 8F and the engagement hole 9F is released, and the lock door is released, and the glass door 6F is opened.

  A front frame opening detection switch 13F is provided at a position in contact with the outer frame 4F in the lower portion of the front frame 5F, and it is detected that the front frame 5F has been opened. Further, a glass door open detection switch 12F is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6F in the upper portion of the front frame 5F, and the glass door open detection switch 12F detects that the glass door 6F has been opened.

  The number of opening times of the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F is counted by a counting counter 120F shown in FIG. 139 (b). The counting counter 120F is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power supply even when the power supply of the P stand 2F is interrupted. Even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F are detected open. It is possible to count the number of times and transmit the count value to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P stand 2F.

  A main control board 16F is provided on the back surface of the game board 26F (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6F). Since the back surface of the outer frame 4F is closed, the main control board 16F can be detached from the game board 26F by first opening the front frame 5F and removing the game board 26F from the front frame 5F. That is, in order to remove the main control board 16F from the game board 26F or replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, it is necessary to open the front frame 5F, so the front frame opening detection switch 13F is used. The work can be detected without fail. Therefore, if the main control board 16F is illegally removed from the game board 26F, or the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F is illegally replaced, the front frame opening detection switch 13F can always detect.

  Further, a payout control board 17F is provided on the back surface of the front frame 5F. The payout control board 17F also needs to be removed from the back surface of the front frame 5F after first opening the front frame 5F. Therefore, if the payout control board 17F is illegally removed from the back surface of the front frame 5F or the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F is illegally replaced, the front frame open detection switch 13F can always detect.

  Next, the structure which installs the game board 26F in the front frame 5F is demonstrated. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the state before and after the game board 26F is attached to the front frame 5F. As shown in FIG. 61, attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF are provided on the back surface of the front frame 5F so as to be openable and closable around hinges 35aF and 35bF, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF have a square shape and have a bottom having a width corresponding to the game board 26F. By pushing the game board 26F into the front frame 5F in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 61 (b), the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF as shown in FIG. 61 (a). When the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F side is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33F provided on the front frame 5F side. Here, the convex-type drawer connector 32F and the concave-type drawer connector 33F are floating connectors having flexibility with respect to displacement.

  Further, when the game board 26F is installed on the front frame 5F, the convex drawer connector 32F is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33F, so that the main control board 16F on the game board 26F side and the payout control board on the front frame 5F side. 17F is connected. Further, the game board 26F is fixed at a fixed position, and the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F have flexibility with respect to a certain degree of positional deviation, so that the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer These can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship with the connector 33F. Even if the game board 26F is installed on the front frame 5F with only the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F without the mounting mechanisms 34aF and 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are provided. Since they are flexible connectors themselves, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the game board 26F and the front frame 5F. Here, the convex drawer connector 32F is connected to the main control board 16F via an internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26F, and the concave drawer connector 33F is a payout shown in FIG. 60 via the signal cable 36F. It is connected to the control board 17F.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the CU 3F and the P platform 2F. With reference to FIG. 62, the outline of the control circuit of CU3F and P stand 2F is demonstrated.

  The CU 3F is provided with a CU control unit 323F composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323F is a main control function unit of the CU3F, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program and control data for operating the CPU, A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area for the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 63) for security management. Connected to the CU control unit 323F is a security board (SC board) 325F for communicating with the payout control board 17F of the P platform 2F while ensuring security. The security board 325F is a security monitoring function unit of the CU 3F. Note that the CU control unit 323F may be provided on the security board 325F, or the CU control unit 323F may be provided on a board different from the security board 325F. The CU3F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the P stand 2F side, and the P stand 2F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the CU3F side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325F on the CU3F side and the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side are connected to be communicable via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Further, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P stand 2F. The server 800F (see FIG. 63) is notified. Also, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as board control information.

  To the CU control unit 323F, the authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. In addition, when the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, a light reception signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. The card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card into the CU control unit 323F, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F writes the information to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323F to the display control unit 350F, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350F. The display data converted by the display control unit 350F is transmitted to the P stand 2F. The display data transmitted to the P platform 2F is input to the display 312F via the relay board 14F. An image corresponding to the display data is displayed on the display 312F. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3F, and may be configured to be provided on the P base 2F and to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P base 2F has a main control board 16F that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2F, a payout control board 17F that manages and stores game balls, and a drive control of the firing motor 18F based on commands from the payout control board 17F. A launch control board 31F, a variable display device 278F, and an effect control board 15F that controls display of the variable display device 278F based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16F.

  The main control board 16F and the effect control board 15F are provided on the game board 26F. The main control board 16F is equipped with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161F. The main control unit 161F is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161F is connected to a winning sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F.

  The main control unit 161F draws random numbers for determining big hits (or further including small hits) / off when the balls win the start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F, and stores the random numbers. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is, for example, 4. When the variable display device 278F can start a new variable display, the main control unit 161F digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161F transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151F mounted on the effect control board 15F as commands.

  The command related to variable display transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / miss), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and an occurrence of a gaming state error. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151F determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278F based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F. For example, the effect control unit 151F specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161F, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151F controls display of the variable display device 278F according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15F is also connected to the display 54F via the relay board 14F on the front frame 5F side. The effect control unit 151F transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278F, and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278F to the display 54F. Is possible. The relay board 14F and the display 54F may be provided on the CU3F side. In this case, the effect control board 15F on the P platform 2F side is connected to the relay board 14F provided on the CU 3F.

  The payout control board 17F is provided on the front frame 5F. On the payout control board 17F, a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F is mounted. The payout control unit 171F is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  In addition, a firing ball detection switch 903F, an out ball detection switch 701F, a foul ball detection switch 33AF, a counting button 28F, and a radio wave sensor 173F are provided in a state of being electrically connected to the payout control board 17F. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17F. The ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls.

  Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173F.

  From main control board 16F to payout control board 17F, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the table 2F is powered on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P unit 2F is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17F performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning awards. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which this out ball detection signal has been input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F), as will be described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33AF, as described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which this shot ball detection signal has been input, subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

  The security board 325F of the CU 3F and the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security board 325F to the payout control board 17F as described later. Conversely, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F, as will be described later.

  In addition to the payout control board 17F, the front frame 5F is provided with a relay board 14F, a launch control board 31F, a launch motor 18F, and a game ball number display 29F. The game ball number indicator 29F may be directly attached to the front frame 5F, but the front frame 5F is similar to an upper plate or a lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko machine from which balls are paid out. You may make it provide in the aspect which can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54F. The payout control unit 171F of the payout control board 17F displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29F.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17F to the firing control board 31F. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31F outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18F of the launcher. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27F. The firing control board 31F emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18F when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input.

  The launch intensity sensor 19F detects the launch intensity T of the pachinko ball by the launch motor 18F. For example, the firing intensity sensor 19F detects, as the firing intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor configured to change the electrical resistance value according to the handle operation amount into a digital value. Hereinafter, as an example, it is assumed that the firing strength T varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the amount of steering operation. The detection result of the launch intensity sensor 19F is output to the payout control board 17F and the CU 3F via the launch control board 31F.

  A display 54F is provided on the front frame 5F. The display unit 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F via the relay board 14F. Further, the display 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15F via the relay board 14F.

  The relay board 14F outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15F and the display controller 350F to the display 54F, and the display 54F is based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15F or the display controller 350F. A switching circuit 141F for displaying an image is mounted.

  In this embodiment, the display 54F on the P stand 2F side is configured to be controlled on the CU side, but instead, the display 54F is controlled to be displayed on the P stand 2F side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54F based on a command from the payout control unit 171F.

  The RAM clear switch 293F is a switch for erasing game table information and game information stored in the RAM of the P table 2F. After the P table enters an error state, the store clerk operates the switch to initialize It becomes possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293F is operated by a store clerk after the card is discharged, for example.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
Here, with reference to FIG. 59 and FIG. 62, the circulation route of the pachinko balls in the P platform 2F will be outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F is driven. Thereby, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position is shot by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27F.

  The detection of the launch of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF changes from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on a payout control board 17F (see FIG. 62) provided with a payout control unit 171F. Based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  Out of balls that have been driven into the game area 27F, the out balls that have entered the out port 154F (see FIG. 59) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by an out ball detection switch 701F provided in the middle. . The foul ball flows down through the foul ball return path and is detected by a foul ball detection switch 33AF provided in the middle of the foul ball.

  All winning balls that have won the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected on the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collection ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collection ball passing path. A firing ball detection switch 903F is provided in the collection ball passage route. For this reason, all the winning balls, out balls, and foul balls are detected by the firing ball detection switch 903F. That is, the fired ball detection switch 903F is a switch that detects all of the pachinko balls that are bulleted. When the number detected by this switch is equal to the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the firing motor 18F, it can be determined that all of the hit pachinko balls have been collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of detections of the shot ball detection switch 903F and the number of bullets is calculated. When this difference number is not 0, the balls that have been driven into the game area 27F have been collected. It is determined that it is not. By making this determination, it is possible to determine whether the game area 27F is rolling, or whether there is a floating ball that does not fall due to being caught between nails or the like in the game area.

<Notification process for abnormalities in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 63, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323F, security board 325F, payout control unit 171F, or main control board 16F, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. In this case, the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F, the payout control unit 171F, or the main control board 16F may be replaced with another illegally manufactured product, or may malfunction or break down due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800F shown in FIG. 63 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F.

  First, when an abnormality occurs due to the security board 325F of the CU 3F, the CU control part 323F detects the abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control part 323F and the security board 325F described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325F, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325bF when the security chip 325bF of the security board 325F is manufactured. When the CU3F is loaded into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801F, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800F of the key management center via the hall server 801F and stored in the CU control unit 323F. The

  When the CU control unit 323F detects an abnormality of the security board 325F, the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F of the fact and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F controls the display 312F to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350F to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323F transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F, the security board 325F detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171F of the signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that. In response, the payout control unit 171F notifies the main control board 16F that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, main control board 16F performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171F, the security control unit 325F notifies the CU control unit 323F to that effect, and the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325F detects an abnormality of the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F notifies the payout control unit 171F of the fact. The notification destination of the abnormality occurrence by the security board 325F is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the security board 325F has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout controller 171F that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325F notifies the main control board 16F accordingly. In response to the notification, the main control board 16F performs control for abnormality notification similar to that described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, the fact is detected by the security board 325F, the fact that the abnormality has occurred is notified to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F performs the above-described abnormality notification control. Notify the hall server 801F that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, it is detected that the main control board 16F has occurred, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17F detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16F when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325F, and informs the main control board 16F of the abnormality when the abnormality occurs. Detected and notifies the security board 325F that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325F described above, the payout control board 17F is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, an abnormality notification function may be provided in the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side, and its transmission / reception mode. With reference to FIG. 64, main data among various data stored on each of the CU (card unit) 3F side and the P stand (pachinko machine) 2F side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the P ball 2F side calculates the variation in the number of game balls, and stores and manages the current latest number of game balls. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU3F side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2F side. On the other hand, the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of accumulated balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount) are managed and stored on the CU3F side.

  FIG. 64 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P platform 2F side. First, when the power is turned on for the first time when the P platform (pachinko machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F are electrically connected for the first time after they are installed in the game hall, the payout control board 17F on the P platform 2F side Receives the main chip ID (main control chip ID) from the main control board 16F, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3F side, and also issues the payout chip ID (payout control) stored in the payout control board 17F itself. Chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data at the time when the communication is started after the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P stand 2F side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3F side are stored on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P stand 2F as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P unit 2F side by sending new connection time data from the CU3F side when communication between the CU3F side and the P unit 2F side is started. Time data is stored on the P platform 2F side.

  Both the CU and the P platform transmit the “sequential number” added to the message. Further, both the CU and the P platform store the “serial number” received from the other party. There are three types of “serial number”: “normal serial number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Normal sequence number” indicates the sequence number of the message. The “normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with the initial value “1” on the CU3F side (primary station side). However, the “normal serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The P station 2F side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that there is no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3F requests the P platform 2F to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P stand 2F requests the CU 3F to count game balls.

  Only the CU3F has a normal serial number update right. When the same normal serial number as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU 3F stores the normal serial number as a backup and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3F has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When the addition request is made, the CU 3F transmits an addition sequence number obtained by adding 1 to the addition sequence number used for communication to the P unit 2F. The P base 2F returns the same addition serial number when accepting the request. When rejecting the request, the previously received addition sequence number (the addition sequence number received this time-1) is returned. Only the P platform 2F has the addition update right of the counting sequence number. When making a count request, the P platform 2F transmits a count sequence number added to the count sequence number that has been used for communication to the CU 3F. When the CU3F accepts the request, it returns the same counting sequence number. When rejecting the request, the received counting sequence number (counting sequence number-1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, regarding “normal serial number”, a configuration in which the serial number received by the CU 3F at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and each of the P base 2F and the CU 3F or the P base 2F counts (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission, and the other receives the serial number received. May be transmitted as it is.

  The “addition serial number” and “counting serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the addition request processing and the count request processing, respectively. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a configuration in which “normal serial number” is also counted up when the “additional serial number” and “counting serial number” are counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop the “normal sequence number” from being counted up when the “additional sequence number” and the “counting sequence number” are counted up. In the following, “normal serial number” is simply referred to as “serial number”. The “additional sequence number” and “counting sequence number” are also collectively referred to as “request sequence number”.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2F side to the CU 3F side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171F (see FIG. 62) on the P table 2F side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2F side to the CU 3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest game table information.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”. Here, the “prize ball” is a ball that is paid out when a ball wins a winning opening, and is a safe ball. The “fired ball” is a ball fired by the gaming machine. When there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. The “back ball” is a ball in which the fired ball returns without jumping onto the board surface. The “out mouth passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out mouth 154F, and the total number of the out balls and the safe balls means the number of balls passing through the out mouth.

  For example, when a pachinko ball placed in the game area 27F wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, the adding ball to which the gaming ball is added based on the winning information The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value (added ball number) of the added ball number counter is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. Moreover, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27F, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of game balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting ball number) from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the P stand 2F side, every time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3F side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171F). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), data of the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side, this backup data includes not only the value of each counter of this time but also the value of each previous counter that has not been sent at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission. You may make it memorize | store by adding the number of game balls transmitted immediately before to this last game machine information.

  In addition, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU3F side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3F side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2F side, and the number of balls is updated. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2F side. Further, the number of cards held is added and updated based on the value of the counting ball counter transmitted from the P platform 2F. Thus, the CU3F can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2F one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2F side. The CU3F updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3F stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be made by a computer or hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P unit 2F side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU3F side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P unit 2F side. (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3F side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3F side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and stored on the P unit 2F side by the hall server 801F or hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the CU3F has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 62) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU 3F (when no holding ball is present)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 62) is an input requesting the use of a holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU3F when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 62) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321F).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side. In response to this, the P stand 2F side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  In the gaming system according to the present embodiment, on the other hand, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image of prohibiting the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosed circulation pachinko machine in which each counter is provided.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. On the CU3F side, in response to this, the number of game balls is subtracted and the number of cards held is added and updated.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, the divided transmission of the message is not performed. Moreover, when transmitting a message | telegram continuously, the space | interval of 1 millisecond or more is opened.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a normal sequence number, an addition sequence number, a counting sequence number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Command” is a command code of the message. The “data part” is data of a message.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P unit (pachinko machine) 2F will be described.

  FIG. 65 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information to the P base 2F. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this recovery response notifies the CU3F of recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F after the CU 3F completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F, and the CU 3F transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “previous final transmission count serial number”, “store code”, and “SC board ID”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for the recovery request, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission serial number” is the serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2F at the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the previous final transmission serial number (serial number) on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received at the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a serial number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2F and the CU3F side when the status information response is received to the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P base 2F Is matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the count request ball count = 0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

  The P stand 2F refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3F, and when the CU 3F has not performed the count process for the count request, sets the count request ball count = 0 in the subtraction register. The user program executed on the P platform 2F is notified. When the counting process has been performed by the CU 3F, the count request ball number notified to the CU 3F is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match. Further, when the “store code” notified from the security board 325F and the “store code” held in the P stand 2F do not match, the user program side is notified of the store code mismatch via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2F to the CU 3F. Recovery information includes “sequential number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “last inserted card ID”, “previous card insertion time”, “previous last transmission addition serial number”, “game information storage presence / absence”, “ “Previous Game Table Information” and “Previous Game Information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU3F.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  “Previous game machine information” is game machine information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “game ball number”, “game ball information”, “count request ball number”, and “counting serial number”. “Number of game balls” is the number of game balls previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game ball information” is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls, the number of out-passed balls and the total number of prize balls notified to the CU 3F last time. The “count required ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU3F last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “number of game information” and “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3F last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Game information 1” is the game information 1 previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game information n” is the game information n previously notified to the CU 3F. The game information n includes, for example, type information or game prize ball information that was previously notified to the CU 3F.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU3F side and the P base 2F when the status information request is transmitted in the CU3F and when the status information request is received in the P base 2F.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P base 2F If the “store code” does not match, it is processed as no recovery data. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of gaming information, “gaming information storage presence / absence” is stored: set to 0x01, and recovery data held by the P table 2F is set in “previous gaming machine information” and “previous gaming information”. When there is no recovery data of game information or when the last transmission sequence number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is set to “0x00” without storage, and “previous game machine information” and “previous game information” are set to ALL “0”. set. However, the number of game balls notified last time is set as the number of game balls. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match.

  In addition, when the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P unit 2F has not been performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. When the “last last transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when the recovery process cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P base 2F. For example, the display information of the P platform 2F can be displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278F. Alternatively, a display device that is controlled by the payout control unit 171F may be further provided on the P platform 2F, and information for manual correction may be displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The command of this recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the addition recovery information to the P unit 2F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “number of additional balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3F determines that the additional ball recovery process needs to be performed on the P platform 2F. The CU 3F compares the “previous last transmission addition sequence number” included in the recovery response received from the P platform 2F with the “previous final transmission addition sequence number” stored in the CU 3F. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the time of the previous connection. This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P platform 2F will be described in detail. In the recovery process of the P unit 2F, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “previous last transmission serial number” notified from the CU 3F based on the recovery request 2, the number of balls is referred to the game ball. This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F on the P platform 2F, and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result process OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result process NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, the process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When the recovery process (additional number of balls) of the P unit 2F is performed, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F, the process OK is processed as a “recovery result” to the CU3F. And the number of balls to be added notified from the CU3F is set in the addition register and notified to the user program. However, if the game table state 1 responds with the game ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the state information response when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is a game ball addition request (Bit = 1), a “recovery” is sent to the CU3F. Processing NG is returned as a “result”, and the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program.

  When the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is the same as the “previous final transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P stand 2F, the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is returned as a “recovery result” to the CU 3F.

  In addition, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “previous last transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P platform 2F is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication start request command requests the P base 2F to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This communication start response is a response to the CU3F to start communication.

  The communication start request command notifies the P base 2F that communication has started normally. The P base 2F that has received the communication start request clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3F sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2F also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response of the communication start response notifies the CU 3F that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3F clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2F to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is a response to the CU3F for the communication end.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2F that the communication has ended normally, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3F that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3F and the P stand 2F stop communication and wait for restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3F to the P base 2F. The CU 3F periodically checks the state of the P stand 2F using this command. Further, the status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes data of “sequential number”, “command”, “CU state”, “addition ball number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3F notified to the P base 2F, and indicates that the card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and the card is not inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state in which a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3F. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of the CU3F.

  When Bit1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the card unit opening state to P stand 2F according to the state of CU3F. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F as a count information of all the game balls it holds as a count information response.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU3F notifies the P stand 2F of “preparing for card return” for a certain period (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28F is detected, the P table 2F has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it receives a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3F by the status information response as the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit 4 notifies the P stand 2F that the receipt is completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, card removal is waiting, and “0” indicates completion of card removal. Bit5 notifies the P stand 2F that the card is waiting to be removed from the CU 3F. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the status information response notifies the CU 3F of the information / status of the P platform 2F. The response of the status information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information response includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “game table state”, “injustice detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). “Number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3F using the “total number of ball balls”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3F checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3F matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2F.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154F (when there are multiple passing balls at the time of transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball count” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball count” transmitted from the CU 3F. Further, the CU3F adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the total prize ball number data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not add the number of game balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F and added to the number of cards held. The number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28F is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28F.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

  The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P table 2F. The “gaming table state 1”, “gaming table state 2”, “ It includes information on “game table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. A game is in progress (a state in which a fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball, and a game is being played in a state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operation handle 25F) is touched (a state in which the touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether or not all the floating balls in the game area 27F have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). If the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball firing, the P stand 2F times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. “0” indicates game ball indefinite (state where all balls are undetermined), and “1” indicates game ball definite (state where all balls are definite). Here, for example, if the P ball 2F has not been able to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball launching, it will time out and determine the game ball. Further, the P stand 2F is set in a state in which the whereabouts of the game balls are determined (game ball determination) when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3F and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. In addition, when the P platform 2F makes an addition NG response, the addition sequence number is notified without being updated. Bit 6 indicates a pressed state of the firing stop switch. When “0”, the switch is released, and when “1”, the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit 3 indicates that the game state information is changing, and “1” is set during the change. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code occurring in the P table 2F, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When it is “0”, only an alarm is issued, and when it is “1”, it indicates an alarm + output to the hall server 801F.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P stand 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko machine or a slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 4” is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition sequence number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit1 to Bit7 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. In the case of a mismatch, it is assumed that the game balls of other stores are mixed in the game balls, and Bit 0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to the CU 3F.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P device 2F. The “game information number”, “type information 1” to “type information n” , “Count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “Number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is a winning opening, “4” is the number of symbol stops, “5” is a big hit, and “6” is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of “5”, the data number is “1”, the ball is large, “2” is the ball is small, “3” is the ball, “4” to “6” It is a spare time. Further, when the data type is a small hit of “6”, the data number is a small hit when “1”, and a spare when “2” to “15”.

  “Count information 1” to “Count information n” indicate game count information 1 to game count information n, respectively.

  Here, when the data type is a start opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, the count information is information on the number of winning balls from Bit 4 to Bit 7, and the winning ball at the time of winning for each type information of game information. The numbers indicate the number of award balls when “1” to “15”. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are information on the number of wins, which indicates the number of wins (cumulative) for each type of game table information, and each of the numbers “1” to “15” represents data on the number of wins. In the count information, when the data type is the symbol stop count, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop count, and when “1” to “15”, the symbol stop count Represents. In the count information, when the data type is big hit or small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and when “1” to “15”, the number of hits is shown. It represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is a detection result of the fire strength sensor 19F. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “in-change signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278F changes as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning holes 275F, 276F, and 277F.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response to the card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU 3F.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2F when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Card ID” is identification ID information of an IC card inserted into the CU 3F, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309F (see FIG. 59) of the CU3F. The year information is 2 digits YY, the month information is 2 digits MM, and the day information is 2 digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held on the P platform 2F is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been moved to the store. The CU3F stores a store code where the CU3F is installed. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3F that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, a card or general card is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F of CU3F, or a card is notified to the P stand 2F as a card insertion notification by depositing a general 0 yen 0 coin card. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P table 2F backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a status information request including information on the status of the CU 3F being inserted into the card (Bit 0 = 1 in the CU status) is received (determined that the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F) ), The P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. When the card return button 322F of the CU 3F is pressed, a card return notification is made to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F clears information such as the backed up card ID and card insertion time.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of the card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU3F.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P platform 2F of the card return, and the CU 3F transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that the CU3F does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the currently inserted card or there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU3F is used to insert a member card, a general card, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2F backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3F at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2F clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of a communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to the CU3F.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2F is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the P base 2F and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU3F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU3F is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3F, and is arbitrary data.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3F and the P base 2F will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU3F (primary station) to the P station 2F (secondary station), and the P station 2F returns a response to the CU3F in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3F is the primary station and the P stand 2F is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P stand 2F from the CU 3F to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted at intervals of 200 ms between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25F, the P platform 2F hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27F per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2F can notify the CU 3F of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P base 2F. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3F side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3F transmits the command to the P base 2F, the same command is transmitted to the P base 2F again. Further, if no response is received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The same command is retransmitted up to 14 times on the P platform 2F. If a response is not received from the P platform 2F even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3F determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication cut off”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3F is disconnected from the connector of the P base 2F, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2F is cut off. The CU3F does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2F side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F returns a response to the CU 3F in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3F is not transmitted to the P stand 2F continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2F determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18F, and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the CU3F connector and the P-base 2F connector, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of the CU3F.

  The command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2F side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication. Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 66 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F has ended normally. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU3F is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the P base 2F stops the firing motor 18F to stop the game, and then starts communication. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2F, and requests recovery information from the P unit 2F. The P base 2F refers to the previous last transmission count serial number notified from the CU 3F and executes the count recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2F refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3F has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3F has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  In the CU3F that has received the recovery response, if the previous last transmission addition serial number process included in the recovery information has not been executed, the CU3F additional recovery process is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F and transmits recovery data to the P unit 2F. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P base 2F executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU3F counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2F receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3F has retransmitted the command. The CU 3F transmits a command, and backs up the sequence number when a response with the same sequence number is notified from the P unit 2F. When transmitting a response corresponding to the received command, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the received serial number as it is. The P base 2F backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request command to the P platform 2F with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2F returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3F as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F with a serial number “2”. The P platform 2F returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3F as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2F clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  The CU 3F counts up the serial number to “4” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2F returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “4”.

  In response to this, the CU3F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU3F counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends the response of the status information response to the CU3F with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3F shown in FIG. 67 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card return ready state = OFF to the P unit 2F before card insertion. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n and game prohibition to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, in the CU3F, when a card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information (card ID or the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in the CU3F.

  The CU3F is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the midst of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the hall server 801F, for example, holding balls, storage balls, and the remaining amount of the card. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312F and displaying on the display 54F on the P platform 2F side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312F, the status information request including the serial number = n + 1 and the card return ready state = OFF. Is sent to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU 3F. The display 54F on the P platform 2F side is controlled by the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F to display that the card is being inquired.

  After that, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3F stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2F. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325F. In response to this, the P unit 2F backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F, and a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3F. Also in CU3F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of CU control unit 323F.

  In response to this, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F, thereby notifying the P unit 2F that the card is being inserted. . The P unit 2F receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3F. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F. The P unit 2F responds with a status information response including a serial number = n + 4 and a game permission. Is returned to CU3F.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + x, a card ID, a card insertion time, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P unit 2F. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2F. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  Therefore, the P table 2F does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3F without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3F does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, the card ID is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F during the card insertion, and the illegal action such as falsification of the card ID stored in the P base 2F can be prevented, and security is improved. Can do.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing processing at the time of insertion executed by the CU 3F when a card is inserted into the CU 3F. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 68, each step of SF1 to SF7 is executed by CU3F. SF8-SF10 and SF12-SF15 are executed by the P stand 2F. More specifically, the deletion process of SF8 to SF10, SF12, SF13, and SF15 is executed by the effect control board 15F provided on the P stand 2F, and the transmission process of SF14 and SF15 is provided by the effect control unit 151F. The produced effect control board 15F transmits to the payout control unit 171F, and the payout control unit 171F transmits to the CU3F.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupt operation has been performed and a game interruption sequence has been executed. If it is suspended, it is determined by SF2 whether or not the C-ID and type of the inserted card matches the C-ID and type of the interrupted card. The inserted card is ejected and a transition is made to standby. In FIG. 68, the “type” is not shown.

  On the other hand, if the C-ID and type of the inserted card and the C-ID and type of the interrupted card match, the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine and starts the game. Therefore, the control proceeds to SF4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game by SF6 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by SF1 that it is not interrupted, it is determined at SF3a whether or not a card is already inserted. Whether or not the card is being inserted is determined based on whether or not the card reader provided in the card insertion / discharge port 309F accepts the card. If it is determined by the SF 3a that the card is not being inserted, the C-ID and type of the inserted card are stored and transmitted to the P base 2F by the SF 3. In the P stand 2F, the C-ID and type are received and stored in the received C-ID, type and backup area (for example, a backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 62). The C-ID and type are compared (SF8). Then, it is determined by SF9 whether or not the comparison results match, and if they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing is completed. .

  If it is determined by the SF 3a that the card is being inserted, in order to prevent the C-ID and type different from the C-ID and type of the card being inserted from being overwritten and stored in the CU 3F or P stand 2F, the SF 3 Skip processing in.

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (SF8, SF9) for performing the same determination processing are used. Display control means (the effect control board 15F provided with the effect control unit 151F), it is not necessary to provide the same determination processing function on the communication means side (the payout control unit 171F side). A common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, and it is possible to mass-produce small quantities of the communication means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of SF15 and SF7 as a control content of a modification. The game history data, C-ID, and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU3F and then deleted by SF15. The CU3F receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801F. The host server 801F backs up the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by SF9 that they match, the process proceeds to SF12, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is stored in the current area (for example, the backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 62). The game history data is newly updated from the game history data.

  Note that the processing of SF10, SF13, and SF14 may be performed as the control content of the modification. If YES in SF9, the control proceeds to SF10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data, the game history data, the C-ID, and the type in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted by SF13. Further, after SF12, SF14 sends a notification that the players are the same to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of SF10, SF13, SF14 and the processes of SF15, SF7.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 69, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed, the CU 3F confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54F displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3F makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3F counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Since the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 5, the number of additional balls = 175, and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 70, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  After that, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3F determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the holding balls or the storage balls is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the operation of pressing the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3F notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2F after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, the CU 3F displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P platform 2F. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU 3F. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 2, an additional ball number = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 71 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return ready state transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  In FIG. 71, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3F, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 2F. In response to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3F, the same counting sequence number m is returned from the P stand 2F. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28F. In FIG. 71, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button 28F once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3F. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F.

  When the operation of the count button 28F is detected, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350F. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350F controls the display 54F on the P platform 2F side. As a result, the display 54F displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 2, a count serial number m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the count request state of the P base 2F is OFF, since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2F transmits a second count request to the CU 3F. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3F. However, even at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the ball | bowl equivalent to the number of count balls requested | required, and updates the display of a ball | bowl to 200. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2F that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3F. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  CU3F which received this status information response determines with completion of counting. Although not shown, the CU 3F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< game ball counting (automatic counting) >>
When the store is closed, if a card is not inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F, the store clerk goes around the P stand 2F where the game ball remains and inserts a store card into one stand and performs a counting operation. It was necessary to collect the remaining game balls, and the work at the time of closing the store was complicated. In addition, if the game machine and the card unit are configured so that physical game balls are paid out as in the past, the work at the time of closing the store can be performed simply by collecting the remaining game balls and resetting the card unit. Can be done. However, in the configuration in which the P stand 2F and the CU 3F communicate with each other by performing mutual authentication as in the present embodiment to manage the game balls (game points), the remaining game balls are collected by simply resetting the card unit. It is not possible to do the work at the time of closing. Then, with reference to FIG. 72, the automatic counting process of the game ball at the time of a store closing is demonstrated.

  FIG. 72 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process that is automatically performed when the game hall is closed. First, CU3F is in a state where there is no stock card with card holding ball = 0 balls. On the other hand, the P stand 2F recognizes that a game ball = 50 balls and no card is inserted in the CU 3F. Then, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card insertion state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  When closing is set in the game hall where the CU 3F and the P stand 2F are installed, if it is determined that no card is inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F, processing described below is performed. The fact that no card is inserted can be determined from the information of the card insertion state = OFF included in the command for requesting the state information, and the fact that a game ball remains in the P stand 2F indicates that the state information response It can be determined from the information of the number of game balls included in the response = 50.

  The CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 1, a card ID = 0, and a card insertion time = 0 to the P unit 2F. That is, the P card 2F is notified that the card with card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, has been inserted into the card reader of the CU3F at the card insertion time = 0. As described above, since the virtual card is inserted into the CU 3F, it becomes unnecessary for the store clerk to go around the P table 2F where the game balls remain and insert the store card into one unit. In response to this, the P base 2F recognizes that the card has been inserted into the CU 3F, and executes the following processing. In response to this, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 1 to the CU 3F.

  Next, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F that the CU opening state is OFF. Specifically, a status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening status = OFF, card return preparation status = ON, counting sequence number = m, and counting response = OFF is transmitted to P unit 2F.

  The store closing setting in the amusement hall is, for example, that the CU control unit 323F distributes a closing command to the CU3F from the hall management computer or the hall server 801F installed in the amusement hall, for example. It is done by judging the end of business in Japan. Specifically, when a staff member closes the hall management computer or hall server 801F, a closing command for closing the shop is distributed to each CU 3F. Alternatively, the closing time may be set and stored in the hall management computer or hall server 801F, and the closing command may be automatically distributed to each CU 3F at the closing time. As another method, a sales end signal may be transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation of a business end by a store clerk, and the CU control unit 323F may determine the end of business at the game hall. As yet another method, each CU3F is provided with a clock function, and when it is a closing time (for example, 10 o'clock), a time (for example, 10:20) after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) of the closing time has elapsed. When timed by the function, control may be performed so that each CU 3F transmits a status information request including the CU opening status = OFF to the P stand 2F.

  In response to this, in the P stand 2F, the serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls at the current time = 50, the count serial number of m + 1 updated by adding “1” to the received count serial number m, the count ball number = 50 and the count request = ON A status information response including is transmitted to the CU3F. That is, since the P stand 2F requests the CU 3F to count the remaining game balls, the P ball 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 50, the count acceptance request, and the counting sequence number count up, and the last transmission count of the previous time. Back up the serial number update and counting ball request status ON information.

  CU3F which received it adds the number of count balls = 50 sent from P stand 2F to the number of balls. Note that the number of counting balls = 50 added to the number of holding balls is not fixed, and the CU 3F backs up the information of the last last transmission counting number update while keeping the current number of holding balls = 0. And CU3F returns to P stand 2F in order to notify receipt of a counting ball. Specifically, a status information request including a serial number = n + 3, a CU opening state = OFF, a card return preparation state = ON, a counting serial number = m + 1, and a counting response = ON is transmitted to the P unit 2F. The counting balls received from the P stand 2F are stored in the storage means (for example, RAM) of the CU 3F as the number of balls held by the card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, and the card insertion time = 0.

  In the P stand 2F that has received it, the number of counting balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 50−number of counting balls = 50), and the number of gaming balls = 0 is displayed. Then, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of counting balls from the number of gaming balls, and there is no remaining gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 0) and notifies the state that the counting request is unnecessary (counting request state OFF). = N + 3, Number of game balls = 0, Count sequence number = m + 1, Count ball number = 0 and Count request = OFF Sends a status information response to CU3F.

  When all the remaining game balls are counted, a process of returning the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) inserted in the CU3F is performed. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification including a serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2F in order to notify the P unit 2F that the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) has been returned. Upon receiving this, the P platform recognizes that the virtual card inserted into the CU3F has been returned, and transmits a response to the card return response including the serial number = n + 4, the card ID = 0, and the card insertion time = 0 to the CU3F.

  Next, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F that the CU state is the card insertion state = OFF. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = n + 5 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting ball number = 0 to the CU 3F.

  In this way, in the counting process at the time of closing in the game hall, the counting process is automatically performed without the store clerk inserting the card and pressing the counting button 28F, and the remaining game balls All the numbers can be collectively counted as the number of balls in the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) and stored in the storage means of the CU3F. Note that the CU3F may transmit the number of possessed balls obtained by counting the number of remaining game balls to the upper server 801F together with the identification information of the P stand 2F or the CU3F. The host server 801F stores the number of balls sent from the CU 3F for each date, P stand 2F or CU 3F, so that the balls can be returned to the player at a later date. Further, the CU 3F may transmit the card ID inserted immediately before closing the store to the upper server 801F in association with the counted number of retained balls (remaining game balls). The remaining game balls are likely to be game balls of the player with the card ID that was inserted immediately before closing the store, so it is possible to reduce the work of identifying the owner of the counted number of balls. Returning the number of held balls to the player can be performed more easily.

  In the above-described embodiment, the store closing process when the card is not inserted and the game ball remains in the P stand 2F has been described. However, the store closing process when the card is inserted is described later as “game ball counting ( The same processing as the processing of “card return)” (see FIG. 73) is executed. However, regarding the counting process of the remaining game balls, the store clerk may perform the counting process by depressing the counting button 28F, or may automatically perform the counting process by the closing setting. In any case, when a card is inserted, the card is returned by the closing process and is in a waiting state for removal, so the store clerk needs to collect the card.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 73 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 73, the number of card possessions specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of game balls is 800. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, when the player presses the “return card” button, the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls, and the CU 3F determines that the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is not zero. Further, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU3F sets the card return ready state = ON, and the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. Note that the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2F determines that the counting operation for pressing the counting button 28F is a counting operation with the card return ready state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU3F of a counting acceptance number of 800 balls, and a counting acceptance number request for 800 gaming balls, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, a gaming ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a count request message, the P unit 2F counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the counted number of 800 balls to the number of held balls, and subtracts the counted number of 800 balls from the gaming ball number of 800 balls to 0 balls. Further, the CU3F backs up the updated data of the last transmission count sequence number last time. Then, in order to notify the receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3F sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU store opening state = ON, card return ready state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F subtracts the counting ball number 800 from the gaming ball number 800 and displays the gaming ball number 0 on the display 54F or the like. Further, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F that the number of game balls is 0 and counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to the CU3F. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  The CU3F counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28F and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17F, and the card insertion time to the CU 3F. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3F, the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3F performs a match determination between the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P stand 2F, and if it matches, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player starts the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in the CU3F Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU3F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3F can be removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309F (card removal possible state). The CU 3F is attached with a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, the card is determined to be ready for card removal. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  When the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2F displays “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. Further, in order to notify the card removal, the P base 2F may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” with the speaker 270F. Further, the P stand 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 4, a game ball number = 0, a count serial number = m + 1, a count ball number = 0, and a count response = OFF to the CU 3F.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is in the ON state, the CU 3F transmits a command for requesting the state information including “waiting for card removal = ON” to the P base 2F. However, when the player removes the card from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is turned off, so the CU3F is waiting for the serial number = n + 5 and card removal = OFF A command for requesting the status information including is transmitted to the P base 2F.

  In response to this, the P base 2F stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278F, and terminates the card removal notification. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Further, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3F.

  Note that the sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 73 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal Sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and a status information request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2F is turned OFF and then turned ON again), and the status information request has not arrived (a command has not reached the P base 2F from the CU 3F) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 74, before the power interruption occurs during the game, CU 3F transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2F. In response to this, in order to notify the game machine information CU3F, the P machine 2F transmits a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU3F. . The P table 2F updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3F receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2F during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. Thereafter, since the status information response from the P stand 2F is not transmitted, the CU 3F performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F until the power is cut off, the game is continued in the P table 2F and the game table information is changed, the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P base 2F is restored, and the P base 2F starts to operate. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission serial number = n, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, whether or not the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Determine whether. If they match, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU 3F. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU3F side based on the game information to be played. For this reason, in this case, the P table 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) to the CU 3F as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game table information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the CU3F has not reached the CU3F, in such a case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game table information A recovery response (sequence number = 1) including game information is returned to the CU3F. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  In FIG. 74, CU3F does not store the game information included in the recovery response, and therefore does not perform the addition recovery process. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since no game information is stored, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Upon receiving this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (b).

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information response has not yet reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the status information response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (the command has not reached the CU 3F from the P stand 2F) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 75, after a power failure occurs during the game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2F to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued on the P stand 2F, and the game stand information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game stand information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, in the CU3F, since the power is cut off, the inserted card is forcibly ejected and returned to the player. At that time, the number of balls currently held is stored in the card and discharged. If the number of possessed balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU or the like, the hall server 801F that regularly receives the number of retained balls from the CU 3F (for example, every 5 seconds) and stores it in a backup manner. The loss may be compensated for by the player based on the stored data (the number of balls). Thereafter, the power failure of the CU3F is restored and the CU3F is turned on and starts operating. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the previous last transmission serial number = n−1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P unit 2F compares and determines the previous last transmission sequence number = n−1 of the received recovery request and the last final transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). . As a result, since they do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power interruption has not reached the CU 3F. Therefore, the P stand 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the game information storage presence (specifically, the previous game stand information exists) to the CU 3F, assuming that the game information has not been notified to the CU 3F. To do. That is, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous game table information, are included in the recovery response and transmitted to the CU 3F. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU 3F executes a recovery process based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the communication line disconnection is detected, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. For this reason, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3F executes the first check process before transmitting this communication start request. In the first check process, whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value by the CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response Is checked. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F transmits a communication start request including a serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, in the P stand 2F, unreported game stand information (game balls = 450, added balls = 6, subtracted balls) included in the status information response that did not reach the CU 3F before the power failure occurred. = 36) is notified to the CU 3F by a status information response, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (b).

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response or not Is determined by the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F, and the insertion time of the card inserted at the start of the game before the power interruption occurs is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the stored card insertion time and recovery are stored. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F may determine whether or not the card insertion times included in the response match and match. In this case, it is determined that both match, and if there is no addition recovery, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of the member card that identifies the individual player of the member but also the card ID of the visitor card used by the player who visited the store as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used for an unspecified player and does not specify a specific player individual. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line disconnection and the player who intends to play the game after the power interruption is restored are the same player. It can be specified whether or not, but it cannot be specified to which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above “player identification information” is not limited to identifying a specific individual player, and the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line interruption and the game after the power interruption recovery is performed. It is a broad concept that includes information that can be used to determine the identity of the player who is trying to correct.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, another recovery process of the number of game balls when the status information response is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the status information response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power outage / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of CU3F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (a command has not arrived from P stand 2F to CU3F) The sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process in case the communication partners after a mismatch do not correspond is shown. This power OFF / ON can also be turned OFF / ON, for example, by failure of the CU3F, or by manually turning the power OFF / ON, or by removing / inserting the CU3F from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 76, after a power failure occurs during a game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2F to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued on the P stand 2F, and the game stand information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game stand information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, in the CU3F, since the power is cut off, the inserted card is forcibly ejected and returned to the player. Thereafter, the power failure of the CU3F is restored and the power is turned on, and the CU3F is replaced and a new CU3F starts operation.

  In addition, when CU3F which was operating before CU exchange has memorized the number of balls, the number of balls may be stored in another card (for example, a card inside the CU) and discharged. At that time, if the number of balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls is received regularly from the CU3F (for example, every 5 seconds) and stored in a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the data stored in the server 801F (the number of balls).

  When the exchanged CU3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F. Is done. The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. However, since CU3F has been exchanged, it does not have the last transmission serial number of the previous time. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P base 2F compares and determines the previous last transmission serial number = 0 transmitted from the CU 3F after the exchange and the last final transmission serial number = n backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). To do. As a result, since the two do not match, the game information stored in the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F in order to perform the recovery process. Specifically, the P-base 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including game information storage presence to the CU 3F as having game information to perform recovery processing for the exchanged CU 3F. The recovery information notified to the CU3F by this recovery response includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n, the card ID of the inserted card, the card insertion time, the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m as the previous game table information, and the previous game table information. It is included. The previous game table information includes the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F transmits a communication start request including a serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. Note that the CU3F performs recovery processing (game balls = 480, added balls total = + 3, subtracted balls total = + 23) using the previous game table information received from the P table 2F, and sets the previous last transmission serial number. Update and back up the data, card ID, and card insertion time. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. Upon receiving a status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3F waits for insertion of a card that was being inserted last time or waits for a store clerk remote control operation (game ball count). When a card is inserted in this state, the CU 3F reads the ID of the inserted card with a card reader / writer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read card ID matches the recovery card ID stored based on the recovery response (the card ID of the previously inserted card). If it is determined that they match, the store clerk waits for a remote control operation to resume the game. If there is a remote control operation, a card insertion notification command including the store code and SC board ID is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. The P unit 2F backs up the store code and SC board ID data received at the time of the previous card insertion before communication interruption to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F, and the backed up data and the CU3F are transmitted. The store code and the SC board ID are compared to determine whether or not they match. If they match, the game can be resumed. Note that the card insertion notification command including the store code and the SC board ID may be transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F without waiting for the remote control operation. If they do not match, error processing such as invalidating the number of game balls in the P platform 2F is performed, for example. Alternatively, an error notification may be made instead of or in addition to this. Further, it may be controlled to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (b).

<< Abnormal sequence 4 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the addition request has not yet reached (the command for addition request from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F has not reached) due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 77, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the status information request command, the P stand 2F is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request to the P platform 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Here, the last last transmission addition serial number = m is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. The CU3F has a larger value (newer) than the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the backup CU3F compared to the final transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of the P unit 2F (mismatch) Then, it is determined that the previous status information request command has not been reached, and the addition recovery process is performed.

  As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2F.

  The P base 2F performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. At this timing, an addition process that has not been realized due to power-off is realized, and the number of game balls matches on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. Further, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response 2 to the CU 3F indicating that the addition processing is OK (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU3F receiving it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F. In addition, the CU 3F transmits a status information request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (b).

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 5 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached due to power-off or communication line disconnection (the response of the addition response from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 78, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, the P stand 2F cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3F. In order for the P platform 2F to detect the disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3F for one second or longer is required.

  Therefore, in the P stand 2F, without knowing that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped, a command for requesting the status information of the CU 3F is received, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number. Response of the status information response including = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. However, the response of the status information response returned to the CU3F is not reached to the CU3F because the operation of the CU3F is stopped. The P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3F, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the updated data and the number of game balls = 175.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time in the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F, the CU3F performs the addition recovery. Clear the addition request state without requesting processing. In addition, the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The CU3F has a matching card ID and card insertion time, and depends on whether or not the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F. In addition, an addition recovery process determination as to whether or not to perform an addition recovery process is performed. In the addition recovery process determination, when the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F. Therefore, it is determined that the addition recovery process is not performed, and it is determined that the addition recovery process is performed otherwise.

  When the CU 3F basically determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, the CU 3F does not transmit the command of the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. However, although the CU 3F determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, if the recovery request 2 command is erroneously transmitted to the P unit 2F, the recovery process is performed. There is an inconvenience of being changed to a different number of game balls.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F after the determination of the addition recovery process determination, the P unit 2F includes the previous last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery request 2 command. Then, it is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number stored in the P base 2F matches, and it is determined again whether or not the addition recovery processing is performed.

  Specifically, the CU 3F transmits the command of the recovery request 2 including the serial number = 2, the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1, and the number of additional balls = 125 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F adds the previous final transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 included in the command of the recovery request 2 of the CU3F and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the P unit 2F. It is determined that the recovery process is not performed, and the information of the process NG is notified to the CU3F. Therefore, the P platform 2F transmits a recovery response 2 including a serial number = 2 and a processing result = processing NG to the CU 3F.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal Sequence 6 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached due to power-off or communication line disconnection (the response of the addition response from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 79, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, the P stand 2F cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3F. In order for the P platform 2F to detect the disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3F for one second or longer is required.

  Therefore, the P base 2F receives the CU3F status information request command and processes the addition request without knowing that the operation of the CU3F is stopped. However, for some reason (for example, the number of game balls has reached the upper limit), a situation in which game balls cannot be added occurs. In this case, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. However, the response of the status information response returned to the CU3F is not reached to the CU3F because the operation of the CU3F is stopped. In addition, since the game ball addition abnormality has occurred in the P stand 2F, the addition ball from the CU 3F cannot be processed, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m is not updated.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. In addition, in P stand 2F, it is in the state of game ball addition abnormality. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time in the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of the P unit 2F does not match the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F, the CU3F performs addition recovery. Request processing. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 including the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 and the number of added balls = 125 to the P unit 2F.

  In response to this, the P stand 2F notifies the recovery response 2 that the game ball addition is not processed (game ball addition NG) due to the game ball addition abnormality. The recovery response 2 includes recovery result = processing NG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response 2 including the recovery result = processing NG, the CU 3F clears the game ball addition request state and turns it off, and performs a third check described later. Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  Further, since the CU3F is in the OFF state after the game ball addition request state is cleared, state information including the game ball addition request = OFF and the addition serial number = m + 1 without notifying the P stand 2F again of the addition request. The request is transmitted to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the current number of game balls = 50 without adding if the number of balls to be added = 125 of the recovery request 2 cannot be added to the number of game balls = 50 due to an abnormal addition state. To do. Specifically, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the number of game balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. The addition serial number remains “m” without being updated to “m + 1” transmitted in the status information request because the game ball addition result is NG. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (b). The CU 3F performs a process of canceling the determined consumption of the stored balls based on the information of the current number of game balls = 50 included in the state information response transmitted from the P stand 2F.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 7 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request has not been reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition request has not yet reached due to power interruption or communication line disconnection (addition request command from CU3F to P stand 2F has not arrived) and the communication counterpart after the restoration is inconsistent The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 80, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the status information request command, the P stand 2F is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F is replaced and the new P base 2F starts operating. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained. Note that the CU 3F performs addition recovery even when the P stand 2F is replaced.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request to the P platform 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. However, since the P base 2F is newly exchanged, the previous last transmission addition serial number is not backed up, and the initial value “0” is transmitted to the CU 3F.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. When the last transmission addition sequence number = 0 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F does not match the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F being backed up, the CU3F has not received a previous status information request command. It is determined that it has been reached, and addition recovery processing is performed. As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2F.

  The P base 2F performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. Further, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response 2 to the CU 3F indicating that the addition processing is OK (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU3F receiving it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F. In addition, the CU 3F transmits a status information request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (b).

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 8 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls when the count response is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the count response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the counting response command from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 81, the initial number of balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU 3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the number of balls to the number of balls and sets the number of balls to 100, updates the last transmission count sequence number last time, and backs up the updated data. However, after receiving the status information request command, the P platform 2F stops operating due to power failure. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1, a count serial number = m + 1, and a count response = ON from the CU 3F. That is, in the P base 2F, the count response from the CU 3F has not reached yet.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m + 1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Therefore, it can be determined that the state information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the communication interruption has reached the CU3F. In this case, the P stand 2F executes a process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2F is updated from the number of game balls = 500 to the number of game balls = 400 at this time. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 400) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3 and number of game balls = 400. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (b).

<< Abnormal system 9 >>
Next, a recovery process for the number of counting balls when the count request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and a count request command from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting request is not reached (the counting request command from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) due to power-off or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 82, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU 3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  However, before the CU3F receives the status information response command, the power is cut off and the operation stops. In other words, the CU 3F has not yet reached the counting request from the P platform 2F. Thereafter, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, the previous last transmission count sequence number = m of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Since there is no (mismatch), it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU3F before the communication disconnection has not reached the CU3F. In this case, the P stand 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2F cancels the count request transmitted immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption, and maintains the number of game balls = 500 at this time. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Receiving it, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (b).

<< Abnormal Sequence 10 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the count response from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the counting response command from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 83, the initial number of balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, the counting serial number m + 1, and the counting request = ON to the CU3F. . The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU3F executes a process of adding the counted number of balls to the number of possessed balls, but some abnormality occurs and the addition process cannot be performed. For this reason, a command for requesting status information including a count sequence number = m and a count response = OFF (because of an abnormal count state) is transmitted from the CU 3F. However, after receiving the status information request command, the P platform 2F has stopped operating due to power failure. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F. That is, in the P base 2F, the count response from the CU 3F has not reached yet.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P table 2F is the last recovery count sequence number of the received recovery request = m (“m” is not updated due to a count error) and inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Since the last transmission count sequence number that was backed up last time = m + 1 does not match (disagreement), the state information response that was last transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F before the communication disconnection has not reached the CU3F. I can judge. In this case, the P stand 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, turns off the count request state, and decreases the last transmission count sequence number by 1 (−1). At this time, the P stand 2F cancels the count request before the occurrence of the power interruption and maintains the number of game balls = 500. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Receiving it, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (b).

<< Addition request error >>
Next, processing for abnormal addition request will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of processing when the game ball addition result is abnormal at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. In particular, there is shown a sequence diagram for explaining the processing when the addition result of game balls at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout is abnormal.

  In FIG. 84, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, the CU3F confirms the consumption of the holding balls / storing balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Then, the information (addition number of balls = 125 balls) of converting the possession balls / storage balls into game balls is notified. At that time, the CU 3F backs up the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of add balls) = 175, the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2F. Therefore, upon receiving the CU3F status information request command, the P stand 2F sets the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number information.

  The CU3F that received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG receives the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. Resend to the base 2F. The CU3F retransmits the status information request command, but the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 1 to n + 2, and the additional serial number remains m + 1 and the status information request command is retransmitted.

  However, the P stand 2F remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command of the CU 3F, the P stand 2F receives a serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to the CU3F.

  Further, the CU3F that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the status information request including the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The command is retransmitted for the second time to P platform 2F. Note that the CU3F retransmits the status information request command, but the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 2 to n + 3, and the status information request command is retransmitted while the addition sequence number remains m + 1.

  The P stand 2F still remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F receives the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to the CU3F.

  CU3F is a process of adding a game ball in the P stand 2F when receiving a response of a response of a state information response including a game ball addition result = NG even if the state information request command is retransmitted twice. As a result, it becomes a state of waiting for addition abnormality recovery.

  After the addition abnormality is restored in the P unit 2F, the CU 3F retransmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + X, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. . In P 2F, since the addition abnormality has been recovered, the addition processing to the game balls is performed and the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the addition of game balls) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175. The last transmission addition serial number is updated and the data is backed up.

  After the addition process to the game balls is performed, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1, and the game ball addition result = OK to the CU 3F. In response to this, the CU 3F turns off the addition request state.

<Operation related to addition serial number>
FIG. 85 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P stand 2F and the CU 3F regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an additional serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 85 is transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and an additional serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The P table 2F that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received electronic message as shown in (2).

  The CU 3F that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, addition sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. The P table 2F that has received the message (3) returns the message (4) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message.

  In this way, every time a message is received from the P platform 2F, the CU 3F updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2F does not update the normal serial number. Further, unless an addition request is generated, the addition sequence number is not updated.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a withdrawal operation for a storage ball) occurs, a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F (normal serial number n + 2). , Addition serial number m + 1). This request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3F has already confirmed the processing for the addition request (card balance withdrawal or savings withdrawal).

  The P base 2F receives the request message (5) and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that one addition serial number has been updated from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed, for example, by the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171F determines whether or not processing for adding game balls is possible on the P stand 2F side. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached a predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (6) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (6). The normal serial number is n + 2 included in the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU3F includes an area for backup storage of the added serial number included in the immediately previous transmission message, and an area for backup storage of the normal sequence number included in the reception message. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the message (6) compares the addition sequence number stored in the backup with the addition sequence number included in the message (6). As a result, if the stored addition sequence number is the same as the addition sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted addition serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (5) 'in FIG. 85 shows a case where the request message has not reached the P platform 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2F waits for a telegram arrival from the CU 3F, no telegram is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The CU 3F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the request message (5) ', and retransmits the same request message (5) "because there is no response from the P-unit 2F.

<Operation related to counting serial number>
FIG. 86 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2F and CU3F relating to the counting sequence number. When no counting request is generated, a message including a normal serial number and a counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 86 is transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and a counting serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The P table 2F that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and counting serial number m as the received electronic message, as shown in (2).

  The CU 3F that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, count sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. In this way, every time a message is received from the P platform 2F, the CU 3F updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2F does not update the normal serial number. Further, the counting sequence number is not updated unless a counting request is generated.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) occurs, the request message of (4) in which one counting sequence number is updated is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F (normal sequence number n + 1, count sequence number m + 1). ). This request message includes data in which the count request bit is turned ON. Note that the P platform 2F does not execute the counting process at this stage.

  The P table 2F receives the request message (4) and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting sequence number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current counting request. This determination is performed, for example, by the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F determines whether or not a counting process (addition process for holding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, a case where the process using a holding ball (such as a wagon service) is in progress.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (5) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (4). The normal serial number is updated from the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P base 2F has an area for backup storage of the counting sequence number and the normal sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F that has received the message (5) compares and determines the count sequence number stored in the backup and the count sequence number included in the message (5). As a result, if the stored counting sequence number is the same as the counting sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, if the transmitted counting sequence number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (4) 'in FIG. 86 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, the CU 3F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message (3), and retransmits the same message (3) because there is no response from the P platform 2F. The P base 2F that has received the retransmitted message (3) has the normal sequence number included in the message n + 1, and the normal sequence number is transmitted even though the request message (4) ′ has been transmitted first. Therefore, it is determined that the request message (4) ′ has not arrived. Then, the P platform 2F retransmits the same request message (4) ″ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request sequence number (additional sequence number, counting sequence number) different from the normal sequence number is included in the message and transmitted. These request serial numbers are added and updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and otherwise, the addition and update are not performed even if a message is transmitted / received.

  In contrast, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is transmitted from the CU 3F regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated by both the CU 3F and the P unit 2F). You may act.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party can be determined using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but is the received message an acknowledgment message indicating request acceptance? It cannot be specified whether the message is a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, a request message with an updated request sequence number is transmitted using a request sequence number such as an addition sequence number or a counting sequence number as in this embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response to this request message If a message containing the same request serial number is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party, but whether the message returned from the other party is an acceptance message. Can be specified. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. It is possible to identify whether the message is a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, the update value for the request sequence number when a request is generated is +1. However, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, and -2 are adopted. May be.

<First to third check processing>
Next, the first check process, the second check process, and the third check process executed by the CU control unit 323F will be described based on FIGS. 87 (a), 87 (b), and 88. FIG.

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 300, it is determined whether or not game table information is stored. This is to determine whether or not the game table information is included in the recovery response transmitted from the P table 2F. In the case of FIGS. 75 and 76 described above, the game table information (specifically, Since the previous game table information) is included, the SF 300 makes a determination of YES. If it is determined that the game table information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that game table information is stored, control proceeds to SF 301, and the number of additional balls included in the received game table information (specifically, previous game table information) is a predetermined threshold value. A determination is made whether N1 or greater. This threshold value N1 is the maximum number of game balls to be added during a period (200 ms) between the status information request and the status information response between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of big hit) It is set to a value (for example, 125) that is slightly larger than (Equation 120). Therefore, in the normal case, the received number of added balls should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, when the number of additional balls is larger than the threshold value N1, game table information including the number of additional balls and the number of game balls that have been illegally increased due to fraud etc. being performed on the P unit 2F while offline is a recovery response. May be transmitted to the CU3F. In that case, the control proceeds to SF 304 and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and control is performed to transmit an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall server 801F. (In this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to SF305, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 66).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing of SF301 and SF303, the information stored on the CU3F side is that the cause is that the CU3F or the P stand 2F is replaced with a new one after communication disconnection, and then the communication is restored. And the information transmitted from the P platform 2F during the recovery process may be completely different. Even though it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be determined that there is an abnormality, and for this reason, it is possible to cancel the reset waiting state by operating the remote control by the game hall staff, and intervene by human judgment by the game hall staff So that they can respond normally.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined by SF301, the control proceeds to SF302, and the number of added balls received from the P units is added to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323F and the number of subtracted balls is set. An operation for subtracting and calculating R1 as the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the game table information received from the P table 2F is appropriate, the latest number of game balls R1 is calculated using the added number of balls and the number of subtracted balls. It is calculated. Next, in SF303, the calculated R1-absolute value of the received game balls, that is, the difference between R1 and the received game balls is calculated, and whether or not the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. Judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to SF304 and thereafter as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F.

  Next, the second check process will be described with reference to FIG. The number of balls to be added in the game table information (specifically, the current game table information) included in the status information response from the P table 2F returned in response to the status information request immediately after the communication start response is determined in advance. The SF 310 determines whether or not the threshold value N3 is greater than or equal to the threshold value N3. The number of added balls received is the time from when the P unit last transmits a status information response to the CU3F until the P unit loses power or until the P unit detects a communication line disconnection and the game stops. The number of added balls that fluctuated in (5) is such that the amount of change in the number of added balls within a relatively short limited period of time is not so large, but within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is determined as the threshold value N3. When the received number of added balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to SF314, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312F, and an error occurs in the hall server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to SF315, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 66).

  On the other hand, if NO is determined by SF310, the control proceeds to SF311 and the received number of added balls is added to the number of game balls stored in CU control unit 323F and the received number of subtracted balls is subtracted. Thus, an operation for calculating R2 is performed. Note that the “number of game balls stored” here is the number of game balls received from the P stand 2F when NO is determined in SF303, as described above. Then, SF 312 determines whether or not the difference between R2 and the number of game balls received from P stand 2F is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N4. Originally, R2 and the received number of game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N4, there is a risk of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to SF314 and subsequent steps as described above.

  If NO is determined in SF 312, the control proceeds to SF 313, and the CU control unit 323 F stores the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 F as the initial number of game balls, and then performs the second check process. Control ends.

  After the processing of SF 313 is performed, normal status information requests and status information responses are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F uses the SF 313 to set initial values. Using the number of game balls stored as the number of game balls as an initial value, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from the P unit 2F based on the current number of game balls It is determined whether or not the difference from the number of game balls coming exceeds a predetermined number of error balls (for example, 5). If it exceeds, an abnormality is determined, and the above-described SF 304, SF 305, SF 314, SF 315 The same control is performed.

  Next, the control of the third check process will be described based on FIG. The CU control unit 323F executes the third check process immediately after receiving the recovery response 2 from the P platform 2F (see FIGS. 77, 79, and 80).

  As described above, the recovery request 2 and the recovery response 2 are the game balls in which the P unit 2F complies with the game ball addition request even though the CU 3F outputs a request for adding the number of game balls to the P unit 2F. This is for performing recovery of the number of game balls when the addition process is not performed. Then, the recovery result 2 is sent from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F to notify the processing result as to whether or not the addition recovery processing has been normally performed. The CU control unit 323F uses the SF 320 to determine whether the recovery result is processing NG. If processing NG, that is, addition recovery is not performed normally, control proceeds to SF324, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and an error has occurred in the hall server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to that effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control proceeds to SF325, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 66).

  On the other hand, if the recovery result is processing OK, the control proceeds to SF321, and the CU control unit 323F performs a process of adding the number of added balls transmitted to the P unit 2F to the number of game balls currently stored. . This is because the addition recovery for the number of added balls in the game ball addition request output by the CU3F has been normally performed in the P unit 2F, and the added number of balls is added to the number of game balls and the current normal game ball This is a process for calculating the number.

  Next, the control advances to SF322, and an operation of calculating R3 by adding the added ball number transmitted from the P unit 2F to the added game ball number and subtracting the subtracted ball number is performed. The number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are game table information (specifically, previous game table information) transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response, and the previous game table information is included in the recovery response. When there is no ball, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are both zero, and as a result, the number of game balls after addition = R3 is calculated.

  Next, SF 323 determines whether or not the difference between the calculated R3 and the number of game balls received by CU3F is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value N2. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and the control proceeds to SF324 and subsequent steps as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the CU control unit 323F.

  As described above, the previous gaming machine information is transmitted as gaming machine information first from the P machine 2F to the CU 3F, and then the gaming machine information is transmitted this time, so that both gaming machine information can be distinguished on the CU 3F side. Since it is transmitted, the CU control unit 323F can determine the suitability of each of the game machine information. As a result, for example, the number of game balls in the previous game table information sent from the P table 2F should not be significantly different from the number of game balls stored at the present time by the CU control unit 323F. The game ball number data in the current game table data sent thereafter, for example, should not be very different from the game ball number data in the previous game table information received by the CU3F. If there is a large gap in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is illegally inflated.

  If the total data obtained by adding the previous game machine data and the current game data is collectively transmitted from the P machine 2F to the CU 3F, compared to the case where the previous game machine data and the current game machine data are individually determined. Therefore, it is only possible to roughly discriminate, and accordingly it is difficult to discriminate fraud. In order to prevent such inconvenience, the game table data is transmitted in two stages so that the CU control unit 323F can distinguish between the two types of data, making it possible to perform detailed abnormality determination for each game table data. It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the third check process described above, after determining whether or not the number of balls to be added is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of balls to be added when it is appropriate. The number of game balls is compared with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2F to determine whether or not the number of game balls transmitted is appropriate, but it is simply transmitted from the P unit 2F. The number of game balls may be compared with the number of game balls stored in the CU3F, and the suitability may be determined.

  Further, the CU 3F stores the final number of game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as “CU game ball number”) and the number of game balls in the previous game table information received from the P unit 2F (hereinafter referred to as “P The number of game balls in the latest game table received from the P table 2F (hereinafter referred to as the “P game latest game ball number”) is compared and determined by the three parties. You may make it perform determination. As a specific example of comparison between the three players, the number of CU gaming balls and the number of previous P balls are compared and determined. If correct, the previous number of P balls and the number of latest P balls are compared and determined. To do. Alternatively, the number of CU game balls and the number of previous P game balls are compared and determined, and if they are correct, the number of CU game balls and the latest number of P game balls are compared and determined. Furthermore, the P number of the previous game balls and the P number of the latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if they are correct, the CU game ball number and the P number of previous game balls are compared and determined. The latest number of game balls is compared and determined.

  The first check process to the third check process are preferably executed when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is not exchanged (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication disconnection, the number of game balls on the CU side and the P stand side is generally greatly different in the recovery process. This is because an error is determined as a result of the check process to the third check process. Therefore, when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is exchanged after the communication is cut off, the first check process to the third check process may be controlled not to be performed in the recovery process when the communication is restored. Specifically, when the difference between the last last transmission sequence number transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response and the last latest transmission sequence number stored in the CU control unit 323F is 2 or more, the CU 3F or the P unit 2F The CU control unit 323F determines that it has been replaced, and controls so that the CU control unit 323F does not perform the first check process to the third check process.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is exchanged, control may be performed so that the previous game stand data and the current play stand data are not checked at the CU 3F side at the time of recovery. In this way, it is possible to prevent annoyance in which a check abnormality determination due to replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F occurs.

<Operation related to request serial number>
Next, the serial number update method described in the communication sequence shown in FIGS. 64 to 86 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this method. For example, a serial number updating method as described below may be applied to the communication sequences shown in FIGS.

<< Update both serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 89 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2F and the CU 3F related to the request sequence numbers. One of the A device and the B device shown in FIG. 89 is a P stand 2F, and the other is a CU3F. A device that generates a request to the other party is an A device, and a device that receives a request from the A device is a B device.

  When A device is CU3F and B device is P stand 2F, the request sequence number is an addition sequence number, and the request is a game ball addition request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  When the A device is the P stand 2F and the B device is the CU3F, the request sequence number is a count sequence number, and the request is a game ball count request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  Here, both cases will be conceptualized and described. While there is no request for the B device, the A device transmits a message in which the request serial number m is not updated as shown in (1). However, the normal serial number n is updated every time a message is transmitted. The device B receives this and returns a message as shown in (2). In this message, the normal serial number is updated to n + 1. However, the request sequence number is not updated as m.

  While the request is not generated in the device A, as shown in (1) and (2), both of them transmit a message while updating the normal serial number. During this time, it is determined whether or not the message transmitted immediately before has reached the partner by looking at the normal serial number included in the message received from the partner.

  When a request is generated in the A device, the A device updates the request sequence number to m + 1, and transmits a request message including the updated request sequence number m + 1 to the B device as shown in (3). At this time, the normal serial number is also updated to n + 2. The request message includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) is turned ON.

  The B device that has received the request message including the request sequence number m + 1 determines whether or not to accept the request. For example, if it is a counting request, it is determined whether or not the process of adding balls is possible on the CU3F side. Or if it is an addition request | requirement, it will be determined whether the process which adds a game ball in the P stand 2F side is possible. The case where the addition processing of the holding balls is not possible is, for example, the case where the processing using the holding balls (such as a wagon service) is in progress. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  When accepting the request, as described above in (4), an acknowledgment message with the request serial number updated to m + 2 is transmitted to the A device. On the other hand, when rejecting the request, as described below in (4), a rejection message (also referred to as a rejection message; the same applies hereinafter) that has not been updated with the request sequence number being m + 1 is sent to the A device. Send. The normal serial number is updated to n + 3 in any case.

  The A device includes storage means for storing the request sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. The device A that has received the message (4) compares and determines the request sequence number stored in the storage means and the request sequence number included in the message (4). As a result, if the stored request sequence number is the same as the request sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected. On the other hand, if the value obtained by adding a predetermined number (1 in this example) to the stored request sequence number and the request sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (m + 2 in this example) (in other words, If the request sequence number that has been transmitted is advanced by one), it is determined that the request has been accepted. If it is determined that the request has been accepted, the request sequence number is further updated by one, and a message including a specific request value (the number of counting balls or the number of additional balls) is transmitted to the B device. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request has been rejected, a message including the received request sequence number is transmitted to the B device.

  FIG. 89 (3) ′ shows a case where the request message (3) does not reach the device B due to noise or other factors. In this case, the device B determines that there is no response when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 200 ms) has elapsed since the transmission of the message (2), and retransmits the message (2). As a result, the message (2) arrives at the A device that transmitted (3) '. Then, although the device A has transmitted the request message of the request sequence number m + 1, the request sequence number of the reply message to this does not correspond to either request acceptance or request rejection (from the request sequence number included in the request message). Since the request serial number is delayed), it is determined that the request message has not arrived. Such a determination can also be made using a normal serial number. That is, the normal sequence number included in the request sequence number is n + 3, whereas the normal sequence number included in the reply message is n + 2, and it can be determined that the request message has not been reached based on such a situation.

  When it is determined that the request message has not arrived, the device A retransmits the request message (3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request serial number is included in a message and transmitted separately from a normal serial number. The request sequence number is updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and the update is stopped when the request operation ends or when the request is rejected. In other periods, the message is not updated even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is exchanged regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated only on one of the A device and the B device, The other may perform the operation of returning the serial number received from the other party as it is.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, it is possible to determine whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but the received message is an acceptance message indicating the request acceptance. Or a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, when the request sequence number is used as in this embodiment, not only whether the requested request message has arrived at the other party, but also the message returned from the other party is accepted by the request sequence number. It is possible to specify whether it is a message or a rejection message. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. Or a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

<< Update only one of serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the operations of the P base 2F and the CU 3F regarding the normal serial number and the requested serial number. This modification differs from the example shown in FIG. 89 in that the normal sequence number is not updated when the requested sequence number is updated.

  That is, in this modified example, when a request is not generated between the normal serial number and the request serial number, only the normal serial number is updated and the message is exchanged. However, when a request occurs, the normal sequence number update is stopped and only the requested sequence number is updated. Thereafter, when a series of processing for the request ends or when a rejection message for the request is transmitted, the update of the request sequence number is stopped, and the update of the normal sequence number is started instead.

  For this reason, in the exchange of messages before the occurrence of the request shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 90, the normal sequence number is updated to n and n + 1, while the request sequence number m is not updated. However, in the request message (3) transmitted when a request is generated, the normal sequence number remains n + 1 and is not updated, while the request sequence number is updated to m + 1. Similarly, neither the acceptance message nor the rejection message (4) for the request message is updated with the normal serial number kept at n + 1.

  Even in this case, the device A that has received the message (4) can determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message by determining the request sequence number included in the message.

  In addition, as shown in (3) ′, even when the request message does not reach the B device and the message (2) is retransmitted from the B device, the A device receives the request message based on the request sequence number. You can determine that you did not.

  As in this modification, even if the update of the normal sequence number is stopped from when the request occurs until the processing for the request is completed, there is no problem because the request sequence number takes over the function of the normal sequence number during that time. Does not occur. In addition, there is also an effect that processing for updating the normal serial number or collating the normal serial number is unnecessary during that time.

<Encryption key used for communication between key management server and communication control IC>
Next, an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining an encryption key used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF. First, encryption keys used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF mainly include a board shipment key, a board initial key, a board authentication key, a main authentication key, a temporary authentication key, and an effective key (commercial). , Communication key 1 (session key) and communication key 2 (session key). The board shipment key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is used only for encryption of a communication test message before shipment. The board initial key is used for communication of the CU control unit-SC, and is received by the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. Authentication communication (substrate initial key mode) using the substrate initial key is permitted (timed operation) only for a limited period. Here, in the board initial key mode, as described above, it is necessary to communicate normally with the hall server at least once to acquire the board initial key, and thus security is ensured.

  Here, the “limited period” is a limited period of two days, for example. In this way, by enabling timed operation, even if the key cannot be exchanged with the key management server immediately after the system is installed in the hall, the hall will start operating immediately after the system is installed. It becomes possible. In addition, as a limited period, you may set the period defined in one day, for example to every morning from 9:00 to 17:00.

  The above-described board initial key mode has a restriction that enables authentication communication using the board initial key for a limited period of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of money that can be used ( Card balance or cash) may be limited. Alternatively, when the number of symbol variations in the variable display device reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. Alternatively, when the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. In addition, it may be possible to allow only a game by inserting cash and prevent a game using the remaining card amount, or to limit the game to a game using a holding ball.

  The board authentication key is an encryption key that is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC and is received as part of the board security information from the key management server. By performing authentication communication using the board authentication key, the communication mode (board authentication key mode) is switched from the timed operation using the board initial key to the permanent operation (normal operation). This board authentication key is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit and the RAM of the SC.

  For both the timed operation using the board initial key and the permanent operation using the board authentication key, the CU control unit 323F receives the valid key stored in the hall server, and the SC 325bF receives the valid key as the communication control IC 325aF. This is realized by enabling communication between the P platform and the CU.

  This authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, is generated by the SC 325bF from the update information received from the key management server, and is stored in the RAM of the SC 325bF. The communication control IC 325aF is also similar to the SC 325bF. Are generated from the update information and stored in the RAM of the communication control IC 325aF. Note that this authentication key may be acquired from a key management server or the like. Further, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF may generate themselves without receiving update information from a key management server or the like. In addition, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF themselves generate predetermined second data by acquiring predetermined first data from a key management server or the like, and the authentication key is obtained from the first data and the second data. You may make it produce | generate.

  The temporary authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and until the authentication key is generated (or until the set allowable time (for example, two days) elapses), the SC 325bF Used for encryption communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The encrypted communication using the temporary authentication key (temporary authentication key mode) is allowed (timed operation) only for a limited period (for example, 2 days). The SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF store temporary authentication keys in their respective ROMs from the manufacturing stage. The valid key (commercial) is a key that is received by the SC 325bF via the CU control unit 323F and transmitted (set) to the communication control IC 325aF during the initial communication with the hall server. Communication with P devices becomes possible by setting the effective key. The valid key is data for activating the communication control IC 325aF. In other words, the valid key is permission information for permitting communication between the CU and the P platform.

  The communication key 1 (session key) is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, is used for business message communication for anti-game machines, and is created every business day by the SC 325bF using some variable. For example, a counter value (random number) or date / time information may be used as the variable. The communication key 2 (session key) is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and is used for business message communication for gaming machines.

  Note that even if the key described above has a configuration in which the key data is embedded in each part as it is, the information for generating the key data is stored in each part. The key data may be generated by using the key.

  Next, a method for acquiring an encryption key and a method for performing encrypted communication using the acquired encryption key will be described. First, the SC 325bF obtains an effective key via the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server. The SC 325bF transmits (sets) the acquired effective key to the communication control IC 325aF, thereby enabling communication with the P units. The CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The SC 325bF performs cryptographic authentication with the CU control unit 323F using the acquired board initial key, and performs cryptographic communication with the CU control unit 323F in a timely manner using the board initial key. Further, the hall server that has received the connection request sent from the CU control unit 323F when the power is turned on returns a unified store code for identifying the game arcade where the hall server is installed to the CU control unit 323F. Specifically, the unified store code is transmitted from the input / output interface of the hall server to the CU control unit 323F according to the control of the CPU of the hall server.

  On the other hand, authentication is performed between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code stored as the initial information in both. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F. A board connection request and a board connection response are exchanged on the condition that the authentication using the board manufacturer code is successful (see FIG. 97). The unified store code is included in the board connection request transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF, and the SC 325bF acquires the unified store code by receiving the board connection request.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F requests the board security information from the key management server and receives the board security information transmitted from the key management server via the hall server, so that the board security information is included in the board security information. Get the board authentication key. The CU control unit performs cryptographic authentication with the SC using the acquired board authentication key, and performs cryptographic communication with the SC using the board authentication key. Note that the CU control unit 323F does not change the key from the board initial key to the board authentication key immediately after obtaining the board authentication key, but on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state as described later. Change the key.

  The board authentication key may be generated by the CU control unit 323F itself instead of being acquired from the key management server or the like, and the CU control unit 323F acquires the first predetermined data from the key management server or the like. Predetermined second data may be generated, and a board authentication key may be generated from the first data and the second data.

  Next, the SC 325bF performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the stored temporary authentication key. Then, the SC decrypts the update information acquired from the key management server by performing cryptographic communication with the CU control unit using the board authentication key, and inquires about the board inquiry number. If the inquiry board inquiry numbers match, the SC generates a main authentication key from the update information, and performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the generated main authentication key. The authentication key is not stored in the communication control IC 325aF from the time of shipment, and is generated from the update information as in the SC325bF.

  Next, the SC notifies the CU control unit of the communication key 1 and performs communication with the CU control unit using the communication key 1 so that business message communication with the gaming machine is possible. It becomes. In addition, the SC sets an effective key for the communication control IC, thereby receiving a notification of the communication key 2 from the communication control IC and performing communication with the communication control IC thereafter using the communication key 2. As a result, business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU control unit and the SC>
Next, communication within the CU3F shown in FIG. 62 will be described. In particular, communication between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325bF of the security board 325F will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325bF will be described.

  92 and 93 show the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named board connection request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board connection request command requests the SC 325bF to connect to a gaming machine (P unit 2F). A response named “substrate connection response” is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the board connection response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of a response to the board connection request.

  A board shipment key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board shipping key request command is for requesting the board shipping key from the SC 325bF. A board shipment key response response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipment key response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipment key.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F, and is stored in the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 is for requesting the board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board maker code authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board maker code authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 is a request for the board serial ID authentication to the SC 325bF. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 requests the board 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  A command of the board initial key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board initial key authentication request 2 command requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. A response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The board shipment key authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  The board shipment key authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. A response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  A version information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This version information notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the version of the board authentication key. A version information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the version information response notifies the CU control unit 323F that the version information has been received.

  A board authentication result notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. A response of the board authentication result response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication result response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  A security board inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board inquiry instruction notification command requests security board inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the security board inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of the security board inquiry information.

  A security board information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board information notification command notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. A response of the security board information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the security board information has been received.

  A counter information request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This counter information request command requests counter information from the SC 325bF. A response of the counter information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the counter information response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the counter information.

  A communication key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This communication key request command requests the SC325bF for a communication key. A response of the communication key response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the communication key response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the communication key.

  A gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command requests gaming machine chip inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of gaming machine chip inquiry information.

  A gaming machine chip information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip information notification command notifies the game result of gaming machine chip information to SC325bF. A response of the gaming machine chip information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the gaming machine chip information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the gaming machine chip verification result has been received.

  A substrate state request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board status request command requests the board status to the SC 325bF. A response of the substrate state response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the substrate state response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the substrate state.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, processing executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323F and processing executed by the security chip (SC) 325bF will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 94, a description will be given of the startup process when the CU control unit 323F is turned on and the hall is installed. FIG. 94 shows a sequence when the power supply is first turned on after the CU3F is installed in the amusement hall. In particular, a startup sequence at the time of hall installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the CU3F is installed in the amusement hall and the power is first turned on, the CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key A from the host device (specifically, from the hall server), the MAC key of the board initial key A, valid Acquire a key (for commercial / P shipment). Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key that is downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control unit 323F when first communicating with the host device after being delivered to the amusement hall, and is installed in the key management center. This is an encryption key used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF until the board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The board initial key A is decrypted using the board manufacturer code, while the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board manufacturer code. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method conforming to the AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU controllers 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform the board initial key authentication sequence, and authenticate when the board initial key authentication is completed. It becomes. Detailed processing of the board initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a security substrate information inquiry sequence, and acquire OK when the security substrate information can be acquired. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes a board serial ID, a board authentication key, and the like. Details of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key that is downloaded from a key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  When the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and exchange communication keys for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired in the substrate information acquisition sequence. However, when the substrate information cannot be acquired, the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key for a limited time. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business message communication with the gaming machine, gaming on the gaming machine is permitted. The business message communication with the gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is time-limited communication as described above, and is allowed only for a certain period (for example, 2 days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (substrate initial key mode (substrate initial key operation)). If a certain period of time (for example, 2 days) is exceeded in this timed operation, the temporary operation is stopped and the overage is notified from the SC 325bF to the key management server via the CU control unit 323F and the hall server. The

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a recovery request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F sends a response (recovery response) of the recovery response including the previous last transmission serial number, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time to the CU 3F. Send back.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the process of turning on the power and normal startup of the CU control unit 323F will be described. FIG. 95 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after the CU 3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence using a board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the power is first turned on when the CU3F is first installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323F receives a board serial ID key, a board from the host device (specifically, from the key management server via the hall server). The MAC key of the authentication key version, the board authentication key A, and the board authentication key A is acquired. The board serial ID key is decrypted using the board initial key, the board initial key A is decrypted using the board serial ID, and the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board serial ID. Is done. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method according to the AES encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board authentication key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a security board information inquiry sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated.

  The SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF when the board authentication key can be authenticated by the board authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or when there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security board information inquiry sequence. .

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board authentication key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF further acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, processing for turning on the power of the CU control unit 323F and starting up at the time of factory shipment will be described. FIG. 96 shows a sequence at the time of factory shipment before the CU3F is shipped to the amusement hall, and in particular, a factory shipment start-up sequence using a board shipment key will be described. This sequence is processing in the CU control units 323F and SC325bF that are not connected to the host device at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. The CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board initial key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the substrate manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key and perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence. However, since the CU3F is not yet installed in the amusement hall at the factory shipping stage, the CU control unit 323F has not been able to obtain the basic initial key from the hall server of the amusement hall. The result is NG.

  Thereafter, since the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication NG, the CU controller 323F sends a board shipping key request command to the SC 325bF to request the board shipping key used for the security board 325F test. Send to. After receiving the board shipment key request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF transmits a board shipment key response response including the board shipment key to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a substrate shipping key authentication sequence using the substrate shipping key acquired from the SC325bF as an encryption key. Detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  When the board shipping key can be authenticated by the board shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board shipment key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a communication test request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F transmits a communication test response to the CU 3F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can communicate with the gaming machine only by the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, a communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. The first power-on sequence when the CU3F that has passed the factory communication test is delivered to the amusement hall is the hall installation sequence described with reference to FIG. 94, and is then executed after obtaining the board authentication key. The sequence is the normal startup sequence described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, processing of the board manufacturer code authentication sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command for requesting board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. Since the board manufacturer code authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the board manufacturer code, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323F generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command. Specifically, the response code is generated by encrypting the challenge code received using the board manufacturer code as a key.

  The SC 325bF that received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board manufacturer code as a key), the challenge code matches. Assume that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board manufacturer code authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, the check result is NG (inappropriate). In that case, the authentication is repeated n times, and SC325bF becomes a non-response state (HALT) in the case of NG for n times continuously, and the board authentication key and the main authentication key are cleared (see FIG. 125). After entering the no-response state (HALT), the SC 325bF does not authenticate with the communication control IC 325aF, and repairs are performed at the factory.

  The CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the CU control unit specific information (unified store code, unit number, current time), and transmits a board connection request command for requesting connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the board connection request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF holds the information on the unified store code, the bedtime, and the current time. When the previous unified store code matches, the CU control unit 323F A response of the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been accepted (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the previous unified store code, a response of the substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not accepted (NG) is returned to the CU control unit 323F, and the substrate stored in the RAM In addition to clearing the authentication key, a transition is made to a substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 94), which is a mode for proceeding with the substrate initial key as an encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board connection request result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, processing of an authentication sequence for a substrate initial key or a substrate shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 98, in the state of the substrate initial key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with the substrate initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the basic initial key is performed in FIG. In the case of the substrate shipping key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the key as an encryption key, authentication using the base shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 98 is a symbol representing either one. The CU control unit 323F transmits a board initial key / board shipment key authentication request 1 command for requesting authentication information to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board initial key / board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key and transmits the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323F. It calculates and returns with the response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 command decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request to the SC 325bF. Send with command 2. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key to the CU control unit 323F. To do. Then, the SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board initial key authentication result and a board shipping key authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, processing of the authentication sequence of the board serial ID and the board authentication key will be described.

  First, the communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF is in the state of the board authentication key mode in which the process proceeds with the board authentication key as an encryption key. The CU control unit 323F authenticates the board serial ID to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting is sent. Since the board serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  Upon receiving the board serial ID authentication request 1 command, the SC 325bF generates a challenge code based on the board serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, generates a response code by encrypting the challenge code using the board serial ID as a key) The generated response code is notified to SC325bF by the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board serial ID as a key), and the challenge code matches. If the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. When the check result is NG, the SC 325bF includes the check result in the authentication result in the board authentication result notification and the board authentication result response to the CU control unit 323F, and notifies the NG. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board serial ID authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a version information notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the version information of the board authentication key. Note that the version information notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the version information notification command returns a response of the version information response to notify the CU control unit 323F that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Note that the response of the version information response is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using a board authentication key as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 for requesting authentication information to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and performs the board authentication key authentication with respect to the CU control unit 323F. Reply with response 1 response.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits it to the SC 325bF with the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication request 2 command, the SC 325bF decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC to verify the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board authentication result notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the board authentication result. The board authentication result notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. The board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board authentication result notification command transmits a board authentication result response command to the CU control unit 323F in order to notify the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result. The board authentication result response command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining processing in the case of inquiring security board information. Referring to FIG. 100, first, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the board serial number as the encryption key, and the key that cannot be decrypted by the CU control unit 323F and the hall server (hereinafter referred to as the key). The query information is encrypted with a “secret key”. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.), and necessary processing is performed when security board information is received.

  Thereafter, when receiving the inquiry result of the security board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board information notification command including the board serial ID and the board authentication key, which is the inquiry result, to the SC 325bF. Note that the security board information notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325bF confirms the inquiry number and sends a response of the security board information result to notify the CU control unit 323F that the security board information notification command has been normally received. Send back. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information result to be returned does not need to be encrypted. However, in the case of encryption, a board initial key or a board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323F stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A and uses them as authentication key information at the next reset. Further, the CU control unit 323F acquires the authentication log information of the board information inquiry and board information notification.

  Next, the processing of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, an authentication process based on gaming machine chip information acquired from the gaming machine is executed. First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command for inquiring gaming machine chip information to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted does not have to be encrypted, but when encrypted, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC. Thereafter, the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command completes the acquisition of gaming machine chip information according to the sequence described with reference to FIG. A response of the machine chip inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, and the like. Note that the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result is that the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After that, when receiving the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result, the CU control unit 323F includes the main control chip number and the payout control chip number in the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 91). Queries gaming machine chip information. During the gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute the processing of the next step (business message processing with the gaming machine) without receiving a response from the host device. Since it takes time (for example, about 2 hours) to inquire about gaming machine chip information, the operation of the gaming machine cannot be stopped during that time, so the next step processing is not performed without a response from the host device. (Business message processing with game machine) is executed. It should be noted that during the gaming machine chip information inquiry, even if a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on, etc.) is performed, the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification request is not issued again.

  The host device compares the received main control chip ID and payout control chip ID with the registered main control chip ID and payout control chip ID, and the main control chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered. Authenticate whether or not As a result, the gaming machine chip information is authenticated. The host device is, for example, the hall server 801F in the hall, or the key management server 800F connected for communication via the hall server 801F. The collation result (authentication result) in the host device is transmitted from the host device to the CU control unit 323F. After that, when receiving the matching result of the gaming machine chip information from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the matching result. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip information notification command including a matching result to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip verification result notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the gaming machine chip information notification command, the SC 325bF returns a gaming machine chip information result response to notify the CU control unit 323F of the gaming machine manufacturer code and model code when the collation result is OK. Note that the response of the gaming machine chip information result to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  At the same time, the CU control unit 323F acquires an authentication log such as a gaming machine chip information inquiry and a gaming machine chip information matching result included in the gaming machine chip information result from the SC 325bF. By performing the above processing, the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence is completed, and the authentication based on the gaming machine chip information is completed. This completes the hall installation startup sequence shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence in the CU control unit power-on / normal startup sequence. Further, by succeeding in the authentication based on the gaming machine chip information in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. Thereby, CU3F will accept | permit the game with a game machine.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the processing of the sequence of board authentication key authentication abnormality will be described.
First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board authentication key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Here, when the board authentication key authentication becomes authentication NG, the SC 325bF clears the board authentication key information as an authentication abnormality.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a substrate initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the board initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the board initial key as the encryption key.

  When the authentication of the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication OK, the security board information inquiry sequence, the communication key exchange sequence, the gaming machine chip information inquiry are thereafter performed in the same manner as the hall installation startup sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Note that the SC 325bF notifies the key management server 801 of a “board authentication key update error” alarm indicating that the authentication of the board authentication key sequence is authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining processing of an inquiry timeout sequence for security board information.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing etc.).

  After that, the CU control unit 323F, when receiving the security board information inquiry result (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, times out the waiting time for the security board information inquiry, A status information request command for requesting information regarding the status of 2F is transmitted. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the state information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “board inquiry present” indicating that the security board information is requested to the key management center.

  In response to the above-described security board inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). The response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F again. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and inquiry information. Query information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Next, FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining processing of a gaming machine chip information inquiry (collation) timeout sequence.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information (specifically, gaming machine chip information) for inquiring of the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC, and then the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command inquires of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information), a response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result (authentication OK) is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the gaming machine chip information, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and perform the next step processing (for example, communication control IC authentication processing, security board information authentication processing, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.) and the processing necessary when the gaming machine chip information is received.

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323F determines that the waiting time for the gaming machine chip information inquiry has timed out before receiving the gaming machine chip information inquiry result (main control chip information and payout control chip information) from the host device. The CU 3F transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the status of the P platform 2F. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “chip information inquiry present” indicating that an inquiry to the key management center for gaming machine chip information is requested.

  In response to the above-mentioned gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to request the SC 325bF to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  Upon receiving the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command, the SC 325bF notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to do this, the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323F again. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Characteristic parts of the sequence between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 104 will be described below.

  As a sequence executed after the CU3F is received and installed in the amusement hall, there is a “board initial key authentication sequence” (see FIG. 94). This "Board Initial Key Authentication Sequence" is obtained by downloading the board initial key from the host device (hall server) and authenticating using the board initial key when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall. Sequence. On the condition that the authentication result of this board initial key authentication sequence is OK, the “security board information inquiry sequence” is executed using this board initial key (see FIG. 94). The board authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security board information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences, etc. are executed using this board authentication key, and the communication key is obtained. Using this, business message communication with the gaming machine is executed (see FIG. 95).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security board information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 94) using the board initial key, the board authentication key may not be acquired. This board authentication key is sent to the key management server by the CU manufacturer when the CU manufacturer ships the CU3F to the game hall, and stored in the key management server. The board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, but the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU manufacturer to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. In addition, when the CU3F installed in the amusement hall attempts to download the board authentication key by executing the security board information inquiry sequence, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3F and communication is impossible. May be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key cannot be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key cannot be downloaded and the actual operation such as business message communication with the gaming machine after that cannot be performed at all, operational problems such as a decrease in the operating rate at the amusement hall occur. Therefore, when such an unforeseen situation occurs, control is performed so that the temporary operation of the actual operation can be performed using the board initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, the communication key exchange sequence is executed using the board initial key acquired from the host device (specifically, the hall server), and the communication key (session key) is generated using the random number and the time data. Then, the communication key (session key) is shared between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, and the business message communication is performed using the communication key (session key) to perform the actual operation control. The actual operation control using the communication key exchanged using the board initial key is allowed only for a certain period because the board initial key is a temporary key and the board authentication key cannot be obtained. Temporary operation is controlled. Specifically, actual operation control using this board initial key is allowed for only two days, and when the board authentication key cannot be obtained even at the time of power-up on the third day, the subsequent control is stopped, Control is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred and to notify the hall server or hall management computer that an abnormality has occurred. Note that the temporary operation time limit control that is allowed for a certain period (for example, two days) with the board initial key is that the board initial key is stored in the hall server. It is allowed in a state where it is guaranteed that it is connected to

  Further, the above-mentioned “board initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. 98, that is, even at a stage where the board has not yet been carried into the game arcade. When the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, since the board initial key has not yet been acquired, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived as the NG authentication result. The Then, each sequence after the board shipping key request and board shipping key response shown in FIG. 98 is executed, and communication between the gaming machine and the communication test message is executed. In other words, it is determined by the “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the substrate initial key has been acquired or not at the time of factory shipment. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial stage key has been acquired or whether the initial stage key has not been acquired.

<Main sequence in communication between communication control IC and security chip>
Next, FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the processing of the authentication sequence of the communication control IC 325aF. Referring to FIG. 106, the first authentication sequence is executed between SC 325bF and IC 325aF. For example, the first authentication sequence authenticates the SC325bF serial ID, that is, the SC325bF SID stored in the EEPROM (not shown). Next, the second authentication sequence is executed between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF. For example, the second authentication sequence authenticates the IC 325aF serial ID, that is, the IC 325aF SID stored in the EEPROM (not shown).

  Thereafter, a version management information sequence is executed between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF. The SC 325bF transmits a command for requesting version management information to the IC 325aF in order to check the key version. Note that the version management information request command is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  The IC 325aF that has received the version management information request command transmits a response of a version management information response to notify the latest key version to the SC 325bF. Note that the response of the version management information response is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, an IC authentication result sequence is executed between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF. The SC 325bF transmits an IC authentication result notification command to the IC 325aF. With this IC authentication result notification command, the authentication results from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response are collectively notified to the IC 325aF. Note that the IC authentication result notification command is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  The IC 325aF that has received the IC authentication result notification command transmits an IC authentication result response response to the SC 325bF. Here, the authentication results from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response are collectively notified to the SC 325bF by the response of the IC authentication result response. Note that the response of the IC authentication result response is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, a counter information sequence is executed between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF. The SC 325bF transmits a counter information request command to the IC 325aF. By this counter information request command, the current time information is notified to the IC 325aF. Note that the counter information request command is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, a real authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  The IC 325aF that has received the counter information request command transmits a counter information response response to the SC 325bF. Here, the initial vector value of the counter used for encryption is generated by the response of the counter information response, and is notified to the SC 325bF. Note that the response of the counter information response is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  Next, an example of the control contents of the first authentication sequence will be described with reference to FIG. First, the authentication key random number is notified from the SC 325bF to the communication control IC 325aF. This authentication key random number is data for generating an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key). The communication control IC 325aF that has received the response returns an authentication key random number notification response indicating that the authentication key random number has been received to the SC 325bF. Next, the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF generate an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key) using the mutual authentication key random number. The sequence from the notification of the authentication key random number to the generation of the authentication key (specifically, the authentication key) is executed only when the temporary authentication key is used, that is, only when the authentication key has not yet been generated. The When the authentication key is already generated and used, the sequence from the SC serial ID authentication request 1 is executed without executing the sequence from the notification of the authentication key random number to the generation of the authentication key (specifically, the authentication key). Execute.

  Next, SC serial ID authentication is performed by repeating an SC serial ID authentication request and an SC serial ID authentication response between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence. An example of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, a gaming machine authentication result request is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the communication control IC 325aF. The gaming machine authentication result request is a command that requests the communication control IC 325aF for an authentication result with the P unit 2F. The communication control IC 325aF performs mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F, and on condition that the mutual authentication is successful, the communication control IC 325aF receives the gaming machine chip information (payout control chip ID, main control chip). ID) can be acquired from the P stand 2F side. The SC 325bF waits until the mutual authentication between the communication control IC 325aF and the P base 2F is completed.

  The communication control IC 325aF notifies the SC 325bF of the mutual authentication status with the P platform 2F as a response to the gaming machine authentication result response. The mutual authentication status includes “authentication OK” indicating the success of the mutual authentication, “authentication processing” indicating that the mutual authentication is in progress, “authentication error” indicating the mutual authentication failure, the communication control IC 325aF and the P unit. "Disconnection detection" indicating that mutual authentication is impossible due to disconnection of communication line with 2F, and indicates that mutual authentication is impossible due to communication abnormality between communication control IC 325aF and P base 2F Includes "communication error". The communication control IC 325aF includes one of these mutual authentication statuses in the gaming machine authentication result response and returns it to the SC 325bF. In the figure, “authentication OK” is illustrated.

  The SC 325bF sends a gaming machine chip information request command to the communication control IC 325aF on the condition that the “authentication OK” gaming machine authentication result response is received from the communication control IC 325aF, and the communication control IC 325aF transmits the command from the P unit 2F. Wait until the gaming machine chip information (payout control chip ID and main control chip ID) can be acquired. The gaming machine chip information request command is transmitted in response to the SC 325bF receiving a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification from the CU control unit 323F.

  The communication control IC 325aF sends a gaming machine chip information transmission instruction to the payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F on the condition that the mutual authentication with the P table 2F is successful. In response to the instruction, the payout control unit 171F sends a main control chip ID transmission instruction to the main control unit 161F. The main control unit 161F transmits the main control chip ID stored in the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F in response to the instruction. The payout control unit 171F transmits the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID stored therein to the communication control IC 325aF.

  When the communication control IC 325aF receives a gaming machine chip information request command from the SC 325bF, it returns a gaming machine chip information response to the SC 325bF. The response of the gaming machine chip information response includes “acquisition OK” indicating successful acquisition of gaming machine chip information, “acquiring processing” indicating that gaming machine chip information acquisition is in progress, and failure to acquire gaming machine chip information "Disconnection detection" indicating that the gaming machine chip information cannot be acquired due to disconnection of the communication line between the communication control IC 325aF and the P base 2F, and the communication control IC 325aF and the P base 2F "Communication abnormality" indicating that gaming machine chip information cannot be acquired due to communication abnormality between the two. Further, the acquired gaming machine chip information response of “acquired OK” includes the acquired gaming machine chip information (payout control chip ID and main control chip ID).

  When the SC325bF receives the “acquisition OK” gaming machine chip information response, the gaming machine chip inquiry response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F, as will be described later with reference to FIG. The information is transferred to the CU control unit 323F. The gaming machine chip inquiry result includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a model code, and the like. The CU control unit 323F transmits the received gaming machine chip information to the host device. The host device compares the received main control chip ID and payout control chip ID with the registered main control chip ID and payout control chip ID, and the main control chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered. Authentication is performed (see FIG. 117). As a result, the gaming machine chip information is authenticated. The host device is, for example, the hall server 801F in the hall, or the key management server 800F connected for communication via the hall server 801F. The collation result (authentication result) in the host device is transmitted from the host device to the CU control unit 323F. Then, the CU control unit 323F notifies the authentication result to the SC 325bF using a gaming machine chip information notification command (see FIG. 117).

  When receiving the authentication result from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF transmits a gaming machine chip information authentication result notification command to the communication control IC 325aF and notifies the communication control IC 325aF of the authentication result (NG, OK). Then, the communication control IC 325aF returns a response to the gaming machine chip information authentication result response indicating that the authentication result has been acquired to the SC 325bF.

  The SC 325bF that has received the response of the gaming machine chip information authentication result response transmits the gaming machine chip information result response to the CU control unit 323F, as will be described later with reference to FIG. By receiving the gaming machine chip information result, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication processing history information (authentication log information) from the inquiry of the gaming machine chip information until the communication control IC 325aF grasps the authentication result. (See FIG. 117).

  FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining processing of the communication control IC authentication abnormality sequence. Referring to FIG. 109, the first authentication sequence to the version management information response described in FIG. 106 are executed. The first authentication sequence to the version management information response are encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key. The SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF both store the SC serial ID and the communication control IC serial ID, and any one of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response uses the challenge / response method. This is a sequence for authenticating the serial ID of the SC, and any one of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is a sequence for authenticating the serial ID of the communication control IC using the challenge / response method. . The serial ID of the SC, the serial ID of the communication control IC, and the above-mentioned board serial ID are configured with different IDs.

  After these authentication sequences are completed, an IC authentication result sequence is then executed between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF. An IC authentication result notification is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the communication control IC 325aF. By this IC authentication result notification, the authentication results from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response are collectively notified. On the other hand, an IC authentication result response is transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF to the SC 325bF. The authentication result from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is collectively notified by the IC authentication result response. When the IC authentication result notification and / or the IC authentication result response is inappropriate (NG), the following control is performed.

  When the authentication from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response has been performed using the temporary authentication key, the above-described processing from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is retried. The number of retries is limited to two. If the IC authentication result notification and / or the IC authentication result response is inappropriate even after the two retries, SC325bF is ranked “communication control IC authentication error”. It notifies the device (key management server 800F of the key management center) and waits until the host device starts reset processing (waiting for reset).

  If the IC authentication result notification and / or IC authentication result response is inappropriate even after multiple (here, twice) retries, return by reset processing (for example, operation of reset button (not shown) or power-on) To do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset may be performed on the condition that the SC 325bF has been authenticated with the key management server 800F or the hall server 801F, which is a higher-level device, in a reset waiting state.

  Next, the authentication key immediately after the update, that is, the authentication key generated as a result of the first authentication sequence in FIG. 107 (specifically, this authentication key) is used for authentication from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response. If the generated authentication key (specifically, this authentication key) is abnormal, an alarm indicating that the authentication key update is abnormal is notified to the key management server 800F of the key management center. This is executed using a temporary authentication key from the authentication sequence. If these authentication results are appropriate, as described above, a timed operation process that is allowed only for a certain limited period (for example, two days) is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine is performed only during that period. Is possible. When the timed operation period has passed, a notification is sent to the host device (key management server 800F of the key management center), and the host device is in a standby state (waiting for reset) until the reset processing starts. In the timed operation, the control content (game content) or the like may be limited instead of or in addition to the time limit. For example, it is conceivable that an upper limit is set for the number of game balls, and the continuation of the game is not allowed unless it is once converted (counted) into the number of possessed balls when the upper limit is added.

  The control operations of the sequence between the CU control unit 323F and the ISC 325F and the sequence between the ISC 325F and the communication control IC 325aF described above are collectively described below.

  The communication control IC 325aF stores IC 325aF identification information for identifying the communication control IC 325aF and SC325bF identification information (stores ID information and the like), and SC325bF is SC325bF identification information (board serial ID). And IC325aF identification information (ID information and the like) are stored. Then, between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF, a challenge code is generated using the SC 325bF identification information stored in the SC 325bF and transmitted to the IC 325aF, and the IC 325aF is received using the stored SC 325bF identification information. A response code is generated from the challenge code and returned to the SC 325bF, and the second challenge response authentication process (first authentication sequence in FIG. 106) for determining the suitability of the received response code using the stored SC 325bF identification information in the SC 325bF. ) And the challenge code is generated using the IC 325aF identification information stored in the IC 325aF and transmitted to the SC 325bF, and the stored IC 325aF identification information is used in the SC 325bF. A response code is generated from the received challenge code and returned to the IC 325aF, and the IC 325aF uses the stored IC 325aF identification information to determine the suitability of the received response code (second challenge response authentication process shown in FIG. 106). Authentication sequence).

  According to such operation control, the challenge code received between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF using the identification information transmitted from one control means to the other control means and stored in the other control means. Since response code is generated and sent back to one control means, challenge-response authentication is performed, so even if a challenge code or response code sent or received between control means is leaked, it will be stored It is difficult to specify the identification information that is present, and fraudulent acts on the control means due to leakage of the identification information can be prevented as much as possible.

  In addition, a gaming system or a gaming device (CU3F, P stand 2F, jet counter, POS terminal, etc.) having SC325bF and IC325aF that perform encryption communication with each other has a plurality of different authentication methods between SC325bF and IC325aF. The mutual authentication processing means for performing the mutual authentication processing (first authentication sequence to version management information response in FIG. 109) and the authentication results of each mutual authentication alone in a plurality of types of mutual authentication processing performed by the mutual authentication processing means General notification means for notifying the authentication partner control means of the independent authentication result in the case of inappropriateness, but summing up the abnormalities of the results of executing all of the multiple types of mutual authentication and notifying the authentication partner control means (FIG. 109: The authentication sequence from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is collectively notified) And Nde. Then, the mutual authentication processing unit performs a re-authentication process in which a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes are performed again between the control units having the abnormality after the abnormality is collectively notified by the general notification unit (FIG. 109: No. 1). The authentication sequence from 1 authentication sequence to version management information response is retried at most twice).

  According to such operation control, a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes with different authentication methods are performed between the first control unit and the second control unit and between the IC 325aF and the IC 325aF. Even if the security of mutual authentication by one authentication method is broken, the security of mutual authentication can be maintained by mutual authentication by another different authentication method.

  In addition, for example, when the authentication result of each type of mutual authentication of each of the multiple types of mutual authentication is inappropriate, the type of mutual authentication is notified when the authentication result is notified to the control means of the authentication partner. However, it is not desirable for security because it is known that the authentication result is incorrect. In order to sum up the abnormalities of the results of executing all of the multiple types of mutual authentication and not to notify the control method of the other party of authentication, it is not possible to see which type of mutual authentication has occurred , Can improve security.

  Furthermore, since the re-authentication process is performed again between the control means in which the abnormality occurred after the general notification of the abnormality, it is possible to check again whether the mutual authentication is really abnormal, and the reliability of mutual authentication Can be improved.

  In addition, the gaming system or the gaming machine stops the subsequent processing between the inappropriate control means on the condition that the result of the re-authentication processing by the mutual authentication processing means is inappropriate (FIG. 109: Further waiting for reset).

  According to such operation control, since the subsequent processing is stopped between the inappropriate control means on the condition that the result of the re-authentication process is not reliable and the reliability is inappropriate, it is not inappropriate. Nevertheless, the inconvenience of stopping the subsequent processing can be reduced as much as possible.

  In addition, the gaming system or gaming device performs an abnormality notification for executing processing for notifying the management server of the occurrence of an abnormality on the condition that the result of the re-authentication processing by the mutual authentication processing means is inappropriate. It further includes processing means (FIG. 109: “communication control IC authentication error” is notified to the host device).

  According to such operation control, since the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality is sent to the management server on the condition that the result of the re-authentication process is not reliable and the reliability is inappropriate, it is not inappropriate. Nevertheless, the inconvenience of notifying the management server of the occurrence of an abnormality can be reduced as much as possible.

  The mutual authentication processing means in the above gaming system or gaming device generates a challenge code in the IC 325aF and transmits it to the SC 325bF, and generates a response code from the received challenge code using the identification information stored in the SC 325bF. The first challenge response authentication process (first authentication sequence in FIG. 106) for determining the suitability of the response code received using the stored identification information in IC 325aF, and the challenge code is generated in SC 325bF Then, a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the IC 325aF and returned to the SC 325bF, and the stored identification is stored in the SC 325bF. The second challenge response authentication process of determining the appropriateness of the response code received with the broadcast (second authentication sequence of FIG. 106) and performs.

  According to such operation control, the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF transmit a challenge code from one control means to the other control means, and receive a response from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means. Even if a challenge code or response code sent and received between both gaming means is leaked because it is challenge-response type authentication that generates a code and sends it back to one control means, it will be stored It is difficult to specify the identification information that is present, and fraudulent acts on the gaming means due to leakage of the identification information can be prevented as much as possible.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, a process executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323F and a process executed by the security chip (SC) 325bF will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 110, a description will be given of the startup process when the CU control unit 323F is turned on and the hall is installed. FIG. 110 shows a sequence when the power supply is first turned on after the CU3F is installed in the amusement hall. In particular, a startup sequence at the time of hole installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the CU3F is installed in the amusement hall and the power is first turned on, the CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key A from the host device (specifically, from the hall server), the MAC key of the board initial key A, valid Acquire a key (for commercial / P shipment). Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key that is downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control unit 323F when first communicating with the host device after being delivered to the amusement hall, and is installed in the key management center. This is an encryption key used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF until the board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The board initial key A is decrypted using the board manufacturer code, while the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board manufacturer code. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method conforming to the AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU controllers 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform the board initial key authentication sequence, and authenticate when the board initial key authentication is completed. It becomes. Detailed processing of the board initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a security substrate information inquiry sequence, and acquire OK when the security substrate information can be acquired. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes a board serial ID, a board authentication key, and the like. Details of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key that is downloaded from a key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  When the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and exchange communication keys for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired in the substrate information acquisition sequence. However, when the substrate information cannot be acquired, the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key for a limited time. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Details of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business message communication with the gaming machine, gaming on the gaming machine is permitted. The business message communication with the gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is time-limited communication as described above, and is allowed only for a certain period (for example, 2 days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (substrate initial key mode (substrate initial key operation)). If a certain period of time (for example, 2 days) is exceeded in this timed operation, the temporary operation is stopped and the overage is notified from the SC 325bF to the key management server via the CU control unit 323F and the hall server. The

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a recovery request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F sends a response (recovery response) of the recovery response including the previous last transmission serial number, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time to the CU 3F. Send back.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, processing for turning on the power and normal startup of the CU control unit 323F will be described. FIG. 111 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after the CU3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence using a board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the power is first turned on when the CU3F is first installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323F receives a board serial ID key, a board from the host device (specifically, from the key management server via the hall server). The MAC key of the authentication key version, the board authentication key A, and the board authentication key A is acquired. The board serial ID key is decrypted using the board initial key, the board initial key A is decrypted using the board serial ID, and the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board serial ID. Is done. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method according to the AES encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board authentication key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a security board information inquiry sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated.

  The SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF when the board authentication key can be authenticated by the board authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or when there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security board information inquiry sequence. .

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board authentication key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF further acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Details of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a process of turning on the power of the CU control unit 323F and starting up at the time of factory shipment will be described. FIG. 112 shows a sequence at the time of factory shipment before the CU 3F is shipped to the amusement hall, and in particular, a factory shipment start-up sequence using a board shipment key will be described. This sequence is processing in the CU control units 323F and SC325bF that are not connected to the host device at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. The CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board initial key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the substrate manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key and perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence. However, since the CU3F is not yet installed in the amusement hall at the factory shipping stage, the CU control unit 323F has not been able to obtain the basic initial key from the hall server of the amusement hall. The result is NG.

  Thereafter, since the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication NG, the CU controller 323F sends a board shipping key request command to the SC 325bF to request the board shipping key used for the security board 325F test. Send to. After receiving the board shipment key request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF transmits a board shipment key response response including the board shipment key to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a substrate shipping key authentication sequence using the substrate shipping key acquired from the SC325bF as an encryption key. Detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  When the board shipping key can be authenticated by the board shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board shipment key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Details of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a communication test request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F transmits a communication test response to the CU 3F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can communicate with the gaming machine only by the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, a communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. 110 is the hall installation startup sequence described in FIG. 110 after the CU3F that has passed the communication test at the time of factory shipment is delivered to the amusement hall, and is executed after obtaining the board authentication key. The sequence is the normal startup sequence described in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, processing of the board manufacturer code authentication sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command for requesting board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. Since the board manufacturer code authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the board manufacturer code, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323F generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command. Specifically, the response code is generated by encrypting the challenge code received using the board manufacturer code as a key.

  The SC 325bF that received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board manufacturer code as a key), the challenge code matches. Assume that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board manufacturer code authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, the check result is NG (inappropriate). In that case, the authentication is repeated n times, and SC325bF becomes a no-response state (HALT) in the case of NG continuously n times, and the board authentication key and the main authentication key are cleared. After entering the no-response state (HALT), the SC 325bF does not authenticate with the communication control IC 325aF, and repairs are performed at the factory.

  The CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the CU control unit specific information (unified store code, unit number, current time), and transmits a board connection request command for requesting connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the board connection request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF holds the information on the unified store code, the bedtime, and the current time. When the previous unified store code matches, the CU control unit 323F A response of the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been accepted (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the previous unified store code, a response of the substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not accepted (NG) is returned to the CU control unit 323F, and the substrate stored in the RAM In addition to clearing the authentication key, a transition is made to the substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 110), which is a mode for proceeding with the substrate initial key as an encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board connection request result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, processing of an authentication sequence for a substrate initial key or a substrate shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 114, in the state of the board initial key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with the board initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the base initial key is performed in FIG. In the case of the substrate shipping key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the key as the encryption key, authentication using the base shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 114 is a symbol representing either one. The CU control unit 323F transmits a board initial key / board shipment key authentication request 1 command for requesting authentication information to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board initial key / board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key and transmits the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323F. It calculates and returns with the response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 command decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request to the SC 325bF. Send with command 2. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key to the CU control unit 323F. To do. Then, the SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board initial key authentication result and a board shipping key authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, processing of the authentication sequence of the board serial ID and the board authentication key will be described.

  First, the communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF is in the state of the board authentication key mode in which the process proceeds with the board authentication key as an encryption key. The CU control unit 323F authenticates the board serial ID to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting is sent. Since the board serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  Upon receiving the board serial ID authentication request 1 command, the SC 325bF generates a challenge code based on the board serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, generates a response code by encrypting the challenge code using the board serial ID as a key) The generated response code is notified to SC325bF by the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2.

  The SC 325bF that received the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board serial ID as a key), and the challenge code matches. If the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. When the check result is NG, the SC 325bF includes the check result in the authentication result in the board authentication result notification and the board authentication result response to the CU control unit 323F, and notifies the NG. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board serial ID authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a version information notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the version information of the board authentication key. Note that the version information notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the version information notification command returns a response of the version information response to notify the CU control unit 323F that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Note that the response of the version information response is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using a board authentication key as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 for requesting authentication information to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and performs the board authentication key authentication with respect to the CU control unit 323F. Reply with response 1 response.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits it to the SC 325bF with the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication request 2 command, the SC 325bF decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC to verify the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board authentication result notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the board authentication result. The board authentication result notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. The board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board authentication result notification command transmits a board authentication result response command to the CU control unit 323F in order to notify the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result. The board authentication result response command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining processing in the case of inquiring about security board information. With reference to FIG. 116, first, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host apparatus. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the board serial number as the encryption key, and the key that cannot be decrypted by the CU control unit 323F and the hall server (hereinafter referred to as the key). The query information is encrypted with a “secret key”. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.), and necessary processing is performed when security board information is received.

  Thereafter, when receiving the inquiry result of the security board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board information notification command including the board serial ID and the board authentication key, which is the inquiry result, to the SC 325bF. Note that the security board information notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325bF confirms the inquiry number and sends a response of the security board information result to notify the CU control unit 323F that the security board information notification command has been normally received. Send back. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information result to be returned does not need to be encrypted. However, in the case of encryption, a board initial key or a board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323F stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A and uses them as authentication key information at the next reset. Further, the CU control unit 323F acquires the authentication log information of the board information inquiry and board information notification.

  Next, the processing of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, an authentication process based on gaming machine chip information acquired from the gaming machine is executed. First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command for inquiring gaming machine chip information to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted does not have to be encrypted, but when encrypted, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC. After that, the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command completes the acquisition of gaming machine chip information according to the sequence described with reference to FIG. A response of the machine chip inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, and the like. Note that the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result is that the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After that, when receiving the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result, the CU control unit 323F includes the main control chip number and the payout control chip number in the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 63). Queries gaming machine chip information. During the gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute the processing of the next step (business message processing with the gaming machine) without receiving a response from the host device. Since it takes time (for example, about 2 hours) to inquire about gaming machine chip information, the operation of the gaming machine cannot be stopped during that time, so the next step processing is not performed without a response from the host device. (Business message processing with game machine) is executed. It should be noted that during the gaming machine chip information inquiry, even if a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on, etc.) is performed, the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification request is not issued again.

  The host device compares the received main control chip ID and payout control chip ID with the registered main control chip ID and payout control chip ID, and the main control chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered. Authenticate whether or not As a result, the gaming machine chip information is authenticated. The host device is, for example, the hall server 801F in the hall, or the key management server 800F connected for communication via the hall server 801F. The collation result (authentication result) in the host device is transmitted from the host device to the CU control unit 323F. After that, when receiving the matching result of the gaming machine chip information from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the matching result. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip information notification command including a matching result to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip verification result notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the gaming machine chip information notification command, the SC 325bF returns a gaming machine chip information result response to notify the CU control unit 323F of the gaming machine manufacturer code and model code when the collation result is OK. Note that the response of the gaming machine chip information result to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  At the same time, the CU control unit 323F acquires an authentication log such as a gaming machine chip information inquiry and a gaming machine chip information matching result included in the gaming machine chip information result from the SC 325bF. By performing the above processing, the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence is completed, and the authentication based on the gaming machine chip information is completed. This completes the hall installation startup sequence shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence in the CU control unit power-on / normal startup sequence. Further, by succeeding in the authentication based on the gaming machine chip information in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. Thereby, CU3F will accept | permit the game with a game machine.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, processing of the sequence of board authentication key authentication abnormality will be described.
First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board authentication key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Here, when the board authentication key authentication becomes authentication NG, the SC 325bF clears the board authentication key information as an authentication abnormality.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a substrate initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the board initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the board initial key as the encryption key.

  When the authentication of this board initial key authentication sequence is authentication OK, the security board information inquiry sequence, the communication key exchange sequence, the gaming machine chip information inquiry is thereafter performed in the same manner as the hall installation start-up sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Note that the SC 325bF notifies the key management server 800F of a “board authentication key update error” alarm indicating that the authentication of the board authentication key sequence is authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining processing of an inquiry timeout sequence for security board information.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing etc.).

  After that, the CU control unit 323F, when receiving the security board information inquiry result (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, times out the waiting time for the security board information inquiry, A status information request command for requesting information regarding the status of 2F is transmitted. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the state information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “board inquiry present” indicating that the security board information is requested to the key management center.

  In response to the above-described security board inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). The response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F again. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and inquiry information. Query information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Next, FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining processing of a gaming machine chip information inquiry (collation) timeout sequence.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information (specifically, gaming machine chip information) for inquiring of the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC, and then the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command inquires of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information), a response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result (authentication OK) is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the gaming machine chip information, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and perform the next step processing (for example, communication control IC authentication processing, security board information authentication processing, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.) and the processing necessary when the gaming machine chip information is received.

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323F determines that the waiting time for the gaming machine chip information inquiry has timed out before receiving the gaming machine chip information inquiry result (main control chip information and payout control chip information) from the host device. The CU 3F transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the status of the P platform 2F. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “chip information inquiry present” indicating that an inquiry to the key management center for gaming machine chip information is requested.

  In response to the above-mentioned gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to request the SC 325bF to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  Upon receiving the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command, the SC 325bF notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to do this, the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323F again. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Characteristic parts of the sequence between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 120 will be described below.

  There is a “board initial key authentication sequence” (see FIG. 110) as a sequence executed after the CU3F is received and installed in the amusement hall. This "Board Initial Key Authentication Sequence" is obtained by downloading the board initial key from the host device (hall server) and authenticating using the board initial key when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall. Sequence. On the condition that the authentication result of this board initial key authentication sequence is OK, a “security board information inquiry sequence” is executed using this board initial key (see FIG. 110). The board authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security board information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences, etc. are executed using this board authentication key, and the communication key is obtained. Using this, business message communication with the gaming machine is executed (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security board information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 110) using the board initial key, the board authentication key may not be acquired. This board authentication key is sent to the key management server by the CU manufacturer when the CU manufacturer ships the CU3F to the game hall, and stored in the key management server. The board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, but the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU manufacturer to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. In addition, when the CU3F installed in the amusement hall attempts to download the board authentication key by executing the security board information inquiry sequence, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3F and communication is impossible. May be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key cannot be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key cannot be downloaded and the actual operation such as business message communication with the gaming machine after that cannot be performed at all, operational problems such as a decrease in the operating rate at the amusement hall occur. Therefore, when such an unforeseen situation occurs, control is performed so that the temporary operation of the actual operation can be performed using the board initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, the communication key exchange sequence is executed using the board initial key acquired from the host device (specifically, the hall server), and the communication key (session key) is generated using the random number and the time data. Then, the communication key (session key) is shared between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, and the business message communication is performed using the communication key (session key) to perform the actual operation control. The actual operation control using the communication key exchanged using the board initial key is allowed only for a certain period because the board initial key is a temporary key and the board authentication key cannot be obtained. Temporary operation is controlled. Specifically, actual operation control using this board initial key is allowed for only two days, and when the board authentication key cannot be obtained even at the time of power-up on the third day, the subsequent control is stopped, Control is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred and to notify the hall server or hall management computer that an abnormality has occurred. Note that the temporary operation time limit control that is allowed for a certain period (for example, two days) with the board initial key is that the board initial key is stored in the hall server. It is allowed in a state where it is guaranteed that it is connected to

  Further, the above-mentioned “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. When the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, since the board initial key has not yet been acquired, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived as the NG authentication result. The Then, each sequence after the board shipping key request and the board shipping key response shown in FIG. 114 is executed, and communication between the gaming machine and the communication test message is executed. In other words, it is determined by the “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the substrate initial key has been acquired or not at the time of factory shipment. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial stage key has been acquired or whether the initial stage key has not been acquired.

  FIG. 121 is a flow for explaining specific control of “authentication using a board authentication key”. Referring to FIG. 121, a series of processes described below is performed between CU control unit 323F and SC 325bF.

  In step SF201, an authentication process (unit authentication) using a board serial ID is performed using a challenge response method (see board serial ID authentication request / responses 1 and 2 in FIG. 99).

  When the single authentication in step SF201 is completed, the key version is checked in the next step SF202 (see version information notification / response in FIG. 99).

  When the key version check in step SF202 is completed, device authentication using the board authentication key is performed in the next step SF203 (see board authentication key authentication request / responses 1 and 2 in FIG. 99).

  When the device authentication process in step SF203 is completed, the authentication results in steps SF201 to SF203 are mutually notified in the next step SF204, and the process proceeds to the next step SF205 (board authentication result notification / response in FIG. 99). reference).

  In step SF205, it is determined whether or not the notified authentication result is normal. If the authentication result is normal, the process proceeds to step SF206. If the authentication result is not normal, the process proceeds to step SF207.

  In step SF206, it is further determined whether or not the CU control unit 323F has the security board information acquired from the SC 325bF. If the CU control unit 323F has the security board information to be acquired, the process proceeds to step SF209 to acquire the security board information. If there is no security board information to be processed, the process proceeds to step SF210.

  In step SF209, the board authentication key authentication process between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF further shifts to a security board information inquiry process, and the process ends. On the other hand, in step SF210, the authentication in the board authentication key mode ends normally, and the process ends. In this case, game machine chip information verification processing is performed between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF.

  On the other hand, if the authentication result is not normal in step SF205, the process proceeds to step SF206. In step SF206, it is determined whether or not the number of retries is the third time. If the number of retries is the third time, the process proceeds to step SF208, and the number of retries is not the third time (the first or second number of retries). If so, the process returns to step SF201, and the authentication process is performed again.

  In step SF208, a SC325bF board authentication abnormality is set to a standby state until a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on). After the reset operation, it is activated again in a mode (substrate initial key mode) in which authentication processing is performed again using the substrate initial key as an encryption key, each authentication processing is performed, and the processing ends. In this case, the business of that day is operated in this board initial key mode throughout the day, and when the power is turned on the next day, a security board information acquisition request is issued again to the key management server to try to acquire the security board information (see FIG. 103). Further, as shown in step SF208a, the inquiry process for the security board information may be executed again at this time without waiting for the power-up of the next day. In this case, while the game is progressing by the operation in the board initial key mode, the inquiry process of the security board information is also advanced in parallel.

  FIG. 122 (a) is an example of a flowchart for explaining a communication mode switching process between the CU control unit and the SC. Referring to FIG. 122A, in step SF211, the CU control unit 323F requests the key authentication server for a board authentication key, and the process proceeds to the next step SF212.

  In step SF212, the CU control unit 323F acquires the board authentication key from the security board information sent from the key management server, and transmits the update information in the security board information to the SC 325bF, and the next step SF213. The process proceeds.

  In step SF213, the CU control unit 323F determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state. When the mode switching process of the next step SF214 is performed, it becomes impossible to communicate the number of add / subtract balls with the gaming machine that is executing the switching process, so that the gaming machine is not in operation before the mode switching process of step SF214 is performed. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state is determined based on whether or not a player's card is inserted in the CU. When no card is inserted, the gaming machine is determined to be in an inoperative state, while when a card is inserted, the gaming machine is determined to be in an operating state. If the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323F is in a non-operating state, the process proceeds to step SF214. If the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323F is not in a non-operating state, the gaming machine is in a non-operating state. Step SF213 is processed until.

  In step SF214, based on the board authentication key acquired in step SF212, the CU control unit 323F advances the process using the board authentication key as the encryption key from the mode in which the board initial key is used as the encryption key (board initial key mode). The communication mode is switched to the mode (board authentication key mode), and the process ends.

  FIG. 122B is an example of a flowchart for explaining the communication mode switching process between the SC and the communication control IC. Referring to FIG. 122 (b), in step SF216, the SC 325bF acquires update information from the CU control unit 323F. As described above, the CU control unit 323F transmits update information to the SC 325bF in step SF212. Receiving it, the SC 325bF acquires the update information. Next, in step SF217, the SC 325bF generates this authentication key from the acquired update information. Next, similarly to step SF213 described above, in step SF218, the SC 325bF determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state, and executes the process of step SF219 on the condition that it is in a non-operating state. In step SF219, the SC 325bF uses the authentication key as the encryption key from the mode (provisional authentication key mode) in which the process proceeds with the temporary authentication key as the encryption key for the communication mode between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF based on the generated authentication key. Switch to the mode to proceed with the process (this authentication key mode).

  According to such an embodiment, before the authenticity of the CU is authenticated by the board authentication key registered in the key management server, a normal communication mode is entered and the game on the P cards using the remaining card amount is performed. It can be prevented from becoming possible. Furthermore, even when the board authentication key registered in the key management server cannot be received, the restricted communication mode is set and a game on the P units is allowed, so that flexible operation is possible. In addition, in this case, since the game is allowed under a predetermined restriction compared to the normal communication mode, the operation can be performed without requiring authentication with the board authentication key stored in the key management server. It can be prevented from continuing.

  123 (a) and 123 (b) are other examples of a flowchart for explaining the communication mode switching process. Referring to FIG. 123 (a) showing the communication mode switching process between the CU control unit and the SC, in step SF221, the CU control unit 323F requests security board information from the key management server, and the next step SF222 is performed. The process proceeds.

  In step SF222, the hall server obtains the security board information requested by the CU control unit 323F from the key management server from the key management server, and the hall server obtains the board authentication key from the security board information. Next, in step SF223, the hall server determines whether or not the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323F that requested the security board information is in a non-operating state for the same purpose as in step SF213 described above. When the gaming machine becomes non-operating, the hall server transmits the acquired board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F in step SF224, and the CU control unit 323F receives the update information in the security board information in SC325bF. Send to. Next, in step SF225, based on the substrate authentication key acquired in step SF2224, the CU control unit 323F processes the substrate authentication key as an encryption key from the mode in which processing is performed using the substrate initial key as an encryption key (substrate initial key mode). The communication mode is switched to the mode (board authentication key mode) to advance the process, and the process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 123 (b) showing the communication mode switching process between the SC and the communication control IC, in step SF226, the SC 325bF acquires update information from the CU control unit 323F. As described above, the CU control unit 323F transmits update information to the SC 325bF at step SF224. Receiving it, the SC 325bF acquires the update information. Next, in step SF227, the SC 325bF generates this authentication key from the acquired update information. Next, in step SF228, the SC 325bF obtains the authentication key from the mode (provisional authentication key mode) in which the temporary authentication key is used as the encryption key for the communication mode between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF based on the generated real authentication key. Switch to a mode in which processing is performed as an encryption key (this authentication key mode).

  According to such an embodiment, even when the hall server receives the board authentication key from the key management server in the restricted communication mode, the board authentication key is immediately transmitted to the CU when the P units are in operation. Provided in the restricted communication mode because the board authentication key is sent from the hall server to the CU and switched to the normal communication mode on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state, instead of switching to the normal communication mode. It is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages by affecting the game that has been played.

<Authentication operation between SC325bF and CU control unit 323F>
Next, the unified store code check and the board manufacturer code authentication will be described in more detail.

  First, with reference to FIG. 124, the unified store code check process by SC325bF will be described. This process is an authentication operation in which the SC 325bF checks the unified store code notified at the time of board connection request and the unified store code notified last time, and determines that the installed store has changed if there is a mismatch. SC325bF determines whether or not the previous unified store code stored is a dummy code (step SF1101). For example, all data of the dummy code of the unified store code is “0xFF”. This dummy code is used in place of the normal unified store code at the time of shipment before the CU3F is installed in the game hall (store), and is already stored in the SC 325bF at the time of shipment. Then, at the time of shipment, the dummy code is input to the SC 325bF via the CU control unit 323F, and the SC 325bF authenticates the input dummy code and the stored dummy code by matching. The dummy code is stored as a default in the hall server of the amusement hall as a temporary shop code when a unified store code has not yet been acquired for a newly opened game hall (hall). Then, the dummy code is downloaded from the hall server to the CU3F installed in the game hall of the newly opened store, and the SC325bF determines that the downloaded dummy code and the stored dummy code match and authenticates, and the P unit 2F Allows gaming.

  The hall server that has acquired the regular unified store code transmits the unified store code to the CU control unit 323F. Upon receiving the request, the CU control unit 323F transmits the unified store code to the SC 325bF at the next board connection request when the power is turned on. Receiving it, SC325bF, when determining that the previous unified store code stored is a dummy code (step SF1101: YES), updates the storage to the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request. However, it does not initialize the board authentication key and the main authentication key information and operates by taking over the previous authentication modes. Thereafter, the SC 325bF stores the authentication log information (step SF1106). The initialization of the board authentication key and the main authentication key information is a process that is required when a CU3F installed in a certain game hall is moved to another game hall, but a dummy code stored in the SC325bF. Is updated to the unified store code when the amusement hall of the newly-opened store obtains the unified store code and downloads the unified store code to the CU3F. It is not necessary to initialize the key and the authentication key information. Conversely, if the board authentication key and this authentication key information are initialized in such a case, a request for obtaining the board authentication key is required again, increasing the number of board initial key operations (timed operation) in one business day, and timed operation. There is a disadvantage that the grace period is reduced. In order to avoid such inconvenience, control is performed so that the board authentication key and the main authentication key information are not initialized.

  On the other hand, if the SC325bF determines that the previous unified store code stored is not a dummy code (step SF1101: NO), the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request and the stored previous store code are stored. It is determined whether or not the unified store code matches (step SF1102).

  When the SC325bF determines that the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request matches the previous unified store code stored (step SF1102: YES), the authentication process is performed on the board initial key. Transition to an authentication sequence, or transition to a board authentication key authentication sequence (step SF1103). Note that the SC 325bF transitions to the board authentication key authentication sequence when the previous authentication mode is the board authentication key mode, and shifts to the board initial key authentication sequence when the previous authentication mode is any other authentication mode.

  On the other hand, if the SC 325bF determines that the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request does not match the previous unified store code stored (step SF1102: NO), the board authentication key information , And this authentication key information is initialized (cleared) (step SF1104). Such a mismatch in the unified store code occurs when a CU3F that has been installed in a certain game hall is moved to another game hall. Since the CU3F has been moved to another amusement hall, the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information used in the previous amusement hall are initialized (cleared) to ensure security. When the unified store code notified from the CU control unit 323F is changed, the SC 325bF sets the authentication key initialization (clear) in the communication control IC 325aF and starts authentication using the temporary authentication key. Note that when the SC325bF initializes (clears) the authentication key information, the communication control IC 325aF may also control to initialize (clear) the authentication key information, and particularly performs such control. The authentication may be returned to the temporary authentication key because the SC 325bF is not the main authentication key at the next authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Further, the SC 325bF initializes (clears) the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information in step SF1104, and then transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence and the temporary authentication key sequence (step SF1105).

  In step SF1103, the SC 325bF transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence, or transitions to the board authentication key authentication sequence, and in step SF1104, transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence, and then stores the authentication log information. (Step SF1106).

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart for explaining the board manufacturer code authentication operation. The board maker code authentication is an authentication operation in which the SC 325bF and the CU control unit 323F perform authentication using the board maker code stored as initial information. Referring to FIG. 125, first, SC 325bF and CU control unit 323F perform unit authentication by a challenge / response method using the stored board manufacturer code. (Step SF1201). The response code generated at the time of single unit authentication is generated, for example, by performing block encryption of the challenge code using the stored board manufacturer code as a key and then hashing with a hash function.

  The SC 325bF determines whether the authentication result obtained by checking the response code generated by the CU control unit 323F with respect to the generated challenge code is normal (step SF1202). If the SC 325bF determines that the authentication result is normal (step SF1202: YES), the SC 325bF determines whether it has already been authenticated with the board authentication key (step SF1203). On the other hand, when determining that the authentication result is not normal (abnormal) (step SF1202: NO), the SC 325bF determines whether or not the authentication result is abnormal n times (for example, three times) continuously (step SF1204).

  If the SC 325bF determines that it has already been authenticated with the board authentication key (step SF1203: YES), the process proceeds to the board authentication key authentication process and maintains the board authentication key authentication sequence (step SF1205). On the other hand, if the SC 325bF determines that it has not been authenticated with the board authentication key (step SF1203: NO), the process proceeds to the board initial key authentication process (step SF1206).

  SC325bF returns a process to step SF1201, when it is judged that it is not abnormal continuously n times (step SF1204: NO). On the other hand, when the SC 325bF determines that the abnormality is continuous n times (step SF1204: YES), the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information are initialized (cleared) in order to ensure security (step SF1207). . Thereby, the inconvenience that the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information are stolen can be prevented. Thereafter, the SC 325bF makes a transition to the board initial key authentication process (step SF1208).

  The SC 325bF maintains the board authentication key authentication sequence in step SF1205, or transitions to the board initial key authentication process in steps SF1206 and SF1208, and then stores the authentication log information (step SF1209).

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart for explaining the reception interval monitoring process. The reception interval monitoring process is a process executed by the SC 325bF. First, the SC 325bF determines whether or not a message has been received (SF810).

  The CU control unit 323F includes a timer (time measuring means) for measuring a specified time, and a communication unit (communication means) connected to the SC 325bF for transmitting a telegram, and the SC 325bF has a specified time interval (for example, 200 ms). ) Send a message every time. For this reason, the CU control unit 323F waits for a response message to be received for a specified time after transmitting a certain message, receives the response message, and transmits the next message. Further, the CU control unit 323F waits for reception of a response message for a specified time after transmitting a certain message, and retransmits a message with the same content if a response message cannot be received. If a response message cannot be received in response to the second retransmission of the message, it is determined that communication has been interrupted.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF receives various request messages from the CU control unit 323F at regular time intervals (for example, 200 ms), and returns response messages corresponding to the request messages. If NO in SF810, the process ends. If YES in SF810, it is determined whether the reception is before the specified time interval (SF811).

  In SF811, when it is determined that the reception is before the specified time interval from the previous message reception, the number of reception of the message before the specified time interval reaches the n1th (however, n1> 1) times in succession. It is determined whether or not (SF812). As described above, a situation in which messages that should be received at regular time intervals are continuously transmitted one after another before the regular time intervals cannot normally occur. Such a situation may occur, for example, when various messages are transmitted from the outside one after another in a short time for the purpose of illegally analyzing the operation of SC325bF. Therefore, if NO in SF812, the process ends. If YES, error information is transmitted (SF813).

  This error information is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F of the P platform 2F via the IC 325aF, for example. Receiving the error information, the payout control unit 171F stops the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F to make the game impossible. Note that error information may be displayed on the display 54F of the P platform 2F instead of or in addition to the inoperable state. Or in SF813, it is good also as what transmits error information to CU control part 323F.

  After the processing of SF813, transmission of a response message for the message received in SF810 is prohibited (SF814). Further, the function of receiving a message from the CU control unit 323F is stopped (SF815). As a result of SF 814 and SF 815, it is possible to prevent an illegal act to obtain a response message for the purpose of analysis.

  In this flowchart, the number of times of receiving a message before the specified time interval has reached the n1th time continuously. However, if the message before the specified time interval is received even once, NO is returned in SF812. It may be determined.

  Further, only one or two processes of SF813 to SF815 may be executed. Furthermore, instead of the processing of SF814 and SF815, the timing for responding to the received message may be delayed from the normal time. For example, normally, the response message is transmitted so that the response message reaches the partner in 200 ms after the partner (CU control unit 323F) transmits the message, but the interval is increased (for example, three times the normal). You may do it. As a result, even if a fraudulent act of sending a message at a shorter time interval than usual is performed, the response to the fraud will be slow, so that the efficiency of fraud analysis will be extremely poor, and it will be difficult to revise the fraud Can do.

  Further, the process of slowing down transmission of a response message and the process of prohibiting transmission of a response message (SF814) may be combined. For example, when it is determined YES in SF812, a process of slowing down transmission of a response message is executed, and then a response message of SF814 is detected when a predetermined number of message receptions within a specified time interval from the response message transmission is detected. A process for prohibiting the transmission of a message may be executed.

  In addition, the reception interval monitoring process as shown in FIG. 126 may be performed not only by SC325bF but also by any device that receives a message from the other party. For example, the CU control unit 323F may execute a reception interval monitoring process for a message transmitted from a higher-level server (for example, a key management server). In addition, the IC 325aF may perform a reception interval monitoring process on a message transmitted from the SC 325bF. Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F may perform a reception interval monitoring process on a message transmitted from the IC 325aF. In this case, the reception interval monitoring process is executed between the CU 3F and the gaming machine (for example, P 2F). In addition, this processing may be applied in transmission / reception processing between a plurality of gaming machines such as the CU3F, the P stand 2F, the jet counter, and the POS terminal.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart for explaining the abnormal message monitoring process. The abnormal message monitoring process is a process executed by the SC 325bF. First, the SC 325bF determines whether or not a message has been received (SF820). If NO in SF820, the process ends. If YES in SF820, it is determined whether or not the received message is a command abnormal message (SF821). If not, it is determined whether or not the received message is a communication error message (SF826). .

  Here, a communication error message is a message that was originally detected as a normal message such as a message in which an error was detected by a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) or a message in which the data length was detected to be different from a predetermined length. A message that arrived after being garbled from the original message due to the occurrence of an error in the message generation process or noise on the communication line even though it was scheduled to be transmitted.

  On the other hand, the command abnormal message is a message that has a correct data length and does not detect an error in CRC, but is different from a command code included in the message. Therefore, the command abnormal message may be an illegal message for the purpose of causing an illegal operation.

  If it is determined in SF 826 that the message is not a communication error message, a normal message has been received, and the error message monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in SF826 that the communication abnormal message is received, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous reception of such a communication abnormal message has reached n3 times (SF827). Here, n3 is “3”, for example. If n3 times has not been reached, the CU control unit 323F is requested to retransmit the message (SF825). That is, when a communication abnormal message is received, two retransmissions are allowed.

  If all of the messages received for a total of n3 times, including the reception of the first message, are communication error messages, the result is YES in SF827, and it is determined that there is a communication error between CU and SC (SF828). In this case, CU-SC communication abnormality information is transmitted (SF829).

  The CU-SC communication abnormality information is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F of the P platform 2F via the communication control IC 325aF, for example. The payout control unit 171F that has received the CU-SC command abnormality information stops the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F, and puts it into a game-impossible state. Instead of or in addition to the game disabled state, the CU-SC command abnormality information may be displayed on the display 54F of the P platform 2F. Alternatively, in SF829, CU-SC communication abnormality information may be transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in SF821 that the received message is a command abnormal message, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive receptions of such a command abnormal message has reached n2 (SF822). Here, n2 is “4”, for example, which is one greater than the threshold n3 related to the communication error message set to “3”.

  When it is determined NO in SF822, the CU control unit 323F is requested to retransmit the message. That is, when a command abnormal message is received, four retransmissions are allowed.

  If all of the messages received n2 times in total, including the reception of the first message, are command abnormal messages, the result is YES in SF822, and it is determined that the CU-SC command is abnormal (illegal) (SF823). ). In this case, CU-SC command abnormality information is transmitted (SF824).

  The CU-SC command abnormality information is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F of the P platform 2F via the communication control IC 325aF, for example. The payout control unit 171F that has received the CU-SC command abnormality information stops the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F, and puts it into a game-impossible state. Instead of or in addition to the game disabled state, the CU-SC command abnormality information may be displayed on the display 54F of the P platform 2F. Alternatively, in SF829, CU-SC communication abnormality information may be transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  In this way, by making the threshold relating to the command abnormal message different from the threshold relating to the communication abnormal message, it is possible to distinguish between the retransmission of the message due to mere garbled data and the possibility that an illegal command is transmitted. In particular, the command code that is abnormal even if the normal data retransmission limit (n3 is included) is exceeded by making the threshold for the command abnormal message larger than the threshold for the message retransmission due to garbled data. It is possible to confirm that a message including the message has been repeatedly transmitted, so that it is possible to determine a situation where the possibility of fraud is high and to notify that there is a possibility of fraud based on the determination.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart for explaining gaming machine chip inquiry processing. The gaming machine chip inquiry process is a process executed by the CU control unit 323F. An example of this processing is shown in FIG. 117 (game machine chip information inquiry sequence) and FIG. 120 (game machine chip information inquiry time-out sequence).

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification (SF830). This requests the SC325bF for gaming machine chip information to make an inquiry to the key management server. Upon receiving this gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification, the SC 325bF requests gaming machine chip information from the P table 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Next, the inquiry waiting timer is reset (SF831). The inquiry waiting timer is a timer for measuring a response waiting time for the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification, and is reset every time the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification is transmitted, and a new timing is started.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine chip inquiry result is received from SC325bF (SF832). The gaming machine chip inquiry result includes an acquisition result indicating whether or not chip information has been acquired, a manufacturer code, a board serial number, a main control chip ID, a payout chip ID, and the like. If the gaming machine chip inquiry result has not been received, it is determined whether or not the inquiry timer has timed out (SF833). If a time-out occurs, a time-out process is executed (SF838). In the timeout process, a status information request is transmitted as shown in FIG. 136, and a status information response (with chip information inquiry) is waited.

  If the inquiry timer has not timed out in SF833, it is determined whether a health check whose operation designation is a gaming machine chip information inquiry request has been received from the key management server (SF834). That is, it is determined whether or not an inquiry request for gaming machine chip information has been received from the key management server. If an inquiry request for gaming machine chip information has been received from the key management server, a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification is transmitted to the SC 325bF (SF835), and the inquiry waiting timer is reset (SF836). As a result, time counting by the inquiry wait timer is started from the beginning. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF832.

  In other words, even if a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification has already been transmitted and a response request for gaming machine chip information is newly received separately from the key management server, even when waiting for a response thereto Then, a game machine chip inquiry instruction notification is transmitted again.

  By processing in this way, it becomes possible to quickly return a response to a request from a key management server connected to many halls (CUs in the hall) existing throughout the country. That is, since the “gaming machine chip information inquiry request” by the health check request is a compulsory instruction from the key management server, the SC 325bF reliably manages the key even in the gaming machine chip information inquiry mode in response to the request from the CU control unit 323F. The CU control unit 323F executes an inquiry for gaming machine chip information until the information reaches the server.

  In SF834, when a health check (operation designation = game machine chip information inquiry request) has not been received from the key management server, the process returns to SF832, and the process proceeds to a step of determining whether or not a game machine chip inquiry result has been received.

  Eventually, when the gaming machine chip inquiry result is received in SF832, the result is transmitted to the upper server (key management server) (SF837), and the process is terminated.

  Here, the case of health check (operation designation = game machine chip information inquiry request) has been described as an example. However, in the above processing, the CU control unit 323F performs a health check (operation designation = security board information inquiry request). ) Is received in the same manner.

  116 and 119, CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification to SC325bF, and waits for a response from SC325bF until a security board information inquiry timeout. However, if a health check (operation designation = security board information inquiry request) is received from the host server (key management server) before the timeout occurs, the CU control unit 323F sends a security board inquiry instruction notification to the SC 325bF without waiting for the timeout. Resend to.

<Health Check>
Next, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, for example, even when communication between the CU3F or P stand 2F and the key management server is interrupted, the CU 3F or P stand 2F is stably operated. It is possible to continue operation using the timed operation function. However, there is a possibility that illegal operation is performed by operating the CU 3F or the P stand 2F without intentionally using the timed operation function and communicating with the key management server. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F operating using the timed operation function continues to be disconnected from the key management server for a predetermined period, the timed operation function Is configured to be disabled. In the present embodiment, even if the timed operation function of the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is disabled, the setting of the timed operation function is enabled again when communication with the key management server is recovered and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram for describing processing for invalidating the timed operation function in the gaming system according to the present embodiment. With reference to FIG. 129, processing for invalidating the timed operation function will be described. The processing for invalidating the timed operation function is performed in a predetermined manner between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F, between the hall server 801F and the CU control unit 323F, and between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  First, the CU 3F including the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF communicates with the P stand 2F, so that a player can play a game on the P stand 2F. At this time, for example, in communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, encryption communication based on the secret key A is performed, and a status information request command from the CU control unit 323F is also a response of a status information response from the SC 325bF. Is also encrypted based on the secret key A.

  The secret key A is periodically updated by a health check from the key management server 800F, so that communication between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can be normally performed. The key management server 800F illustrated in FIG. 129 transmits a health check request command to the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF to perform a health check during normal communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. However, since the communication between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is disconnected, the health check request command does not reach the CU control unit 323F.

  The health check from the key management server 800F is performed once a day, for example, and the health check response to the transmitted health check request cannot be obtained because the communication between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is disconnected. The health check request is sent on the next day without re-sending.

  The communication between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF continues communication without any limitation because of the timed operation function even when the health check from the key management server 800F is not performed and the secret key A is not updated. Can be done. For this reason, communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F can be performed normally, and the CU 3F and the P stand 2F can be normally operated to enable the business on the P stand 2F.

  However, even if the key management server 800F transmits a health check request command and does not reach the CU control unit 323F, for example, if the state continues for 10 days (10 times if health check is performed once a day), It is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded. If it is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded, the SC 325bF disables the timed operation function and cannot perform communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using the secret key A. When the secret key A cannot be used in the communication between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF, the communication content is greatly limited, and the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is also limited. Therefore, the operation of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F can be disabled, or can be operated with significant restrictions.

  In the communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, encryption communication based on the secret key A is not performed, and the status information request command from the CU control unit 323F and the response of the status information response from the SC 325bF are also the secret key. Not encrypted based on A. Instead, for example, communication may be performed with encryption based on the initial key A held in the CU control unit 323F or SC325bF. In this case, for example, commands that can be communicated between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF are greatly limited.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the timed operation function is invalidated when the state in which communication with the key management server is interrupted cannot be continuously checked for a predetermined period of time, so the timed operation function is used. Thus, it is possible to prevent the P stand 2F from operating illegally. The invalid condition for disabling the timed operation function is that there is a period during which the health check cannot be performed for 10 days. However, the health check request command is not received and the response of the health check response cannot be received. It may be a condition that the predetermined number of times has been reached.

  Next, processing for enabling the timed operation function for a gaming system in which the timed operation function is disabled will be described. FIG. 130 is a diagram for describing processing for enabling the timed operation function in the gaming system according to the present embodiment. With reference to FIG. 130, processing for enabling the timed operation function will be described. The process for enabling the timed operation function is performed in a predetermined process between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F, between the hall server 801F and the CU control unit 323F, and between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  First, the CU 3F including the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF communicates with the P-unit 2F, transmits a status information request command from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF, and receives a response of the status information response from the SC 325bF to the CU. It is transmitted to the control unit 323F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF operate in a timed manner when an invalid condition is established in a state in which a health check response to the transmitted health check request cannot be obtained because communication between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is not possible. The function is disabled.

  Thereafter, when the line between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is restored and communication is possible, a health check response to the health check request transmitted from the key management server 800F is obtained. The state in which the health check from the key management server 800F can be performed has passed for three days, and the key management server 800F makes a health check request on the fourth day. If the health check is enabled, encrypted communication based on the secret key A is performed in communication between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF.

  Specifically, the key management server 800F transmits a health check request command to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F receiving the command transmits a health check request command to the CU control unit 323F. Further, the CU control unit 323F receives a command from the hall server 801F and transmits a board state request command including a health check request as additional information to the SC 325bF.

  Upon receiving the board status request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF enables the timed operation function that has been disabled because the line is restored and the health check has been normally performed for three days. By enabling the timed operation function, even if communication between the key management server 800F and the hall server 801F is interrupted in the future and the health check cannot be performed, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are concealed using the timed operation function. Communication based on the key A can be performed. As a result, the CU 3F and the P stand 2F can be stably operated even if a failure such as a disconnection of communication with the key management server 800F occurs.

  Further, the SC 325bF receives the substrate state request command and transmits a substrate state response response including a health check response as additional information to the CU control unit 323F. The health check response includes the state information of SC 325bF and the state information of P base 2F received from P base 2F. Although not shown in FIG. 93, the SC 325bF makes a health check request to the P base 2F and receives a health check response from the P base 2F, thereby acquiring the status information of the P base 2F.

  The CU control unit 323F receives the response of the substrate state response from the SC 325bF, and transmits the response of the health check response to the hall server 801F. The response of the health check response includes, for example, information on the authentication state between the CU control unit 323F and SC325bF. Further, the hall server 801F receives the response of the health check response from the CU control unit 323F, and transmits the response of the health check response to the key management server 800F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the timed operation function is invalid when the health check can be performed continuously for a predetermined period when the line with the key management server is restored and communication is possible. Since it is enabled, it is possible to operate stably without impeding the operation of the amusement hall using the timed operation function. In addition, since it is not necessary for the clerk to operate each CU 3F or P stand 2F in order to validate the timed operation function that is invalid, the work of the clerk can be reduced. Note that the return condition for enabling the timed operation function is that the health check can be performed for 3 days. However, the return condition is not limited to this, and a health check request command is sent to respond to the health check response. It is also possible to make it a condition that the number of times that can be received has reached a predetermined number. Also, the period during which health check is disabled (for example, 10 days), which is an invalid condition for disabling the timed operation function, is compared to the period during which health check is enabled (for example, 3 days), which is a return condition for enabling the timed operation function. This makes it possible to operate the CU 3F and the P stand 2F stably without impeding the operation of the game hall while preventing unauthorized use of the timed operation function.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F in the P stand 2F will be described in more detail. First, in the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 62, communication between the main control board 16F provided on the game board 26F and the payout control board 17F provided on the front frame 5F is performed by the main control provided on the main control board 16F. This is performed between the portion 161F and the payout control portion 171F provided on the front frame 5F. FIG. 131 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between main control unit 161F, payout control unit 171F, and communication control IC.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F illustrated in FIG. 131 will be described below as being configured with one chip, but a similar function may be configured with a plurality of chips. The main control unit 161F includes a main control circuit 161aF, a communication control circuit 161bF, and a main control storage unit 161cF. The main control circuit 161aF performs various processes in the main control unit 161F (for example, a process of counting winning balls based on a signal from the winning sensor 162F or detecting fraud based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163F). Is a circuit for executing a control program for The communication control circuit 161bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The main control storage unit 161cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of a nonvolatile memory. . Note that since the main control storage unit 161cF includes FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171F includes a payout control circuit 171aF, a communication control circuit 171bF, and a payout control storage unit 171cF. The payout control circuit 171aF controls the various processing (the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F by the payout control unit 171F, or from the game ball to the holding ball to the CU3F based on the signal from the counting button 28F. A circuit for executing a control program for performing a process of requesting conversion). The communication control circuit 171bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and cryptographic communication between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. The payout control storage unit 171cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, data, and the like to be executed by the payout control unit 171F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM that is a nonvolatile memory. Since the payout control storage unit 171cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161bF and 171b will be described in detail. FIG. 132 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 161bF for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. First, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F in the front frame 5F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F and receive information of the payout control unit 171F by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171F in the encryption communication control unit 600F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161bF can set a timeout time for communication response and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161aF and encryption communication for performing encryption communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 600F is provided.

  Examples of the registers included in the communication control circuit 161bF include an authentication status register 611F, an authentication interrupt setting register 612F, a transmission data buffer 613F, a transmission data number register 614F, an information transmission clear register 615F, a main control game information register 616F, and a payout control game. An information register 617F, a recovery communication completion register 618F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 611F indicates whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161F has been authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 612F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 613F is a buffer for writing game information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the game information is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Written. Also, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613F with a non-volatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and is written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is eliminated. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the transmission data buffer 613F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 613F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161F payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613F. The information transmission clear register 615F is a register for writing a request to clear data in the transmission data buffer 613F.

  The main control game information register 616F is a register into which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F and transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control game information register 617F is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F.

  The recovery communication completion register 618F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 619F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 600F communicating with the payout control unit 171F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171bF is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The communication control circuit 171bF performs communication control on a portion of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. A configuration part for performing cryptographic communication with the circuit 171b1F and the communication control IC 325aF will be described below as a communication control circuit 171b2F.

  First, FIG. 133 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1F for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. First, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the main control unit 161F of the game board 26F and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F and receive the information of the main control unit 161F by setting the communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161F and the communication control IC 325aF in the encryption communication control unit 700F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171b1F can set a communication response time-out time and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 133, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF, and encryption communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 700F is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1F include, for example, an authentication status register 711F, an authentication interrupt setting register 712F, a data reception register 713F, a reception data number register 714F, an information reception clear register 715F, a payout control game information register 716F, and a main control game. An information register 717F, a recovery request / completion register 718F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 711F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 712F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The data reception register 713F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and the buffer is a FIFO (First In, First Out) game. Information is written. In addition, by configuring the data reception register 713F with a nonvolatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the data reception register 713F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the data reception register 713F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the data reception register 713F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713F. The information reception clear register 715F is a register in which a request for clearing data in the data reception register 713F is written.

  The payout control game information register 716F is a register into which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F and transmitted to the main control unit 161F. The main control game information register 717F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 717F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  The recovery request / completion register 718F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not the recovery communication is completed is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 719F is information requesting to clear data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the main control unit 161F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1F includes a communication timeout time setting register 719aF, a communication interval time setting register 719bF, and a main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF.

  After the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F expires, the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF transfers the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F to the data reception register 713F. This register sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713F can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired (for example, from 5 seconds to 15 seconds). About seconds). As a result, for example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between the nails of the game area 27F) when authentication is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the floating ball has won a prize. It is possible to securely store and protect the information. Even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage with a long ball residence time, it is assumed that the effective period can be set long so that the information that the floating ball has won can be reliably stored.

  Originally, information cannot be written in the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F from the viewpoint of security after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. However, in the data reception register 713F, for example, it is necessary to write information indicating that the floating ball has won after authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1F sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF, and this setting is performed in the encryption communication control unit 700F, whereby the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Information can be written to the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F as long as it is within the valid period even after the authentication between and is terminated. It should be noted that the set value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF can be read after this setting is made by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  FIG. 134 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b2F for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. As shown in FIG. 134, the communication control circuit 171b2F performs, for example, an authentication status register 721F, an authentication interrupt setting register 722F, a transmission data buffer 723aF, a data reception register 723bF, and a transmission data number register 724F in order to perform cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. , Received data number register 725F, recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F, recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F, recovery request / completion register 728F, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729aF, and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729bF and the like.

  The authentication status register 721F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 722F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 723aF is a buffer for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the business message is written to the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is included. The data reception register 723bF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which a business message transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F is written. Is written.

  By configuring the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF with non-volatile memory, communication disconnection occurs between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF, and the buffer and register that have not been transmitted due to communication failure are stored in the buffer and register. The written business message is retained even after returning. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program to generate a business message written in the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF becomes unnecessary, and the payout control unit It is possible to reduce the processing load of 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Note that since the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured by a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723aF. The reception data number register 725F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723bF.

  The recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F is a register in which the number of addition spheres is written when an addition sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power-off recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is a register in which the number of subtraction spheres is written when a subtraction sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after the power-off recovery. Note that the recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and whether or not the recovery communication is completed are written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 729F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the communication control IC 325aF, and that the data has been deleted ( This is a register in which information indicating "clear completion" is written.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the main control storage unit 161cF and the payout control memory when returning from a communication disabled state such as a power failure. The recovery process which transmits the predetermined information memorize | stored in the part 171cF is performed. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F perform a recovery completion confirmation process for resuming the generation of predetermined information by executing the user program on the condition that the recovery process ends. Specifically, the recovery completion confirmation process will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 135 is a flowchart for explaining the recovery completion confirmation processing.

  First, when the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are turned on in order to recover from an incommunicable state such as a power interruption, the main control circuit 161aF and the payout control circuit 171aF start processing of an authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication result is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711 of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F confirm whether or not the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711 (step SF291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711 (step SF291: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF291.

  When the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711 (step SF291: YES), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F recover the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F. It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating completion is written (step SF292). If the flag indicating the completion of recovery is not written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF292.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F start the processing of the user program when the recovery completion flag is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: YES). (Step SF293). As means for starting the processing of the user program, for example, a means for transmitting a signal for starting the processing of the user program to start the processing of the user program and a stopping means for stopping the processing of the user program are provided. There are means for starting the processing of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be restored by the recovery processing is determined. Is prevented from being written, the processing of the user program can be resumed appropriately.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

  FIG. 136 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named power-on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This power-on notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F that power is turned on and communication is started. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “power-on reception” to the main control unit 161F. This power-on reception response is a response that the main control unit 161F receives a power-on notification and starts communication.

  Next, a command having a game state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This gaming state notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F of the gaming state. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “game state response” to the main control unit 161F. This gaming state response is a response that a gaming state notification has been received with respect to the main control unit 161F.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F by processing executed by the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described based on FIGS. 137 and 138.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, referring to FIG. 137, a sequence that is processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence shown in FIG. 137 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is normally completed.

  The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is performed by a polling method using the main control unit 161F as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. Note that communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171F sets “communication line disconnection” and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161F cannot be received even after 1 second has elapsed since the response was transmitted.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171F transmits a response command to the main control unit 161F only when normal data is received. If the main control unit 161F does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, it retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The serial numbers used for transmission and reception are stored in the storage unit for both the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and are used for command normality check, power-off recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when power is turned on, communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is performed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and an authentication new sequence is started. . As described above, the authentication sequence is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711 that the chip IDs of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are authenticated and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated. . Furthermore, the process which produces | generates the encryption key and decryption key which are used for the encryption communication of the main control part 161F and the payout control part 171F by the said authentication sequence is performed. The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F after the process is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with a serial number “n”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n” without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161F transmits a game state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number “n + 1”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161F counts up the serial number to “n + 2” and transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F. Then, the payout control unit 171F sets “n + 2” without counting up the serial number, and returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F.

  In the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the interval from the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n” to the command transmission of the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1”, the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1” The interval from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n + 2” is 200 ms each.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, a process when the status information request is unreached due to power failure / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 138 particularly shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the payout control unit 171F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the gaming state notification is not reached (from the main control unit 161F). FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing when a post-recovery communication partner matches with a payout control unit 171F).

  Referring to FIG. 138, before the power interruption occurs during the game, main controller 161F transmits a gaming state notification including serial number = n to payout controller 171F. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F transmits a game state reception including the serial number = n to the main control unit 161F.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the payout control unit 171F during the game, when a game state notification including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F, the payout control unit 171F The game state notification cannot be received because of the state. Thereafter, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171F is not transmitted, the main control unit 161F performs control to stop communication assuming that the power supply is cut off after one second.

  Thereafter, when an authentication sequence is started between the power-on and main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F includes a power source including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous last transmission serial number) = n + 1. The insertion notification is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Since the game state reception serial number transmitted to the main control unit 161F before the power interruption occurred is “n”, the payout control unit 171F has a payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171F = n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171F does not match the main control sequence number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161F. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171F performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171F based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161F. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171F transmits power-on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161F.

  The main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F performs processing with the contents after the recovery process, and transmits a game state reception including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F transmits the game state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F.

  The above-described recovery process is performed because the serial numbers do not match, but information (for example, the number of game information, prize ball information, etc.) included in the recovery game information is the main control unit 161F and payout control. The recovery processing may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171F.

<Configuration of open detection and connection detection>
Next, a configuration for detecting the opening and connection of the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment will be described. The P stand 2F according to the present embodiment has a configuration for performing detection of opening of the glass door 6F, detection of opening of the front frame 5F, and detection of connection between the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. FIG. 139 is a block diagram for explaining opening detection and connection detection of the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment. The front frame 5F and the game board 26F shown in FIG. 139 (a) are electrically connected by a concave drawer connector 33F provided on the front frame 5F side and a convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F side. . The front frame 5F includes an open detection part 53F, a front frame relay board 52F, a payout control board 17F, and a concave drawer connector 33F connected in series by a loop-shaped power line 500F. That is, the power line 500F is wired to the open detection unit 53F, the front frame relay board 52F, the payout control board 17F, and the concave drawer connector 33F provided in the front frame 5F, and the respective connections are disconnected (for example, disconnection or When the connector is disconnected, etc., no current flows through the power line 500F. The game board 26F has a convex drawer connector 32F and a main control board 16F. By connecting the convex drawer connector 32F to the concave drawer connector 33F, the main control board 16F is also connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500F. That is, the power line 500F is also wired to the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F and the main control board 16F, and when the connection is disconnected (for example, disconnection or disconnection of the connector), the power line 500F No current flows in the. The convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F correspond to board connection detection means that can detect electrical connection between the front frame 5F and the game board 26F by disconnecting.

  Power line 500F is included in the wiring in a signal cable (for example, signal cable 36F shown in FIG. 61) that transmits and receives signals between front frame 5F and game board 26F. The signal cable of the front frame 5F and the signal cable of the game board 26F are connected by a 26-pin or 32-pin convex drawer connector 32F and a concave drawer connector 33F. In FIG. 139 (a), the signal cable is not shown, and only the loop-shaped power line 500F is shown.

  FIG. 139 (b) is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the opening detection unit 53F. The open detection unit 53F includes an open detection switch 12aF, a current detector 12bF, and a count counter 120F. The opening detection switch 12aF is a glass door opening detection switch 12F that detects opening of the glass door 6F and a front frame opening detection switch 13F that detects opening of the front frame 5F. When the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened ( OFF state) The loop-shaped power line 500F is connected in series so as to be disconnected. FIG. 139 (b) shows a case where one open detection switch 12aF is shown for the sake of simplicity, but in an actual configuration, the glass door open detection switch 12F and the front frame open detection switch 13F An open detection switch 12aF is provided corresponding to each.

  The current detector 12bF is connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500F, and detects a current flowing through the loop-shaped power line 500F. When the current flowing through the loop-shaped power line 500F is no longer detected, the current detector 12bF detects that the open detection switch 12aF is in the OFF state or the connection between the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F is disconnected. can do. The current detector 12bF outputs a detection signal to the count counter 120F when detecting that the open detection switch 12aF is in the OFF state or the connection between the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F is disconnected. The current detector 12bF is backed up so that the main power is supplied from the power supply circuit of the P base 2F and can operate even when the main power is turned off (for example, at night). Power from the power supply is being supplied.

  The counting counter 120F indicates the number of times the glass door 6F is opened, the number of times the front frame 5F is opened, and the number of times that the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are disconnected based on the detection signal from the current detector 12bF. Count. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing a control circuit of the count counter 120F shown in FIG. 139 (b). Referring to FIG. 140, a counting counter 120F includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 10aF as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 10bF storing an operation program and control data of the CPU 10aF, and a work of the CPU 10aF. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 10cF that functions as an area and an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 10dF are provided.

  The count counter 120F is supplied with the power of the main power supply from the power supply circuit of the P base 2F, and the power of the backup power supply so that it can operate even when the main power supply is turned off (for example, at night). Is supplied. A clock signal (CLK signal) and a chip select signal (CS signal) are input from the payout control board 17F shown in FIG. 62, and a data signal indicating the value of the number of detections counted by the count counter 120F is a payout control unit. It is output to 171F.

  The counter 120F counts the total number of times the glass door 6F has been opened, the number of times the front frame 5F has been opened, and the connection between the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F, and indicates the number of detection times. Output data signal. The counting counter 120F can individually detect and count the number of times the glass door 6F is opened, the number of times the front frame 5F is opened, and the number of times the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are disconnected. You may comprise. In addition, the number of times the main control board 16F is removed from the game board 26F by the connecting portion of the power line 500F of the game board 26F and the power line 500F of the main control board 16F functioning as main control connection detection means is also counted by the counter 120F. Can be detected. The connecting portion between the power line 500F of the game board 26F and the power line 500F of the main control board 16F may be connected by a connector such as a drawer connector or may be directly soldered and connected. Here, the power line 500F of the main control board 16F is configured as a part of the loop-shaped power line 500F.

  Next, based on FIG. 141, the detection of the opening of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F and the disconnection of the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F will be described. In the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 141 (a), the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened, and the opening detection unit 53F and the front frame relay board 52F are electrically disconnected. When the opening detector 53F and the front frame relay board 52F are electrically disconnected, no current flows through the loop-shaped power line 500F, and the current detector 12bF may detect the opening of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F. it can.

  Further, in the P platform 2F shown in FIG. 141 (b), the connection between the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F is disconnected, and the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are electrically disconnected. The situation is shown. When the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are electrically disconnected, no current flows through the loop-shaped power line 500F (that is, no current flows when the wiring constituting the power line 500F is disconnected). The current detector 12bF can detect disconnection of the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F. As shown in FIG. 141, the open detection switch 12aF of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F and the panel connection detection means of the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are connected in series by a loop-shaped power line 500F. Yes. Therefore, the opening detection unit 53F can detect not only the opening of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F but also the disconnection between the front frame 5F and the game board 26F.

  Next, based on FIG. 142, a storage state of data stored in the RAM 10cF and a state in which a data signal is output in accordance with the input of the CS signal and the CLK signal will be described.

  In the RAM 10cF, a storage area for storing data of 1 to 18 bits of 18 bits is prepared. In the image of the RAM 10cF in FIG. 142, the bit storage areas 1 and 2 are areas for storing the disconnection with the CU3F or the normal state where the disconnection is not normal, and 01 is stored in the normal state. At the time of disconnection, a value other than 01 is stored.

  In the image of the RAM 10cF, the bit data storage areas 3 to 8 indicate the number of times the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened at the start of power OFF of the P base 2F, and the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F. This is a storage value area for storing the number of times of disconnection (disconnection) (hereinafter also simply referred to as the number of detections). This stored value takes a value in the range of 000000 to 111110, and becomes 111111 at the time of overflow exceeding this range.

  Bit data storage areas 9 to 14 in the image in the RAM 10cF are current value storage areas (current value tables) for storing the current values of the number of detections. This current value takes a value in the range of 000000 to 111110. The storage of the current value storage area (current value table) is not initialized by an external operation. However, as will be described with reference to FIG. 143 (c), in a normal time when the power supply of the P stand 2F is ON, when the current value reaches the upper limit, it is counted up again from the initial value and loops.

  The bit data storage areas 15 and 16 in the image of the RAM 10cF take a value of 01 at a normal time that is not a power interruption, and take a value of 10 at a power interruption. The bit data storage areas 17 and 18 in the image of the RAM 10cF take a value of 01 after transmitting the number of detections to the payout control unit 171F, and take a value of 10 before sending.

  As will be described in detail later based on FIG. 143 (b), in the current value storage area (current value table), the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened when the power is interrupted (when the power is turned off), and Each time the mold drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are disconnected (hereinafter also simply referred to as opening the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F), the memory stored in the storage areas 3 to 8 The value is represented as n. Each time the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened, the count is incremented to n + 1, n + 2,... And the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is further opened after being counted up to the upper limit n + 61. The value is 63 (the value at which the round flag is set), and no further count-up is performed.

  Then, when the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned on, it is output to the payout control unit 171F as 12-bit data of 1 to 12, as shown in FIG. This data output indicates a normal time when the bit data of FIGS. 1 and 2 is 01, and a disconnection from the CU3F when the bit data is not 01. For the bit data of 3 to 8, the difference value (value in the range of 000000 to 111110) is output as a difference value obtained by subtracting the current value from the stored value at times other than the above-described overflow time. On the other hand, at the time of overflow, a value of 111111 is output.

  In addition, after the current value storage area (current value table) is counted up to the upper limit n + 61, the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is further opened, and the value becomes 63 (a value for raising the one-round flag). The count up may be continued even after. In that case, instead of outputting the final count value when outputting to the payout control unit 171F, the above-described overflow value “111111” is output.

  The bit data of 9 and 10 has a value of 01 at normal time and 10 at power interruption. Since the output of bit data 9 and 10 is 10, for example, it can be seen that the counter 120F is replaced at night. That is, when the counters 120F are exchanged, both the main power source and the backup power source are not supplied to the counters 120F. In this case, the bit data of 9 and 10 becomes 10, and the 10 As a result, the payout control unit 171F can determine that the count counter 120F has been illegally replaced at night.

  The bit data of 11 and 12 is 01 after the data is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F, and is 10 before the data is transmitted.

  Next, the relationship between the data signal output to the payout control unit 171F and the CLK signal and CS signal input from the payout control board 17F will be described. The RAM 10cF of the counting counter 120F stores the current value of the number of detections from when the game hall is closed and the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned off to when the power is turned on at the start of business the next morning. And after the power supply of P stand 2F is started, the payout control part 171F transmits CS signal and CLK signal to the count counter 120F in order to acquire the detection frequency.

  The CPU 10aF of the counting counter 120F that has received the CS signal and the CLK signal repeatedly loops data until the CS signal falls according to the rising edge of the CS signal, and outputs the data to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F determines that an appropriate data signal has been received when the data signal transmitted repeatedly is read, for example, three times and the same data is read three times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142, when there is no CLK signal for 100 .mu. During the period when CS signal is rising (when it is low level), the data is set to 1 at the next rising edge of CLK signal. Control to discharge from the bit is performed.

  This 100μ is configured so that the gaming machine manufacturer can input and set it in the register of the counting counter 120F. In addition, you may comprise so that it can input and set to a register | resistor in the game hall side.

  In addition, when the round flag is set after the CS signal and the CLK signal have performed a predetermined operation, control is performed to clear the stored value of the RAM 10cF of the count counter 120F and set the value to 000000. For example, the stored value of the CPU (register) 10aF is cleared at a stage where the CLK signal repeats ON and OFF a predetermined number of times after the CS signal becomes low level.

  Note that a backable RAM is used as a memory to detect that the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened and store the count value even when the power of the P base 2F is OFF. If 2F is always powered on, a register may be used instead of RAM.

  Next, based on FIG. 143, the control operation of the CPU 10aF of the count counter 120F will be described. First, referring to FIG. 143 (a), it is determined in step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 whether or not the main power source of the P base 2F is OFF and the backup power source is ON. Since the main power supply is on during normal business hours at the amusement hall, the determination is NO by SF501, the control proceeds to SF507, and the detection signal rises when the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened. Each time it is opened, a process of counting up the number of times of opening is performed, and the connection is triggered by the rise of the detection signal associated with the disconnection of the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F. Every time it is removed, the number of times is counted up. This count-up is counted up in the current value storage area (current value table) described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 (c) shows how the current value table is counted up during normal operation when the power is turned on. In the current value table, the count value is counted so as to loop, such as counting up from 0, counting up to 62 which is the upper limit thereof, and counting up from 0 again. Then, the value of the current value table counted up by the SF 507 is displayed on the 7-segment display 50F.

  On the other hand, during the period from when the amusement hall is closed and the P main power is turned off until the main power is turned on at the start of business the next morning, the determination of YES is made by SF 501 and the control is performed in SF 502. Proceed to In SF502, control is performed to store the value (current value) in the current value storage area (current value table) shown in FIG. 142 as a stored value (3 to 8 in FIG. 142). Next, SF 503 controls to count up the current value in the current value table every time it is opened or disconnected every time the detection signal rises until it returns to the stored value in the current value table. . FIG. 143 (b) shows how the current value table counts up during monitoring when the main power supply is OFF. The stored value is set to n, counts up from n, counts up to the upper limit thereof, n + 61, and stores 63 as a value in which the one-round flag is set if the detection signal further rises in this state. When the stored value reaches the value at which this round flag is set, the stored value is held at the value of “63” without performing any counting operation even if the detection signal subsequently rises.

  Next, control proceeds to SF504, where it is determined whether or not the main power source is ON and the backup power source is OFF. Until that time, the operation of SF503 is repeatedly executed. When the main power supply of the P stand 2F is started up at the game hall at the start of the next morning, the determination of YES is made by the SF 504, the control advances to SF 505, and the stored value of the RAM is triggered by the call from the payout control board 17F. Control is performed to calculate a difference value based on the current value and output the difference value to the payout control board 17F. As described with reference to FIG. 142, this output is repeated in the form of a loop by repeating the same data at all times while the CS signal is rising (during high level). As described above, the CLK signal is timed out, for example, at 100 μs, and control is performed to output data from the first bit in synchronization with the next rise of the CLK signal.

  Next, when a round flag is set after data output (CS, CLK predetermined operation) by SF 506, the flag is cleared and the stored value stored in the bit storage area of RAM 3-8 is set to 0. To clear. On the other hand, if the round flag is not set, the control is continued without clearing the stored value, and the process proceeds to SF507.

  In the above-described SF 506, before the stored value is cleared to 0, the stored value may be overwritten and saved to the current value, and then the stored value may be cleared to 0. In addition, the timing of overwriting and saving the stored value to the current value or clearing the stored value to 0 may be triggered by power-on, but in addition, after the transmission of the detection count data to the payout control unit 171F, the difference Any timing may be used as long as the value data can be normally output.

  Next, based on FIG. 144, the specific control content of the count display process by the payout control unit 171F will be described. First, the data such as the difference value from the count counter 120F is received by the SF 510 when the power of the P stand 2F is turned on. Next, in SF511, it is determined whether or not the received value is a value (= 63) where the round flag is set. If the received value is not the value at which the round flag is set (= 63), the control proceeds to SF 512, and control is performed to display the received value on the 7-segment display 50F. On the other hand, if the received value is a value where the round flag is set (= 63), the control proceeds to SF513, and control is performed to display the error number on the 7-segment display 50F. This error number is a number representing an abnormality in which the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F are opened and the count value in the current value table reaches the number of times of opening during the period when the power of the P stand 2F is OFF such as at night. It is. Next, control to transmit the error number to CU3F is performed by SF514. The CU3F receives the error number, notifies the abnormality by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, displays the error number on the display 312F, and further displays the error number to a higher-level device (for example, a hall management computer or a hall server 801F). Control to send.

  In addition, the CU 3F that has received the error number may perform control to stop the game by the P stand 2F or restrict some functions by the CU 3F itself or in response to a command from the host device.

<P fraud detection alarm>
Next, alarm (notification) control by detecting fraud on the P platform 2F will be described. When it is detected that the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P base 2F or the line between the P base 2F and the CU 3F is disconnected, the P base 2F is provided with an indicator or speaker provided on the P base 2F itself. The CU3F (more specifically, the CU control unit 323F, hereinafter simply referred to as CU3F) may be set to perform notification. For example, when fraud is detected by the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F makes a notification requesting the alarm setting to the CU 3F, and the CU 3F holds the alarm setting based on the notice. While the alarm setting is held, the CU 3F issues an alarm notification using a display or a speaker provided.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining P fraud detection alarms when the power is turned on / off. FIG. 145 shows a night frame opening flag for detecting that the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P base 2F, a P base line disconnection flag for detecting the disconnection of the line between the P base 2F and the CU 3F, CU3F The CU alarm setting indicating the alarm setting state at CU, and the CU alarm notification time change indicating the notification state at the CU3F based on the alarm setting are illustrated. First, referring to FIG. 145, control of P fraud detection alarms prior to the present embodiment (conventional) will be described. When the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P table 2F, the front frame open detection switch 13F detects the opening of the front frame 5F, and detects fraud with respect to the P table 2F. The nighttime frame release flag shown in FIG. 145 becomes H level at the timing when the P frame 2F detects that the front frame 5F is opened at nighttime. When detecting the fraud, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on the fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU 3F performs the nighttime frame open alarm setting (conventional) shown in FIG. 145 and holds the alarm setting. The CU 3F performs the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 145 according to the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality with the display 54F as an alarm notification (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  Next, when the power of the P base 2F is turned off and a line disconnection occurs in the communication between the P base 2F and the CU 3F, the P base line disconnection flag shown in FIG. 145 becomes the H level. Then, the P unit 2F notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on the P unit line disconnection (off state). That is, the P base 2F transmits a predetermined signal (for example, a clock signal) to the CU 3F at regular intervals when the communication with the CU 3F is normal. A predetermined signal cannot be transmitted from the base 2F to the CU3F. Accordingly, the P base 2F (particularly the payout control unit 171F) detects a disconnection (off state) with the CU3F (particularly the communication control IC 325aF), and the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F receives a signal from the P base 2F. It can be considered that the alarm setting based on the detection of the line disconnection (off state) is notified from the P unit 2F because it is not received.

  Based on the notification from the P unit 2F, the CU 3F performs the alarm setting for the P unit line disconnection (conventional) shown in FIG. 145 and holds the alarm setting. The CU 3F performs alarm notification (conventional) of the P unit line disconnection instead of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 145 by the alarm setting of the P unit line disconnection (off state). Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by the indicator 54F as an alarm notification (conventional) of the P-unit line disconnection, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  When the power of the P stand 2F is turned off, the nighttime frame release flag shown in FIG. 145 is reset and becomes L level. In the example shown in FIG. 145, since the front frame 5F is closed before the power of the P platform 2F is turned off, the night frame release flag is set to L even when the power is turned on. Remain in level. However, the P stand 2F cannot notify the CU 3F of the release setting for canceling the alarm setting for releasing the nighttime frame because the nighttime frame release flag is at the L level while the power is off. Therefore, the alarm setting for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 145 (conventional) is held without being released even after the power of the P stand 2F is turned off.

  Thereafter, when the power source of the P unit 2F is turned on, the P unit line disconnection flag shown in FIG. 145 becomes the L level. The P unit 2F notifies the CU 3F of a cancel setting request for canceling the alarm setting of the P unit line disconnection (off state). That is, when the P base 2F is not in communication with the CU 3F due to the off state, a predetermined signal is not transmitted. However, when the power of the P base 2F is turned on, the P base 2F is switched from the P base 2F to the CU 3F at regular intervals. A predetermined signal starts to be transmitted. As a result, the P base 2F (particularly, the payout control unit 171F) detects line restoration with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F, and the CU3F (particularly, the communication control IC 325aF) receives the signal from the P base 2F to receive the line. It can be considered that the release setting for canceling the alarm setting based on the detection of the disconnection (off state) is notified from the P unit 2F.

  The CU 3F cancels the alarm setting (conventional) for the P unit line disconnection shown in FIG. 145 based on the notification from the P unit 2F, and the alarm setting is released. The CU3F stops alarm notification (conventional) of the P line disconnection (off state). On the other hand, in the CU3F, the alarm setting (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame is continuously maintained regardless of the alarm setting (conventional) for the P platform disconnection (off state). This night frame opening alarm setting (conventional) continues to be held until communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is started and the alarm setting release signal is notified from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F (night frame opening release). . Therefore, the CU3F has a problem that the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame is continuously performed even if the alarm notification (conventional) of the line disconnection (off state) shown in FIG. 145 is stopped. In other words, if the alarm notification (conventional) of line disconnection (off state) and the alarm notification (conventional) of opening the night frame use the same notification means, the store clerk turns on the power of the P stand 2F. In spite of this, there was a possibility of misunderstanding that the notification continued.

  Next, control of P fraud detection alarms according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the P stand 2F detects fraud, it notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU3F performs the nighttime frame open alarm setting (this implementation) shown in FIG. 145 and holds the alarm setting. CU3F performs alarm notification (this implementation) of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 145 by the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by using the display 54F as an alarm notification for opening the night frame (this implementation), or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  In addition, when the power supply of the P unit 2F is turned off and the alarm setting request based on the P unit line disconnection (off state) is notified to the CU3F, the release setting for canceling the alarm setting for opening the night frame (this implementation) is also performed by the CU3F. Is considered to have been notified. Therefore, based on the notification, the CU 3F performs the alarm setting for P line disconnection (off state) shown in FIG. 145 (this implementation) and cancels the alarm setting for opening the night frame (this implementation). In other words, the CU 3F stops the alarm notification (this implementation) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 145, and then performs the alarm notification (this implementation) of the line disconnection (off state). Therefore, in the CU3F, when the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned on, the alarm setting (actual implementation) of the line disconnection (off state) shown in FIG. It becomes. That is, this embodiment can improve the problem that the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame continues even after the power of the P stand 2F is turned on. Even if the alarm notification of the line disconnection (off state) and the alarm notification of the nighttime frame opening are the same notification means, the store clerk can misidentify because the notification is stopped by turning on the power of the P stand 2F. Sexuality can be reduced.

  Next, FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining P fraud detection alarms at the time of disconnection. FIG. 146 shows a night frame opening flag for detecting that the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P base 2F, a P base line disconnection flag for detecting the disconnection between the P base 2F and the CU 3F, and CU3F. The CU alarm setting indicating the alarm setting state at CU, and the CU alarm notification time change indicating the notification state at the CU3F based on the alarm setting are illustrated. First, with reference to FIG. 146, control of P fraud detection alarms prior to the present embodiment (conventional) will be described. When the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P table 2F, the front frame open detection switch 13F detects the opening of the front frame 5F, and detects fraud with respect to the P table 2F. The night frame opening flag shown in FIG. 146 becomes H level at the timing when it is detected that the front frame 5F is opened at night on the P platform 2F. When detecting the fraud, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on the fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU 3F performs the nighttime frame opening alarm setting (conventional) shown in FIG. 146 and holds the alarm setting. The CU3F performs alarm notification (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame shown in FIG. 146 according to the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality with the display 54F as an alarm notification (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  Next, when a disconnection occurs in the communication wiring between the P base 2F and the CU 3F and a line disconnection occurs in the communication between the P base 2F and the CU 3F, the P base line disconnection flag shown in FIG. 146 becomes H level. Then, the CU 3F receives an alarm setting request based on the P-unit line disconnection (disconnection) from the P-unit 2F. That is, when the communication with the CU 3F is normal, the P base 2F transmits a predetermined signal (for example, a clock signal) to the CU 3F via the communication wiring at a constant interval. By disconnection, a predetermined signal cannot be transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. Thus, the P base 2F (particularly the payout control unit 171F) detects a disconnection (disconnection) with the CU3F (particularly the communication control IC 325aF), and the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F can receive a signal from the P base 2F. It can be considered that the alarm setting based on the detection of the disconnection (disconnection) is notified from the P-unit 2F. Further, the CU 3F cancels the setting by regarding the notification of the alarm setting based on the detection of the line disconnection (disconnection) as the notification of the cancel setting for canceling the alarm setting based on the set fraud (opening the night frame).

  Based on the notification from the P unit 2F, the CU 3F performs the alarm setting for the P unit line disconnection (conventional) shown in FIG. 146 and holds the alarm setting. The CU3F performs alarm notification (conventional) of the P unit line disconnection instead of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 146 by the alarm setting of the P unit line disconnection (disconnection). Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by the indicator 54F as an alarm notification (conventional) of the P-unit line disconnection, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  Even if a line disconnection occurs in the communication between the P platform 2F and the CU 3F, the open state of the front frame 5F is continued, so the night frame open flag shown in FIG. 146 remains at the H level. In the example shown in FIG. 146, the open state of the front frame 5F continues even after the disconnection of the communication wiring is recovered (disconnection recovery) and the communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is started. Thereafter, the nighttime frame release flag remains at the L level.

  Thereafter, when communication between the P unit 2F and the CU 3F is performed by restoring the disconnection of the communication wiring, the P unit line disconnection flag shown in FIG. 146 becomes L level. The CU 3F receives from the P unit 2F a release setting for canceling the alarm setting for the P unit line disconnection (disconnection). That is, the P base 2F does not transmit a predetermined signal when communication with the CU 3F is not performed due to disconnection, but when the disconnection is restored, a predetermined signal starts to be transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F at regular intervals. . As a result, the P base 2F (particularly, the payout control unit 171F) detects line restoration with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F, and the CU3F (particularly, the communication control IC 325aF) receives the signal from the P base 2F to receive the line. It can be considered that the release setting for canceling the alarm setting based on the detection of disconnection (disconnection) is notified from the P base 2F.

  The CU 3F cancels the alarm setting (conventional) for the P unit line disconnection shown in FIG. 146 based on the notification from the P unit 2F, and the alarm setting is released. The CU3F stops alarm notification (conventional) of the P platform line disconnection (disconnection). On the other hand, in the CU3F, the alarm setting (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame is continuously maintained regardless of the alarm setting (conventional) for the P unit line disconnection (disconnection). This alarm setting for opening the night frame (conventional) continues to be maintained even after the disconnection with the CU3F is restored. Therefore, the CU3F has a problem that the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame is continuously performed even if the alarm notification (conventional) of the line disconnection (disconnection) shown in FIG. 146 is stopped. In other words, if the alarm notification (conventional) for line disconnection (disconnection) and the alarm notification for opening the night frame (conventional) use the same notification means, the store clerk recovers from the disconnection between the P stand 2F and CU3F. In spite of this, there was a possibility of misunderstanding that the notification continued.

  Next, control of P fraud detection alarms according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the P stand 2F detects fraud, it notifies the CU 3F of an alarm setting request based on fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU 3F performs the nighttime frame opening alarm setting (this implementation) shown in FIG. 146, and the alarm setting is held. CU3F performs alarm notification (this implementation) of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 146 by the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by using the display 54F as an alarm notification for opening the night frame (this implementation), or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  Further, when a line break occurs in communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F, and the alarm setting request based on the P stand line break (disconnection) is notified to the CU 3F, the alarm setting for releasing the night frame (this implementation) is canceled. The cancellation setting is also notified to the CU3F. Therefore, based on the notification, the CU 3F performs the alarm setting for P line disconnection (disconnection) shown in FIG. 146 (this implementation) and cancels the alarm setting for opening the night frame (this implementation). In other words, the CU3F stops the alarm notification (this implementation) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 146, and then performs the alarm notification (this implementation) for the line disconnection (disconnection). Therefore, when the disconnection of the communication wiring is restored and the communication between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is started, the CU3F cancels the alarm setting (actual implementation) of the line disconnection (disconnection) shown in FIG. 146 and stops the alarm notification. All alarm notifications are stopped. In other words, the present embodiment can improve the problem that the alarm notification for opening the nighttime frame (conventional) continues even after the disconnection is restored. Even if the alarm notification for line disconnection (disconnection) and the alarm notification for opening the night frame are the same notification means, the store clerk may misrecognize because the notification is stopped by turning on the power of the P stand 2F. Can be reduced.

  When the open state of the front frame 5F in the P stand 2F continues even after the disconnection from the CU 3F is restored (night frame open maintenance), communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is started and the night frame is released. Based on the alarm setting, the P unit 2F notifies the CU 3F again. CU3F performs the alarm notification (this implementation) of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 146 by the alarm setting of the P platform disconnection (disconnection) notified again. Specifically, the CU 3F notifies the abnormality by using the display 54F as an alarm notification for opening the night frame (this implementation), or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal. That is, even if the alarm notification of line disconnection (disconnection) and the alarm notification of the nighttime frame opening are the same notification means, the store clerk stops the notification when the disconnection between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is restored, and then the P Since the notification by the alarm setting based on the line disconnection (disconnection) is performed after the communication between the base 2F and the CU 3F is started, the possibility of misidentifying both notifications can be reduced.

  Furthermore, if the time until the communication between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is started after the disconnection between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F is short, the clerk may misidentify both notifications even with the above-described configuration. There is. Therefore, the P stand 2F performs the alarm setting for opening the nighttime frame again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after canceling the line disconnection (disconnection) alarm setting, and notifies the CU 3F. Thereby, even if the time until the communication between the P base 2F and the CU 3F is started after the disconnection between the P base 2F and the CU 3F is short, it is possible to reliably prevent the store clerk from misidentifying both notifications. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where it is detected that the front frame 5F is opened at night is detected as fraud detection for the P stand 2F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and fraud detection for the P stand 2F. If so, it may be prize ball goto detection, illegal addition detection, illegal winning detection, radio wave sensor detection, and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which fraud is detected by the P stand 2F and an alarm setting request is notified to the CU 3F, but fraud is detected by the P stand 2F and the detection result is notified to the CU 3F. A configuration in which alarm setting is performed by CU3F may also be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the P unit line disconnection is detected by the P unit 2F and the alarm setting request is notified to the CU3F has been described. However, the CU3F detects the P unit line disconnection and performs the alarm setting. Also good.

<Aggregating process performed by the card unit>
Next, the CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses the response of the state information response received from the P stand 2F to perform a counting process of counting the number and ratio of the pachinko balls that have passed through each region according to the firing intensity. explain.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the counting process performed by CU3F (more specifically, CU control unit 323F).

  In step (hereinafter, step is abbreviated as “S”) 10, the CU 3F determines whether or not a response of the status information response is received from the P base 2F. If a response to the status information response is received (YES at SF610), the process proceeds to SF611. If not (NO at SF610), the process proceeds to SF615.

  In SF611, the CU3F performs a firing intensity correction process. This process is a process for correcting the firing strength T to 0 (minimum value) when the handle operation amount is substantially zero (value when the handle is not operated). By performing this correction processing, even when there is a variation between the handle operation amount and the firing strength T due to play or play of the hitting ball operating handle 25F, the firing strength T can be accurately detected. .

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing a detailed procedure of the firing intensity correction process.
In SF111, CU3F determines whether or not it is immediately after power-on of P base 2F. For example, the CU 3F determines that it is immediately after power-on of the P stand 2F when the connection sequence processing at the time of power-on is being performed.

  If the P stand 2F has just been turned on (YES in SF111), the CU 3F stores the current launch intensity T as the initial launch intensity T0 in the internal memory in SF112. The initial firing strength T0 is the firing strength T when the handle operation amount is zero. That is, the CU 3F assumes that the handle operation amount is 0 immediately after the power of the P stand 2F is turned on, and stores the value in the internal memory. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF114.

  On the other hand, if not immediately after power-on of the P platform 2F (NO in SF111), the CU 3F reads the initial firing strength T0 stored in the internal memory in SF113. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF114.

  In SF114, CU3F calculates a value obtained by subtracting initial firing strength T0 from current launching strength T as corrected firing strength T. Thereafter, the processing is moved to SF612 in FIG. Since the following tabulation process is performed using the emission intensity T after the correction process, the tabulation process accuracy is improved.

  Returning to FIG. 147, in SF612, the CU 3F determines whether or not the aggregation process is to be interrupted (hereinafter referred to as an aggregation interruption period).

  FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the change in the firing intensity T and the total interruption period. In the example shown in FIG. 149, the firing intensity T, which was stable at a relatively small value, starts to increase at time t1, reaches the maximum value “99” at time t3, and is maintained at the maximum value “99” after time t3. ing.

  When the firing strength T changes, the passing area of the pachinko balls also changes, but there is a time lag until the passing area of the pachinko balls fired with the changed firing strength T is detected. Therefore, when the launch intensity T changes, even if the change in the launch intensity T thereafter stabilizes (converges to a certain value), the launch intensity T and the pachinko ball are not changed for a while (time corresponding to the above time lag). There is a possibility that the correspondence relationship with the passing area becomes unstable, and the reliability of the totalization processing result is lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the period from when the firing intensity T changes by a predetermined amount to when the predetermined period elapses is set as a total interruption period. The “predetermined amount” and the “predetermined period” may be fixed values or variable values that can be arbitrarily set and changed from the outside.

  In FIG. 149, the total interruption period is illustrated. In FIG. 149, the period α is illustrated as the total interruption period. This period α is a time t4 when the above-mentioned “predetermined period” has elapsed from the time t1 when the firing intensity T has increased by an amount (above “predetermined amount”) from the value lower than the threshold T1 It is a period until. In the “predetermined period”, it is predicted that, from the start of the period α, the pachinko balls that are fired after the start of the period α are stable and the firing intensity T is stable and before the firing intensity T is stable have all passed the game area 27F. It is desirable that the period is longer than the period up to the time point.

  In FIG. 149, periods β and γ are also illustrated as examples of other aggregation interruption periods. The period β is a period from the time when the firing intensity T starts to change (time t1) to the next time when the firing intensity T starts to stabilize (time t3). The period γ is a period from time t3 when the firing intensity T starts to change to time t5 when the predetermined period has elapsed after time t3 when the emission intensity T started to stabilize. The “predetermined period” used for setting the period γ can also be set based on the same concept as the “predetermined period” used for setting the period α. A period in which at least one of the periods β and γ is appropriately combined with the period α may be set as the aggregation interruption period.

  Returning to FIG. 147, if it is during the aggregation suspension period (YES in SF 612), CU 3 F interrupts the aggregation processing in SF 614. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF615.

  On the other hand, when not in the total interruption period (NO in SF 612), the CU 3F executes a process of totaling the number of times and the ratio that the pachinko balls have passed through each area by the firing intensity in SF 613. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF615.

  150 to 153 are diagrams illustrating the contents of the total data obtained as a result of the total processing.

  In the aggregated data shown in FIG. 150, the number of passages of each area (specifically, the start winning ports 275F, 276F, 277F, the normal winning ports 272F, 273F, 274F, the big winning port 271F, the probability variation winning port 271aF) It is tabulated for each intensity T (in the example shown in FIG. 150, for each area obtained by dividing the variable area 0 to 99 of the firing intensity T by 10 and the same for FIGS. 151 to 153).

  151 and 152, the passing ratio of each region (specifically, the start winning ports 275F, 276F, 277F, the normal winning ports 272F, 273F, 274F, the big winning port 271F) is the firing strength T. It is tabulated separately. In FIG. 151, the passage ratio of each region when the total number of passages of each region is 100% is shown for each firing strength T. On the other hand, in FIG. 152, the passage ratio of each region is shown for each firing strength T when the total number of passages for each firing strength T in each region is 100%.

  In the aggregated data shown in FIG. 153, the number of times of passing through each area (specifically, the start winning ports 275F, 276F, 277F, the normal winning ports 272F, 273F, 274F, the big winning port 271F, the probability changing winning port 271aF) is 100, respectively. The percentage of passage of each region when it is set as a percentage is tabulated for each firing intensity T. In FIG. 153, the ratio shown in parentheses in the column indicating the passage ratio of the probability variation prize opening 271aF is the passage ratio of the probability variation prize opening 271aF when the number of passages of the big prize opening 271F is 100% (that is, The ratio of the number of passes of the probability variation prize opening 271aF to the number of passes of the big prize opening 271F) is shown for each firing strength T.

  By referring to the aggregated data as shown in FIGS. 150 to 153, the correspondence relationship between the firing strength T and the pachinko ball passing region (which region the pachinko ball easily passes depending on the firing strength T) is appropriate. Can grasp. Therefore, at the store side where the P stand 2F is installed, the nail adjustment of the P stand 2F can be performed with reference to these tabulation results.

  Note that the aggregate data illustrated in FIGS. 150 to 153 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto. Moreover, it is not always necessary to totalize the total data shown in FIGS. 150 to 153, and may be appropriately selected as necessary.

  Returning to FIG. 147, in SF615, the CU 3F determines the presence / absence of a display request for the total result. It should be noted that the display result display request is input to the CU 3F, the P platform 2F, the hall server 801F, and the like by, for example, a game shop clerk. If there is a request to display the total result (YES in SF615), the process proceeds to SF616, and if not (NO in SF615), the process ends.

  In SF616, the CU 3F displays the total result (total data as shown in FIGS. 150 to 153). The display location may be, for example, the display 54F or another display (not shown).

  As described above, the CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2F to perform the counting process of counting the number of times and the ratio that the pachinko balls have passed through each region by the firing strength T. Do. Thereby, according to the launch strength T, it is possible to grasp which region the pachinko ball is likely to pass (or whether it is difficult to pass). Therefore, the counting result can be used for nail adjustment of the P table 2F.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine having the upper shooting structure, such as the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment, compared to the pachinko machine having the lower shooting structure, the pachinko ball is fired until it enters the game area 27F. Since the distance is short, the pachinko ball passage region tends to change more greatly with respect to the change in the firing strength T. In the P stand 2F having such an upper shooting structure, the correspondence between the firing strength T and the passing area is totaled, which is very effective for adjusting the nail.

<Fire abnormal determination process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing intensity T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2F to determine whether or not there is a pachinko ball launch abnormality (coloring failure). Judgment processing is performed. Here, the abnormal shooting is an abnormality in which the firing motor 18F is operating even though the pachinko balls are not supplied to the launching device. The irregular hitting may occur when the player leaves the seat while the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed by a fixing device or the like with the handle operation amount being substantially larger than zero.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the firing abnormality determination process performed by CU3F (more specifically, CU control unit 323F).

  In SF20, the CU 3F determines whether or not the firing strength T is greater than 0 (minimum value). If firing intensity T is greater than 0 (YES at SF20), the process proceeds to SF21; otherwise (NO at SF20), the process ends.

  In SF21, CU3F determines whether or not the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet are changed. Note that CU3F avoids being always determined to be abnormal immediately after the start of the game, and after a certain period of time has elapsed since the firing strength T is determined to be greater than 0 (minimum value), It is determined whether or not the number of balls passing through the mouth has changed.

  When the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet are changed (YES in SF21), CU3F determines that the firing is normal (that is, there is no abnormal shooting) in SF22.

  On the other hand, when at least one of the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet has not changed (NO in SF22), CU3F is determined to have a firing abnormality (that is, an abnormal shooting has occurred) in SF23. To do.

  Thus, CU3F which concerns on this Embodiment determines with the firing abnormality of a pachinko ball, when the firing strength T is larger than 0 (minimum value) and the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing out of the outlet does not change. . For this reason, it is possible to appropriately detect a firing abnormality (coloring abnormality).

<Putting area identification process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing strength T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2F to identify which area of the game area 27F the pachinko ball has been driven into. Include area identification processing.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a driving area specifying process performed by CU3F (more specifically, CU control unit 323F).

  In SF30, CU3F determines whether or not there is a driving area specifying request. The driving area specifying request is input to the CU 3F, the P stand 2F, the hall server 801F, and the like by, for example, a game shop clerk. If there is a driving area specifying request (YES at SF30), the process proceeds to SF31, and if not (NO at SF30), the process ends.

  In SF31, the CU 3F performs a process of setting a “fired intensity threshold range” used for specifying a driving area (hereinafter referred to as a threshold range setting process).

  FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating the correspondence between the driving area and the firing intensity threshold range. In FIG. 156, the driving area is divided into a “right hitting area”, a “left hitting area”, and a “bumping area”. In the present embodiment, the “right hit area” is an area on the right side of the game area 27F, and the “left hit area” is an area on the left side of the game area 27F. Further, the “bumping area” is an area where the pachinko ball is likely to flow toward the start winning opening 276F when the pachinko ball is driven into this area. The “injection area” is generally arranged at the upper left periphery of the variable display device 278F, but the position can be adjusted by a nail configuration.

  As shown in FIG. 156, a firing intensity threshold range is set for each driving area. Specifically, the firing strength threshold range AR for specifying the right hitting area AR (lower limit value ARlow to upper limit value ARhi), the firing strength threshold range AL for specifying the left hitting area specified (lower limit value ALlow to upper limit value ALhi), This is a firing intensity threshold range AB (lower limit value ABlow to upper limit value ABhi) for specifying the concavity region. These firing intensity threshold ranges AR, AL, AB are stored in the internal memory (ROM or RAM) of the CU3F.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a detailed procedure of threshold range setting processing.
In SF711, the CU 3F determines whether or not there is a request for changing the firing intensity threshold range. This change request is input to the CU 3F, the P stand 2F, the hall server 801F, and the like by, for example, a game shop clerk.

  When there is a change request (YES in SF711), CU3F changes the firing intensity threshold range in SF712. Note that the specific change (how much the threshold range is changed) is made, for example, in accordance with a value input by manual operation or download by the store clerk who made the change request. The changed firing intensity threshold range is stored (updated) in the internal memory of the CU3F. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF32 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when there is no change request (NO in SF711), CU3F reads the firing intensity threshold range stored in the internal memory in SF713. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF32 in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 155, at SF32, CU3F receives launch intensity T from P platform 2F. Then, CU3F specifies in which area of the game area 27F the pachinko ball is driven, as a result of comparing the received launch intensity T with the launch intensity threshold range in SF33. Specifically, when the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AR (more than the lower limit value ARlow and less than the upper limit value ARhi), the driving area is specified as the “right hitting area”. When the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AL (more than the lower limit value ALlow and less than the upper limit value ALhi), the driving area is specified as the “left hit area”. When the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AB (when it is equal to or higher than the lower limit value ABlow and lower than the upper limit value ABhi), the driving area is specified as a “bumping area”.

  Thus, CU3F which concerns on this Embodiment specifies the implantation area | region of the pachinko ball according to whether the firing strength T is included in the firing strength threshold range. Thereby, according to the launch strength T, it is possible to specify which region the player is aiming for.

  In the present embodiment, the hitting area of the pachinko ball is specified according to whether or not the launch intensity T is included in the launch intensity threshold range, but whether or not the launch intensity T is equal to or greater than a threshold value. The pachinko ball driving area may be specified according to the above.

  In addition, since the bump area is an area that overlaps a part of the right hit area or the left hit area, the launch intensity threshold range of the hit area is also the same as the launch intensity threshold range of the right hit area or the left hit area. , Some overlap. For this reason, in specifying the driving area, in addition to the right hitting area or the left hitting area, the hitting area may be specified.

<Measurement process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3F according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing strength T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2F, and the design of the variable display device 278F changes after the player starts the game. A measurement process is performed to measure the time until the start.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of measurement processing performed by CU3F (more specifically, CU control unit 323F).

  In SF40, CU3F determines whether or not a changing signal is received from P table 2F. If the changing signal is received (YES at SF40), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the changing signal has not been received (NO in SF40), CU3F determines in SF41 whether the firing strength T has started to increase from 0 (that is, whether the player has started playing). Determine. If firing intensity T has not started increasing from 0 (NO in SF41), the process is terminated.

  When firing intensity T starts to increase from 0 (YES at SF41), CU3F starts time measurement at SF42.

  After starting the time measurement, the CU 3F determines in SF43 whether or not a changing signal is received from the P base 2F (that is, whether or not the symbol of the variable display device 278F starts to change). When the changing signal is not received (NO in SF43), CU3F moves the process to SF44 and continues time measurement. Thereafter, the process is returned to SF 43, and the time measurement is continued until the changing signal is received.

  When the changing signal is received (YES in SF43), CU3F ends time measurement in SF45. As a result, the CU 3F can measure the time from when the player starts the game until the symbol of the variable display device 278F starts to change.

  As described above, the CU3F according to the present embodiment starts from the time when the firing strength T starts to increase from substantially zero in a state where the changing signal is not received (that is, when the player starts the game). The time until the time when the changing signal is received (that is, the time when the symbol of the variable display device 278F starts to change after the pachinko ball wins one of the start winning holes 275F, 276F, and 277F) is measured. Thereby, it is possible to grasp how long the pachinko ball has won the start winning opening 275F, 276F, 277F and the design of the variable display device 278F starts to fluctuate after the player starts playing. it can.

<System including hall management computer and central management device>
Next, a system including a hall management computer and a central management device will be described.

  FIG. 159 is a block diagram for explaining a system including a hall management computer (hereinafter referred to as a hall control) 900F and a central management apparatus 1000F.

  In one game hall, a plurality of P stands 2F and CU 3F are installed, and a hall server 801F and a hall controller 900F connected to the plurality of P stands 2F and CU 3F are installed one by one.

  The hall control 900F is directly connected to the hall server 801F. The hall control 900F includes an arithmetic device (not shown) and an internal memory, and is configured to execute a predetermined arithmetic processing based on data stored in the internal memory. The hall server 801F is connected to a plurality of CU3Fs, and collects output signals from the plurality of CU3Fs and transmits them to the hallcon 900F.

  The central management device 1000F is installed in a place different from each game hall. The central management device 1000F is communicably connected to a plurality of hall computers 900F installed in a plurality of game halls. The central management device 1000F acquires and manages a plurality of aggregated data (see FIGS. 150 to 153) aggregated by the CU3F of each game arcade by the above-described aggregation process from a plurality of amusement halls for each model of the P unit 2F. .

<Summary calculation processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900F is a process (hereinafter referred to as the following) that aggregates the results of aggregation processing (see FIG. 150 to FIG. 153 described above) performed by each CU3F in its own store (the game hall in which it is installed) by machine type and gaming machine. Summarization processing).

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a procedure of summary tabulation processing performed by hall control 900F.

  At SF50, hall control 900F aggregates the result of the aggregation processing performed by each CU3F in its store in association with the model and machine number of the gaming machine. As for the timing of aggregation, for example, each CU 3F may perform aggregation every time aggregation processing is performed, or may be performed collectively at the end of business on that day.

  In SF51, hall control 900F executes a summary tabulation process using the aggregated data.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating the contents of summary summary data obtained as a result of summary summary processing. As shown in FIG. 161, the hall control 900F uses the results of aggregation processing by each CU 3F (see the aggregated data illustrated in FIGS. 150 to 153 above) as the gaming machine model (model X, model Y, model Z,... ) Data are collected separately and by machine number (001, 002 ...). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 161, the hall control 900F totals the total and average of each model.

  Returning to FIG. 160, in SF52, hall control 900F determines whether or not there is a request to display a summary count result. The summary count display request is input by, for example, a store clerk at the store. If there is a request to display the summary count result (YES in SF52), the process proceeds to SF53, and if not (NO in SF52), the process ends.

  In SF52, hall control 900F displays the summary count result. The display location may be a display (not shown), for example.

  As described above, the hall control 900F according to the present embodiment aggregates the result of the aggregation processing of each gaming machine in its own store by machine type and gaming machine (unit number). By referring to the aggregation result, it is possible to grasp the state of the nail adjustment of each gaming machine in the store at once. Therefore, this aggregation result can be effectively used to determine the overall balance of nail adjustment of each gaming machine in the store.

<Threshold range storage processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900F acquires the firing intensity threshold range (see FIG. 156) used when each CU 3F in the store performs threshold range setting processing (see the flow in FIG. 157) from each CU 3F, Further, a process of storing for each gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a threshold range storing process) is performed.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram exemplifying data stored in the internal memory of the hall control 900F by the threshold range storing process. As shown in FIG. 162, the hall control 900F sets the firing intensity threshold range for each driving area by game machine model (model X, model Y, model Z...) And by machine number (001, 002...). Remember.

  This makes it possible to collectively manage the nail adjustment state (launch strength threshold range) of each gaming machine in the game hall.

<Other store model display processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900F obtains and displays the aggregated data for each model of other stores (amusement halls different from the one where it is installed) from the central management device 1000F (hereinafter referred to as “other store model display processing”). Do).

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of another store type display process performed by hall control 900F.

  In SF60, hall control 900F determines whether or not there is a request to display other store type data. The other store machine type data display request is input to the CU 3F, the P stand 2F, the hall server 801F, and the like by, for example, a game shop clerk. If there is no other store machine type data display request (NO in SF60), the process ends.

  If there is a request to display other store type data (YES at SF60), hall control 900F acquires the other store type data from central management apparatus 1000F at SF61.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram schematically illustrating another store machine type data. As shown in FIG. 164, in the other store type data, the aggregate data of other stores (A hall, B hall, C hall...) Is stratified by each model (model X, model Y, model Z...). ing. Note that the total data as illustrated in the above-described FIGS. 150 to 153 is input to each column of the other-store machine type data.

  Returning to FIG. 163, the hall control 900F displays the total data of the other game machine types by using the other store type data acquired from the central management apparatus 1000F in SF62. The display location may be, for example, a display (not shown) connected to the hall control 900F, or may be the display 54F of any P platform 2F.

  As described above, the hall control 900F according to the present embodiment performs a model-specific display process of acquiring and displaying the aggregated data of the models of other stores from the central management apparatus 1000F. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the nail of the own game hall with reference to the state of the nail adjustment according to the model of the other store.

  Note that the data acquired by the hall control 900F from the central management apparatus 1000F is not limited to that shown in FIG.

  For example, when the central management device 1000F aggregates the aggregated total data (see FIG. 161) of each game hall and calculates the average data for each location of the game hall, the hall control 900F stores the average data for each area. It may be acquired from the central management device 1000F and used for adjusting the nail of the own store. Thereby, for example, it is possible to adjust the nail of the own game hall with reference to what kind of nail adjustment is performed by another store in the same area as the own store.

  In addition, when the central management apparatus 1000F has data that summarizes the result of threshold range storage processing (see FIG. 162) stored in the hall control 900F of another store, the data of the other store is automatically stored. The store hall control 900F may be acquired (downloaded) from the central management apparatus 1000F and stored. Thereby, it is possible to set the firing intensity threshold range of the own store with reference to the setting status of the firing intensity threshold range of the other store. In addition, the hall control 900F may automatically set the firing intensity threshold range of its own store based on the data of another store acquired from the central management device 1000F.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 165 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 165, a slot machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine or S unit) 2S is provided such that front door 2bSF can be opened and closed with respect to main body frame 2aSF with its left side edge as a swing center. It has been. Although not shown in FIG. 165, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2SF in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2SF, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2SF, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2SF is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF.

  A touch panel type display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510F is a display corresponding to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) similar to the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510F is connected to the display control unit 350F of the CU similarly to the display unit 54F of FIG. 62, and display control is performed on the CU side. The indicator 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, but is provided at a lower panel portion (position below the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  In addition, the front door 2bSF has a single BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) A MAXBET switch 6SF that is operated when the game is started, a start switch 7SF that is operated when the game starts, and stop switches 8LF, 8CF, and 8RF that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on S units 2SF, first, similarly to P units, after securing game points using adjacent CUs, the number of bets is set using the game points. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use game points, one-sheet BET switch 5SF or MAXBET switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510F is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7SF is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, all the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped, so that one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is set to each reel 2LF, 2CF, When the display is stopped as a result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a game point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510F is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 59, the S stand 2SF is provided with a counting button 28FS for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the card return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 62). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display 510F in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted, and the state where the game points are decreased while the points are increased is displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3F as a status information response via the P stand 2F or the S stand (slot machine) 2SF. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be determined not to win is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the S stand 2SF when a start operation is detected. Equivalent to the main controller 161F of the base). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2SF is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). This payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aSF by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S stand 2SF is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aSF in a state of being attached to a board mounting board for connecting wiring. The board mounting board is a board corresponding to the game board 26F shown in FIG. 61, and includes a connector similar to the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F.

  To connect a mounting mechanism for mounting the board mounting board and a convex drawer connector on the board mounting board side to a predetermined position (for example, below the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF) in the main body frame 2aSF of the S base 2SF. The connector is provided. The mounting mechanism and the connector have the same structure as the mounting mechanisms 34aF and 34bF and the concave drawer connector 33F shown in FIG. 61, and are devised so that the board mounting board can be easily fixed to the mounting mechanism. The wiring extending from the concave drawer connector is connected to the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, various operation switches (buttons) and the like.

  Similarly to FIG. 139, the S base 2SF has a configuration for detecting the opening of the front door 2bSF corresponding to the front frame 5F of the P base 2F and detecting the connection between the main body frame 2aSF and the board mounting board. The main control board is also connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500F.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 166 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 64 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Here, further explanation is omitted.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) In this embodiment, the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number are defined in the message format as different data, but these may be shared as a request sequence number. In particular, the addition of game balls and the counting of game balls are the opposite processes, so it is unlikely that both processes will occur at the same time. From this point of view, it is possible to reduce the amount of message data by sharing both serial numbers It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request is generated until the request sequence number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the sequence number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request sequence number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the example of FIG. 71, it is conceivable that the counting sequence number included in the last status information response indicating completion of counting is set to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 2.

  Request sequence numbers such as addition sequence numbers and count sequence numbers, and normal sequence numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated (addition update, subtraction) according to a predetermined rule stored in both P unit 2F and CU3F. Update, update by other arithmetic expressions). In this case, the serial number is not “sequential numbers” such as 1, 2, and 3, but data that is updated based on concepts such as A, B, and C.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the gaming system, for example, a game in which there are P reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board that controls the reels. Corresponding to the board, the other configuration corresponds to the front frame of the P units. However, the various detection switches 41aF, 701F, 33F, the firing control board 31F, and the firing motor 18F in the front frame shown in FIG. 62 are not necessary for the S platform.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510F or 29SF.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display a number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. In other words, if there is an operation of the single BET switch 5SF, the bet number setting value is incremented by 1, and the credit is decremented by 1. If the MAXBET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming card power. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (4) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (5) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may be one using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (6) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting for counting is displayed on the display of P units or the CU side. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game point as the holding point when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  Further, the above-described “recording medium processing operation for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed as a holding point” is, for example, a card return operation. In addition, the “predetermined process” is a process of recording a score so as to be specified on a card inserted in the CU when a card return operation is detected, and returning the card. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

  (12) If a counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, the counting operation may be invalidated if the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. In addition, even when the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number If the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected is less than the reference value, the counting operation may be invalidated.

  Further, whether or not a game is in progress may be determined based on whether or not a ball firing operation has been detected, and the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27F) becomes zero. Whether or not (not in game) or not (in game) may be determined. Further, it is conceivable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine to invalidate the counting operation during the game is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF are stopped.

  (13) Referring to FIG. 71, the P platform is provided with a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (14) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 73 may be a text indicating “Please count because there are game balls left”, or display the count button 28F on the screen and blink. Such a display may be used. In addition, the P stand 2F that has received the card return ready state ON may display the game balls on the game ball number display 29F in a blinking manner, or when the game ball number display 29F is configured by an image display device. Alternatively, the message described as the above embodiment may be displayed on the game ball number display 29F to prompt the counting operation.

  (15) In order to change the number of game points to be converted in one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (16) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short press operation of the counting button is different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (17) When counting game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from the speaker 270F. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (18) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (19) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is the primary station and the gaming machine is the secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (20) In this embodiment, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side. However, game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side. Then, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (21) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54F may be similarly performed on the display 312F.

  (22) In CU3F, the stored number of game balls is updated based on the value of the addition ball counter (addition ball count) and the value of the subtraction ball count counter (subtraction ball count) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, for hall use). An error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801F).

  (23) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (24) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the player is grasping the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (25) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (26) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (27) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 66 to 86 is not limited to a transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3F, P stand 2F, S stand 2SF, etc. For example, CU3F, P The present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as a table 2F, a jet counter, and a POS terminal. 89 and 90 is applied between the CU control unit 323F inside the CU3F and the security chip (SC) 325bF, and between the security chip (SC) 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF. May be.

  For example, when the processing related to the game ball addition request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325bF, the CU control unit 323F transmits a game ball addition request message, and consent to this is transmitted. Alternatively, the SC 325bF returns a rejection message via the communication control IC 325aF based on the response on the P platform 2F side.

  When processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF, the security chip (SC) 325bF transmits a game ball addition request message via the CU control unit 323F. Then, the communication control IC 325aF returns a consent or refusal message for this based on the response on the P platform 2F side.

  When the processing related to the counting request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325bF, the SC 325bF sends the counting request message to the CU control unit via the communication control IC 325aF based on the request on the P unit 2F side. The CU control unit 323F sends back a consent or rejection message to the 323F.

  When the processing related to the count request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF, the communication control IC 325aF transmits a count request message based on the request on the P platform 2F side, The security chip (SC) 325bF returns a rejection message based on an instruction from the CU control unit 323F.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID, but instead of or in addition to that, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the card ID matches the insertion time is stored as the current score by the CU, but the gaming machine and the CU3F Control is made so that the score transmitted from the gaming machine is stored as the current score as a further condition that the communication has been started until a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication was interrupted. May be. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323F, and at the start of communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on the condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F coincides may be stored as the current score. .

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings) and the corresponding game points are added, the value withdrawn. However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (32) In this embodiment, the key management server is installed in the key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (33) The CU control unit 323F receives the board security information (including the board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800F to the CU control unit 323F without using the hall server 801F between the key management server 800F and the CU control unit 323F. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800F and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801F is provided between the key management server 800F and each CU.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the number of balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card. By doing so, the player who interrupted the game returns and then returns to the original CU3F, and the ball is converted into a game ball 125 by the operation of converting the possession ball into a game ball. Shown what can be converted to play games. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation is stored in the CU3F as a custody ball (which also stores the C-ID and the insertion time) different from the game ball and the holding ball, and the holding ball is not added. Discontinue processing by ejecting the card without recording the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the interruption operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. It is also possible that information on the custody ball is transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and then discharged, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. So that you can't exchange prizes with that card. As a method for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, it is also possible to adopt the following method other than using the suspended flag of the card.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player suspended on the hall server side is stored as an interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for prize exchange is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for the exchange of the prize is an interrupted card, the exchange of the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is given the game points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion process for all game points is completed (game points = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322F)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  (36) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the description has been given by taking the ball number, the game ball, the remaining amount of the card, the storage ball, the number of balls information and the game table information. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278F or the display 54F, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (37) In the game ball number display 29F, a display is made in which the number of balls decreases one by one in conjunction with the ball firing or counting operation. In addition, the game ball number display 29 </ b> F displays that the number of balls increases by one or a predetermined number of units according to a ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29F is composed of an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, the number of game balls is not simply displayed digitally, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to a ball or not is counted. Whether it is due to winning, winning a prize, due to savings, or due to a lending operation, an image according to the type is displayed along with the display update of the number of game balls You may make it do.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, the game ball number display 29F performs counting display in conjunction with the counting operation, but when the game ball number display 29F is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. As with the display 54F, while the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof is decreased, an image display in which the number of holding balls is increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display on the display unit 54F, a display in which the data on the number of game balls is converted to data on the number of balls (eg, a bar graph display) The number of game balls and the number of balls are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of balls, or the display of moving a part of the number of balls to the number of balls is repeated. It is possible.

  (38) As shown in FIG. 73, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected in the state where the game balls remain is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined waiting period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the standby period elapses, for example, the previous card return operation may be invalidated. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even when the standby period has elapsed, the fact that the card returning operation has been invalidated may be displayed on the display on the CU 3F or P stand 2F side.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected with the game balls remaining may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined waiting period. In this case, the card return process may be executed again by executing the card return operation after counting all the game balls in accordance with the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. Alternatively, when the counting of all game balls is completed, or before and after that, a display for prompting a card return operation may be performed on the display on the CU 3F or P stand 2F side.

  In the present embodiment, if even one game ball remains when a card return operation is detected, the processing shown in FIG. 73 is executed. However, the processing shown in FIG. 73 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when a card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game balls may be made faster than usual. For example, in a normal counting operation, a display in which game balls are counted one by one is displayed, while in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a display in which a plurality of game balls are counted together, or for all games It is conceivable to display such that balls are counted together.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all game balls are counted, but a larger number of game balls than the normal counting operation are counted. It is good. For example, normally, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted as one counting operation, but in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a larger number of 200 gaming balls are counted. You may be made to do. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all game balls is reduced compared to when there is no card return operation, and counting of all game balls is completed early. Can do.

  Also, if a card return operation is detected with game balls remaining, even if no counting operation is detected, start counting all game balls, and then proceed to card return processing. Also good. In this case, when counting of all game balls is started, the fact that counting of all game balls is started may be displayed on the P stand 2F or CU 3F. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not counting of all game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P stand 2F or CU3F, a card return operation again, etc.) is detected. It is also possible to start counting all game balls on the condition.

  In addition, the card return operation detected during the game (during ball launching) may be invalidated, but the card return operation is not invalidated, and the counting operation during the game is performed on the P platform side. The counting process based on the above may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, CU3F determines whether the number of game balls is 0, when card return operation is detected. However, such a determination may be made by the P base 2F. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating the presence of a card return operation is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, and the number of game balls stored in the P stand 2F that receives it is 0. It is determined whether or not. If it is 0, the number of game balls is 0 or data that permits card return is sent to CU3F, while if it is not 0, the number of game balls is not 0, waiting for card return or prohibition of card return. The indicated data is transmitted to the CU3F.

  In the above embodiment, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P table 2F determines whether or not a card return operation is detected before the operation is detected. However, such determination means may be provided in the CU3F. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P base 2F transmits data indicating that to the CU 3F. In response, the CU3F may determine whether or not there has been a card return operation within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  In the above-described embodiment, the P table 2F detects the counting operation, while the CU 3F detects the card return operation, while the CU 3F detects the counting operation, while the P table 2F detects the card returning operation. Alternatively, both operations may be detected by the P stand 2F or the CU 3F. Further, both the counting button and the card card return button may be attached to the CU3F or the P stand 2F, and one of them may be the CU3F or the P stand 2F.

  (39) The presence or absence of a change in the number of holding balls or game balls is checked on the CU or P stand. If the number of holding balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, the fact is notified on the CU or P stand. You may do it. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). This makes it easier for the store clerk to grasp, for example, a table that has been abandoned while the remaining few balls are left unattended.

  (40) Alternatively, when a player's game ball changes even though the card is not inserted into the CU, the fact may be notified by the CU or P platform. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). Thereby, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, it becomes easy for the store clerk to grasp the stand where the ball caught on the game board wins and the game ball is left as it is paid out.

  (41) In the present embodiment, the CU 3F compares and determines the previous game table information and the latest game table information from the P table 2F with the data stored on its own, and the data on the P table 2F side is not improperly padded. Confirm that the data is correct. If an error is determined on the CU3F side, such a situation is simply caused by the exchange of the CU3F (regular data to be compared is not stored in the CU3F after the exchange), and is based on fraud. Since there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the store clerk confirms the error and cancels the error with a portable terminal device such as a remote control. However, when the CU 3F has been replaced with a new one in this way, the CU 3F may not perform the above error determination at all. Alternatively, the above error determination function may not be provided in the CU3F regardless of whether or not it has been replaced.

  (42) In the present embodiment, a card, which is a recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player, is inserted into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F at the start of the game, and is removed from the card insertion / discharge slot 309F after the game ends. The configuration has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card may be placed on the card reading unit at the start of the game and removed from the card reading unit after the game ends. In other words, the recording medium receiving means for receiving the recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player may be attached to the recording medium receiving means at the start of the game and removed from the recording medium receiving means after the game ends.

  (43) In the present embodiment, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the information waiting for card removal, and the P stand 2F that has received the notification of the information indicates that “please remove the card” 278F. The configuration for notifying the card removal such as displaying on the card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CU 3F displays “please remove the card” on the display 54F and / or the display 312F while notifying the P stand 2F of the information waiting for the card removal. It may be configured to notify the card removal on the CU side.

  (44) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2F receives the status information request command including ON waiting for card removal = ON until the status information request command including OFF waiting for card removal is received. The configuration for continuing the notification of sampling has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2F is waiting for card removal = after receiving a status information request command including ON, even if a card removal notification is given for a certain period of time, it is still waiting for card removal = The card removal notification may be intermittently performed after the status information request command including ON is received until the status information request command including OFF is received = OFF.

  (45) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2F receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F when the card is received and communication is restored, and the P stand A configuration has been described in which a match determination is made with the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in 2F, the recovery process is performed if they match, and the continuation of the game is prohibited if they do not match. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2F determines whether the “store code” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F matches the “store code” held in the P stand 2F, or The “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU3F and the “SC board ID” held in the P platform 2F are determined to match, and if they match, recovery processing is performed. In this case, it may be configured to prohibit the continuation of the game.

  (46) In this embodiment, since the loop-shaped power line 500F is also wired (power line 500F) in the main control board 16F, the connecting portion between the power line 500F of the game board 26F and the power line 500F of the main control board 16F is The example (refer FIG. 139 (a)) which functions as a main control connection detection means and can detect the electrical connection of the game board 26F and the main control board 16F was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the loop-shaped power line 500F may also be provided in the main control semiconductor chip 16a of the main control unit 161F provided on the main control board 16F. Thereby, replacement of the main control semiconductor chip 16a can also be detected.

  (47) In the present embodiment, since the loop-shaped power line 500F is also wired in the payout control board 17F, the connecting portion between the front frame 5F and the payout control board 17F functions as the payout control connection detection means. An example (see FIG. 139 (a)) in which electrical connection between the frame 5F and the payout control board 17F can be detected is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the loop-shaped power line 500F may also be provided in the payout control semiconductor chip 17a of the payout control unit 171F provided on the payout control board 17F. Thereby, replacement of the payout control semiconductor chip 17a can also be detected. Here, the payout control means includes the payout control board 17F, the payout control unit 171F, the payout control semiconductor chip 17a, and the like.

  (48) In the present embodiment, any of the entities that perform the above-described totalization processing, firing intensity correction processing, firing abnormality determination processing, driving area identification processing, and measurement processing can directly receive signals from the P base 2F. Although the CU3F is selected, the subject that performs these processes is not limited to the CU3F.

  For example, if necessary, a main body that performs all or part of these processes can be performed by using a hall control 900F, a hall server 801F, and the like that can indirectly acquire a signal from the P stand 2F via a stand terminal or an island terminal. Alternatively, the central management device 1000F may be used. For example, the hall control 900F may directly perform the counting process (flow in FIG. 147) for each gaming machine.

  If necessary, the main body that performs all or part of these processes may be a calling lamp (not shown) provided for each P base 2F. A call lamp is provided for each gaming machine, and has a function of calling a staff member of a game hall by operating a button by a player and a function of displaying a game history such as the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations between jackpots. It is.

  (49) Moreover, you may make it attach an IC tag to a pachinko ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify which pachinko ball is at the time of launch and at the time of passing through any one of the winning areas (winning entrance or gate). For this reason, in the counting process, it is possible to identify the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T of the same pachinko ball identified by the IC tag and the passing area. As a result, it is possible to more accurately determine which region the pachinko ball tends to pass according to the launch intensity.

  (50) If the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed by a player, the above-described firing intensity correction process cannot be performed. Therefore, it may be detected and notified that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed. Further, when the firing intensity is stable at a constant value, it may be determined that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed.

  (51) For example, whether or not the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F can be detected by a touch sensor.

  Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the player is not touching the hitting ball operating handle 25F, the above-described firing intensity correction process may be performed.

  Further, in the firing abnormality determination process, when it is detected that the player does not touch the hitting operation handle 25F and it is detected that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed, it is determined that there is a launching abnormality. It may be.

  (52) In this embodiment, the hall control 900F acquires the information of the P base 2F via the CU 3F, but the hole control 900F directly receives the information of the P base 2F from the P base 2F without passing through the CU 3F. The structure which acquires may be sufficient.

(53) When the payout control unit 171F receives the value (= 63) in which the round flag is set, the abnormality control process is executed by adopting one or two or more of those listed in the following a to c. You may control as follows.
a Display unit (for example, a 7-segment display 50F and a variable display device that variably displays identification information (design)) by the payout control unit 171F or the main control unit 161F that receives abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F Is displayed.
b CU3F that has received the abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F performs abnormality notification such as an error number.
c An abnormality notification such as an error number is performed in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from the CU3F.

  (54) In this embodiment, when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3F is the card insertion state, the P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3F is the card insertion state, a warning is displayed on the display 54F or the like, or notification is given to the host server. May also be notified.

  (55) In this embodiment, when “Closed” is set, a card ID = 0 and a card insertion time = 0 for a gaming machine in which a card is not inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F. The configuration is described in which a counting process is performed in which it is assumed that a virtual card is inserted, and the remaining game balls are counted, stored in the card, and returned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the card ID of the virtual card that is considered to be inserted is counted as the card ID of the card that was inserted immediately before closing, and the remaining game balls are inserted immediately before closing. The configuration may be such that it automatically associates with the card that has been stored.

  (56) In this embodiment, when the recovery request 2 command is transmitted to the P base 2F even though it is determined that the recovery request is not required by the CU 3F, the recovery determination of the recovery process is performed again by the P base 2F. A configuration has been described in which processing NG is notified to the CU 3F when it is not necessary. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is unnecessary to perform the recovery process determination again on the P platform 2F, a warning is displayed on the display 54F or the like, or a notification to that effect is sent to the host server. You may do it.

  (57) In the present embodiment, if the state where the key management server 800F does not reach the CU control unit 323F even if it transmits a health check request command continues for 10 days, for example, it is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded, The configuration in which the timed operation function of the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is invalidated has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of days until the timed operation function of the CU 3F or P stand 2F is invalidated is displayed on the display 54F, or the timed operation function having a plurality of restriction levels is stepwise. It may be invalidated.

  (58) In the present embodiment, the control of setting and canceling the alarm setting has been described in relation to the alarm setting based on fraud for the P base 2F and the alarm setting based on the disconnection of the P base line. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to alarm setting setting and release control in relation to the alarm setting based on fraud on the P base 2F and another alarm setting based on other fraud on the P base 2F. The alarm setting may be applied to the setting and cancellation of the alarm setting in three or more relationships between the alarm setting based on a plurality of frauds on the P unit 2F and the alarm setting based on the disconnection of the P unit.

  (59) In the present embodiment, a main control chip ID, which is an example of the game board side unique information, and a payout control chip ID, which is an example of the frame side unique information, are shown, and both of these IDs are acquired by the CU3F. If the host device (key management server or hall server) authenticates and the authentication succeeds, the game on the gaming machine is allowed. However, the CU3F (for example, the CU control unit 323F) acquires both regular IDs from the host device in advance, and the CU3F compares and verifies both the regular IDs and the two IDs acquired from the gaming machine. You may do. That is, the authentication of both IDs may be directly executed by the CU3F.

  Further, as unique information of the game board and the frame, an ID different from the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID is embedded in a predetermined place (a place other than the payout control unit 171F and the main control unit 161F) of the game board and the frame. Alternatively, the above-described authentication may be performed using the ID. Further, the above-described authentication is performed using the unique information on the game board side and the unique information on the frame side, and if the authentication is successful, the game by the gaming machine may be permitted. Further, even if authentication fails, the CU 3F may allow a game by a gaming machine under certain conditions. For example, the game is allowed until a predetermined period elapses, and the game is disabled after the predetermined period elapses. The game is allowed until a predetermined number of card remaining amount or use of points is reached. For example, it is possible to prohibit the use of the remaining card balance or points after that.

  As described in the above embodiments, the “slot machine 1 as an example of a gaming machine and the medal lending machine 100 as an example of a gaming device” or “an example of a gaming machine”. As for the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750 as an example of a gaming device, as described in relation to the “P 2F, S 2SF, and CU3F”, the unique information from the gaming machine is used as a game. The game device may be allowed to play a game on the condition that the device has acquired and succeeded in the authentication based on the unique information. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine 701, the pachinko gaming machine 701 may be configured with a game frame and a gaming board in the same manner as the P stand 2F, and an ID may be embedded in each of the main control unit and the payout control unit. . In the case of the slot machine 1, an ID may be embedded in the game control microcomputer that executes the game control of the slot machine 1. In the case of the card unit 750, the configuration is the same as that of the CU3F, and in the case of the medal lending machine 100, the control unit 181 may be configured by the CU control unit 323F and the security board 325F as in the case of the CU3F. Further, the game board and the game frame may have different or different specific information (ID) used for authentication.

  Further, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine, a game frame and a game board are provided, a payout control unit in which a payout control chip ID is embedded in the game frame, and a main control chip ID in which a main control chip ID is embedded in the game board. Each control unit is provided. On the other hand, also in the case of a slot machine, a game frame and a game board are provided. The game board in the slot machine is a board surface on which a game control board for executing game control is mounted, for example. In addition, the game frame in the slot machine is, for example, a housing including a front door of the slot machine, and an attachment location for attaching a board surface on which a game control board is mounted is provided at a predetermined location where the front door is opened. It is a frame. In the game frame, a payout control board for controlling game points is mounted in the same manner as a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine control board of the slot machine includes a main control unit in which the main control chip ID is embedded as in the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout control board of the slot machine is embedded in the payout control chip ID as in the pachinko gaming machine. Includes payout controller.

  In the present embodiment, “ratio (ratio, probability)” is exemplified, but “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and for example, among values in the range of 0% to 100%, It may be a value including 0%, a value including 100%, or a value not including 0% and 100%.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 100 medal lending machine, 107, 107 'screw, 108a, 108b screw insertion hole, 109, 109' high brightness part, 140 receiving part, 141 introduction path cover, 141a front plate, 141b side plate, 141c inclined plate, 141d Inclined plate, 148, 148 ′ punching hole, 160 lid member, 160a lid plate, 160b lid member side plate, 162, 162 ′ female screw hole, 165 light emitting unit, 182 dispensing device, 190 counting device, 500 card management computer, 540 Hall computer, 550 medal management computer, 701 pachinko machine, 750 card unit, 2F pachinko machine, 2SF slot machine, 3F card unit, 16F main control board, 17F payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F display , 309F card insertion / discharge port, 319F re-play button, 320F IR light-receiving unit, 321F lending button, 322F return button, 161F main control unit, 325F display control unit, 171F payout control unit, 323F CU control unit.

Claims (2)

A gaming apparatus capable of performing a game enabling process for enabling a game using a game medium in a gaming machine using a valuable value owned by a player,
Receiving means capable of receiving a plurality of types of recording media;
Counting processing means for executing a counting process for counting the number of game media usable for a game as the number of possessed game media;
A recording medium processing means for processing the number of the possessed game media obtained by the counting process so as to be specified corresponding to the recording medium when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected;
A prescribed number determining means for determining whether or not the number of possessed game media obtained by the counting process has reached a prescribed number;
Impossibility of disabling the processing of the recording medium processing means based on the predetermined recording medium processing operation when the specified number determining means determines that the number of possessed game media has reached the specified number Mobilization means,
Notification means for performing a predetermined notification when it is determined by the specified number determination means that the number of possessed game media has reached the specified number;
The disabling means is
Depending on the type of recording medium that has been accepted in the previous SL reception means, said recording medium whether to execute deactivation processing of the processing means Ri Do different,
Even if the number of possessed game media falls below the prescribed number after it is once determined that the number of possessed game media has reached the prescribed number by the prescribed number judging means, the processing of the recording medium processing means is performed. A gaming device to be deactivated . When a second recording medium different from the first recording medium is received after the first recording medium is received, the value of the value corresponding to the first recording medium and the possessed game medium Summing processing means for performing summing processing for enabling at least one of the numbers to be specified corresponding to the second recording medium;
Setting means for performing a setting process for performing settings relating to execution of a specific process different from the summing process in association with the first recording medium when a specific operation is received after the first recording medium is received; With
When the first recording medium is received and the second recording medium is received after receiving the specific operation, the setting unit associates the setting related to the execution of the specific processing with the second recording medium. The gaming device according to claim 1, which performs processing.

Images